Special Surveying Equipment 2014

Transcription

Bohnenstingl
Special Surveying Equipment
Start
2014
Exit
Bohnenstingl GmbH
Ernst-Ackermann-Str. 20/1 · D-74366 Kirchheim/Neckar
Telefon +49 (0) 71 43 / 89 10 03 · Telefax +49 (0) 71 43 / 9 40 32
E-Mail : firma@bohnenstingl.de · Internet: www.bohnenstingl.de
Bohnensting l S p e c i a l
S u r v e y i n g
E q u i p m e n t .
2
Product overall view 2014
ontents
Linked c
By simply
n the
clicking o
rticle you
desired a
rwarded
will be fo
levant
to the re
e page!
catalogu
1
1.1
1.2
Excursion prism constant
Definition Prism- and Additionconstants / Overview table
Not only for Leica-Users: One prism constant for all measurement tasks!
2
2.1
2.2
2.3
Small prism, reflectors and accessories
Series HIP: High quality special small prisms and reflective targets on holders
Prisms and reflectors on L-holders / construction surveying / Monitoring
Series TOP + ONRT for Standard-Mini prisms MP24 and reflective targets
on holders
RUNDUM-Prism 6 x 60°
Accessories for the series HIP, TOP, ONRT + RUNDUM 6 x 60°
• Circular level and extensions
• Adapters and transport bag
• Stake out pins
• Holder for mounting on bolt
Ranging pole aligner and -clamp for small prisms
Holder for prisms of foreign manufacturers
Precision prism 17.5 – with spike for facade measurement / lanyard
Measurement of concrete elements with bevel
Prism-Monitoring-System
• Ball prism ø 30 mm and ø 1.5"
• Base for ball prism ø 30 mm and ø 1.5"
new • Base (stainless steel) with height-offset 25 mm
• Prism on L-holder with magnetic base
Centering plates ø 33 mm and ø 40 mm for Prism-Monitoring-System
Ball-Base for industrial 3 D-Measurements
2.4
2.5
2.6
2.7
2.8
2.9
2.10
new
2.11
2.12
3
3.1
Railway surveying
• Railway angle
• Prism holder for bolt demarcation
4
4.1
Prism swan neck
Prism swan neck with extension / lanyard
5
5.1
5.2
5.3
5.4
Holder for sighting frame stake out
Manual reflector holder
Prism-Nail holder HIT
Pendulum holder for Prisms/Reflectors
Surveying Instrument Holder 5/8"
6
6.1
6.2
6.3
Wall bolts as survey points
M8-/Leica wall adapters
Wall bolts for installation with mortar or spread clamping
G 3/8“ wall adapter in tunnel construction
7
7.1
Poles for prisms and GNSS antenna / height measurement
• telescopic prism poles / standard with screw clamping
• prism pole S_10, clamping with eccentric lever
• prism pole S_10 with double prism
• circular level to screw on / with velcro
• extensions and strut bipod for prism poles
• adjusting base for prism poles
• telescope poles made of GFK with accessories
• telescope pole 4,50 m
• telescope extension for standard poles with ø 32 mm (1 ")
Height determination of prisms and GNSS antenna through laser distance meters
GNSS-antenna pole „Frame“ with accessories
Compass for GNSS antenna pole
Boom (eccentric) for poles for easy determination of sewer heights
7.2
7.3
7.4
7.5
7.6
2014/content
Page 1 (of 3)
Ernst-Ackermann-Straße 20/1 · D-74366 Kirchheim/N. · Tel. +49 (0) 7143 / 89 10 03 · Fax 9 40 32 · E-Mail: firma@bohnenstingl.de · www.bohnenstingl.de
S u r v e y i n g
E q u i p m e n t .
3
ontents
Linked c
By simply
n the
clicking o
rticle you
desired a
rwarded
will be fo
levant
to the re
e page!
catalogu
Grayed out topics
are not translated. If you need
information about
a grayed out topic
anyway, please
contact us.
neu
8
8.1
8.2
Measuring of lateral- and length eccenters
Prism pole for eccentric measurement of building corners
Eccentric measuring with Rundum- or 360°-prism
9
9.1
9.2
9.3
9.4
9.5
9.6
9.7
System „Vektor“
Universal prism pole Vektor / System describtion and applications
System overview
Describtion: material and equipment
Bases / Base with fully integrated prisms or base with modular structure
Extensions
Accessories
Boom (excenter) for easy determination of sewer heights
10
10.1
Mini-Vektor for precision measuring
Mini-Vektor for tachymetric precision measurements
11
11.1
11.2
11.3
11.4
11.5
11.6
11.7
11.8
11.9
11.10
Halterungen „NiLas / KiLas“ für Laserstreckenmesser
Allgemeines zur Produktreihe NiLas / KiLas
BOSCH DLE 50 Pro
Geo Fennel Eco Dist Plus
Leica DISTO A2
Leica DISTO D3
Leica DISTO A5 / A6
Leica DISTO D5 / D8
Leica DISTO A8
Nedo Laser mEssfix
Precise distance measurements between 2 ground points with
long distance meters
12
12.1
12.2
12.3
12.4
12.5
12.6
12.7
12.8
12.9
12.10
12.11
12.12
12.13
12.14
12.15
12.16
12.17
Holders for field computers and Data-Radio-Modems
Übersicht - in Bearbeitung Tripod holder System Uni 168
Seco Universal-Klemmen und Rechner-Halterungen
DRS ARMOR X10 und X10 gx
Mettenmeier Colibri X5, X6, X7
Panasonic Toughbook CF-18 / 19
Panasonic Toughbook CF-U1
Drehhalterung für Trimble TSC2 und TSC3
Hakenplatte für ITRONIX Q.200
Datenfunkmodem NiceCom 800
Trimble Datenfunk „External Radio“
Getac V100
Trimble GeoXH, mit Teleskopstab
Trimble Juno
Panasonic Toughbook CF-H2
DRS ARMOR X7
Panasonic FZ-G1
Universal Computer Holder ALOVAR: s. Special catalogue "ALOVAR"_2014.PDF
neu
Page
drucken
zur Produktübersicht
13
13.1
13.2
13.3
13.4
13.5
Tripods for field computers and prism poles
Lightweight tripod „easy going“ for field computers
Mini tripod with pole clamp for short prism poles
Joint tripod with pole clamp for short prism poles
Ranging pole tripod
Mobile pole clamp for tripods with cylindrical thread
14
14.1
14.2
Carrying holder „Carry Easy“ for field computers
„Carry easy“ for heavy computers starting from around 1000 g
„Carry easy“ for light computers up to around 1000 g
Schritt
zurück vor
Exit
2014/content
2014/XX.X
Page 2 (of 3)
S u r v e y i n g
E q u i p m e n t .
4
ontents
Linked c
By simply
n the
clicking o
rticle you
desired a
rwarded
will be fo
levant
to the re
e page!
catalogu
Grayed out topics
are not translated. If you need
information about
a grayed out topic
anyway, please
contact us.
15
15.1
Surveying-Instrument-Tripods and Tripod star for interior measurements
• brand tripods for surveying instruments
• tripod star for interior measurements with tachymeter and laser scanner
16
16.1
16.2
16.3
Tribrachs and inserts for intrument tripods
• tribrachs
• optical perpendicular
Tribrach-inserts
Holder for the mounting of tribrachs on tables
17
17.1
17.2
Target signs for terrestrial laser scanning
ball target sign
target plates
18
18.1
Adapters and extensions
Adapters and extensions
19
19.1
19.2
Special designs
Leica 360°-Mini prism / Adapter and extensions / circular level
Trimble Target-ID
20
20.1
Magnetic-/Suction holder for GNSS-Antenna and prisms
• magnetic holder
• suction holder
21
Terms of sales, delivery and payment
22
Order form
2014/content
Page 3
3)
S u r v e y i n g
E q u i p m e n t .
5
K
So
ZP
vertcical axis 2
vertcical axis 1
Prism constants
-34.4 mm. In Leica’s system this prism has a constant of 0.0 mm by definition.
In the current generation of total stations one must
distinguish between two definitions of the prism
constant (offset).
The manufacturers Nikon, Pentax, Sokkia. Topcon
and Trimble (formerly Geodimeter, Spectra Precision,
Zeiss) now all define the prism constant as an
correction, that is, as a correction of the measured
distance based on the physical and design characteristics of the prism or reflector in the instrument.
In the case of triple prisms these factors are the
type and length of the glass body and the mechanical mounting of the prism on the holder. The
magnitude of the prism constant is determined by
the distance between the vertical axis of the prism
holder (target point) and the theoretical turning
point So of the measuring beam, which is behind
the glass. If the vertical axis is situated right at
point So (as in the former Geodimeter prisms; see
vertical axis 1 in the diagram), then the prism constant equals 0. In other commercially available
prisms (except for some prism rings) the vertical
axis is always in front of the turning point So. The
measured distance will then be too long and the
corresponding correction (prism constant K) will be
negative. If the vertical axis runs through the centre
of the prism (vertical axis 2 in the drawing), also
called the centre of symmetry, the prism has the
best mounting from the point of view of error
correction. In this case, inaccurate prism alignment
in the total station will have a minimal effect on
measurements of angles and distances.
Thus if non-Leica prisms are to be used with Leica
systems or if Leica prisms are to be used with nonLeica systems, the following conversion methods
must be applied:
Leica is the only company that uses a different definition. Leica’s prism constant is defined with reference to its standard round prism (GPH1 + GPR1).
Following the above method of calculation, this
prism has a true prism constant (correction) of
If a non-Leica prism with a given true prism constant
is to be used with a Leica total station, 34.4 mm
must be added to the value.
Example of a non-Leica prism with a true constant
of K = -30 mm:
-30.0 mm +34.4 mm = +4.4 mm. This is the adjustment that must be made on the Leica total station.
If, on the other hand, a Leica prism with a Leica
system constant is to be used with a non-Leica total
station, 34.4 mm must be subtracted.
Example for the Leica 360° prism GRZ121 with a
Leica constant of +23.1 mm:
+23.1 mm -34.4 mm = -11.3 mm. This is the adjustment (rounded off, if necessary) that must be made
on the non-Leica total station.
The following table takes these considerations into
account, showing the constants of the most common commercially available prisms and reflectors
for non-Leica systems and for the Leica system. In
modern total stations, these constants can be entered directly and called up via hotkeys. Measured
distances are thus corrected automatically.
To avoid having to change the settings for constants
in the total station when a prism is changed, one
should use standard prisms or prisms of other
manufacturers with identical constants.
Small pirsms with matched prism constants
A total station is usually purchased together with a
standard prism. Small prisms or 360° prisms made
by the same manufacturer have constants different
from that of the standard prism, making it necessary
to adjust the set-tings for prism constants in the
total station.
Total stations with automatic prism type recognition
are not yet on the market. If one forgets to make
the necessary adjustment (even if it only means
pressing a button), the measurement results are
often seriously thrown off. This source of error can
be eliminated only by making sure that the prisms
used have constants matching those of the standard
prisms.
For this reason we have developed small prisms
with constants identical to those of all the standard
prisms of major manufacturers. Because we use
high-quality glass in combination with high accuracy,
the dimensions of these prisms are fully adequate
2014/1.1
2014/XX.X
for the high-performance total stations on the
market today. In addition, the prisms are designed
to achieve an accuracy that is close to the theoretical limit.
The table shows all the prisms that are available
from us (with the corresponding prism constants)
A special feature of all prisms used in the HIP series,
the L holders and the Vektor System sewer measuring rod is that they turn on the centre of symmetry.
That is, the tilting axis and the vertical axis pass
through the optical centre of the prism. Inaccurate
adjustment of a prism to the total station thus has
a minimal effect on measurements of angles and
distances. This is a great advantage when only the
prism centre is available as a target or when automatic targeting is used.
These prisms can be used for precision
measurements.
Page 1 (of 2)
S u r v e y i n g
E q u i p m e n t .
6
Prism-/Reflector type
Bohnenstingl-Prisms
with matched constant
Prism constant K in mm
Definition/System
Nikon, Pentax, Sokkia, Topcon,
Trimble (Geodimeter, Spectra
Precision, Zeiss)
Definition/System
Leica
+10
+44,4
+2
+36,4
0*
+34,4*
Trimble Multi Track Prism MT1000
Trimble prism ring for RMT 604/606
Trimble 360°-Prism (passive)
Reflection foil
Prisms from Nikon, Topcon, Spectra Precision (Geodimeter)
TOPCON 360°-Prism A7
Bohnenstingl TOP and ONRT (s.p. 2014/2.3 p.1-2)
Bohnenstingl Prisms and foil on L-Holder (s.p. 2014/2.2 p.1-2)
Bohnenstingl precision prism (s.p. 2014/2.8)
Bohnenstingl concrete parts with bevel (s.p. 2014/2.9)
Trimble 360°-Prism for Zeiss S 10
Leica 360° Mini GRZ101
-3
+31,4
-4,4
+30
-7
+27,7
-11,3*
+23,1*
-16,5
+17,9
-16,9*
+17,5*
-30*
+4,4*
-34,4*
0*
-35*
-0,6*
Sokkia 360°-Prism-Prism ATP1
Leica 360°-Prism GRZ4, GRZ121, GRZ122
Bohnenstingl HIP (s.p. 2014/2.1 p.1-2)
Bohnenstingl TOP (s.p. 2014/2.3 p.1-2)
Bohnenstingl Prism on L-Holder (s.p. 2014/2.2 p.1-2)
Bohnenstingl RUNDUM 6x60° (s.p. 2014/2.4 p.1-2)
Bohnenstingl Monitoring-System (s.p. 2014/2.10 p.1-6)
Bohnenstingl Ball prism Ø 1.5" (s.p. 2014/2.11 p.1)
Bohnenstingl Base Vektor (s.p. 2014/9.1-9.6)
Bohnenstingl Mini-Vektor (s.p. 2014/10.1 S.1-3)
Leica Mini GMP101
Bohnenstingl TOP and ONRT (s.S. 2014/2.3 p.1-2)
Bohnenstingl Prisma on L-Holder (s.p. 2014/2.2 p.1-2)
Bohnenstingl Ball prism Ø 1.5" (s.p. 2014/2.11 p.1)
Prismen from Sokkia, Pentax or Topcon
Leica Standard prism GPH1P, GPR121, GPR1 + GPH1
Bohnenstingl TOP and ONRT (s.p. 2014/2.3 p1-2)
Trimble (Zeiss ETR, KTR, KTO, KTM)
Bohnenstingl HIP (s.S. 2014/2.1 p.1-2)
* New 2012: Monitoring System: L-Prism with magnetic base: s. catalogue 2014/2.10 p. 11
2014/1.1
2014/XX.X
Satus: October 2013
- without guarantee -
Page 2 (of 2)
S u r v e y i n g
E q u i p m e n t .
7
Not only for Leica-Users:
The prism constant K = -11,3 (Leica = +23,1) mm
for every surveying task.
Modern total stations with automatic targeting or
tracking need 360° prisms as reflectors. These
prisms ensure continuous reflection even with
moving targets (measurement assistant or
one-man operation).
The two large 360° reflectors made by Leica, GRZ4,
GZR121 and GRZ122, have a true prism constant
of K = -11.3 mm (+23.1 mm according to Leica’s
definition). They are well suited for terrain surveys
and profile measurements in one-man measuring
mode and are therefore often found in measuring
equipment.
Their disadvantages are their size, weight and price,
along with lower accuracy in automatic targeting.
Owing to the design of the reflectors, the optical
centres of all the 360° prisms available up to now
“wander” from the vertical axis depending on how
far the prism pole has turned.
Thus, for all surveying tasks in which a constant K
= -11.3 mm (Leica definition = +23.1 mm) is
required, it is possible to use the following prism
family:
• Original Leica 360°-Reflectors GRZ4, GRZ121 and
GRZ122
• Tiltable prism HIP (s. cat. 2014/2.1 p. 1-2)
• Tiltable TOP (s. cat. 2014/2.3 p. 1-2)
• Tiltable prism on L-Holder
(s. cat. 2014/2.2 p. 1-4)
• Prism-Monitoring-System (s. cat. 2014/2.10)
• Universal prism pole (sewer measurement pole)
System Vektor (s. cat. 2014/9.1 - 9.6)
• Mini-Vektor for precision measurments
(s. cat. 2014/10.1)
• RUNDUM-Prism 6x60° (s. cat. 2014/2.4 p. 1).
• Only for measurements on reflective foil and of
points on buliding facades (s. cat. 2014/2.8) has
to be worked with a 2. prism constant ofK = 0
mm (Leica-Definition = +34,4 mm) .
For this reason we have developed a series of small
prisms, which are matched to the constants
of the abovementioned large 360° prisms
made by Leica.
Because each prism’s centre of symmetry is located
exactly on the vertical axis of the holder, they are
also suitable for precision measurements.
HIP-Prisms
TOP-Prism
Prism on L-Holder
System Vektor
RUNDUM-Prism 6x60°
m
0
10
m
V
Mini-Vektor
Monitoring-System
2014/1.2
2014/XX.X
Page 1 (of 1)
S u r v e y i n g
E q u i p m e n t .
8
Mini prism + Holder: Series HIP
Prism HIP (Highly Integrated Prism) is characterised as follows:
• a nice holder and a tiltable prism build a compact unity;
Tilting resistance can be defined.
• very low need for space of the cylindrical prism holder (radius only 22 mm)
• Special prisms for all prism constants. Tilting axis and vertical axis are always crossing the visible
prism center (central symmetric point).
• Glass diameter = 18 mm for prism constant K = -11 mm, for all other Ø = 25 mm.
• For measuring in longer distances, the cylindrical holder format provides a secure and exact targeting.
• High grinding accuracy of the prism glass, the range of the distance measuring is from 500 to 1000m
depending on instrument and weather.
• silver coated reflective surfaces; the prism in the casing remains clear also under extreme
weather conditions (difference in temperature)
• stable aluminium construction of the prism casing and holder.
• highest degree of precision assured by complete CNC-work – no casting mould.
• Good visibility of the holder due to orange-red signal colour
• widely usable due to the connections on both sides, either 5/8" – 5/8" or 5/8" – vertical bolt Leica.
• optimal accessories
• Option: prism center is marked in red
• Option: unscrewable tilting axis stub (2 pieces)
--> better visibility of the holder in larger distances
--> exact measuring of a target point with a cross eccentrum of 50 mm.
• Target with high quality reflecting foil (26 x 40 mm) as inexpensive alternative to glass prisms.
m
22
m
top view
Available with the following Prism constants K (Leica in brackets): - see catalogue 2014/1.1 p.1 Prism constant 0 (+34,4) mm in HIP-model not available with glass prism, because no bearing in the center of the prism is possible. Model TOP and ONRT see catalogue 2014/2.3 p.1-2.
side view
Reflector/Prism
Prism constant K (Leica in brackets)
reflecting target (26 x 40 mm)
glass prism ø 17,5 mm
0
-11,3
(+34,4) mm
(+23,1) mm = Leica 360°-Prisma
11
glass
glass
glass
glass
glass
-16,5
-16,9
-30,0
-34,4
-35,0
(+17,9)
(+17,5)
(+4,4)
(0)
(-0,6)
16
17
30
34
35
prism
prism
prism
prism
prism
ø
ø
ø
ø
ø
25
25
25
25
25
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
Short name xx
for Order-No.
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
50 mm
25 mm
Prisms with 5/8’’ thread
50 mm
50 mm
Prism HIP 2x 5/8’’
Prism holder in closed format:
• 5/8"female thread on top and bottom with 50 mm tilting axis height each.
without tilting axis stub
with 2 tilting axis stubs
reflecting target
Order-No.
prism center
regular format
Order-No.
prism center
marked red
Order-No.
1615 123,- €
1615.Z 136,- €
1610.xx 240,- €
1610.xx Z 253,- €
1611.xx 245,- €
1611.xx Z 258,- €
• circular level as an option: see catalogue p. 2014/2.5 p.1
xx: please specify the prism constant from the table above (in red), without +/- signs.
Holders, that are ordered without tilting axis stubs, can be refit in a limited way only.
50 mm
Prism HIP-U 5/8”
prism holder in U-format with 50 mm tilting axis height.
50 mm
reflecting target
Order-No.
1625 75,- €
1625.Z 88,- €
prism center
regular format
Order-No.
1620.xx 192,- €
1620.xx Z 205,- €
prism center
marked red
Order-No.
1621.xx 197,- €
1621.xx Z 210,- €
2014/2.1
2014/XX.X
Page 1 (of 2)
S u r v e y i n g
E q u i p m e n t .
9
50 mm
50 mm
25 mm
Prisms with Leica connection
Prism HIP Leica-5/8’’
Leica GPH1
• Leica vertical bolt connection Ø 12mm (push-button connection) with a tilting axis height = Leica round
prism GPH1.
• On the top, additional 5/8" female thread with 50 mm tilting axis height.
• Optional: circular level - s. Catalogue 2014/2.5 p.1
reflecting target
Order-No.
prism center
regular format
Order-No.
prism center
marked red
Order-No.
1635 149,- €
1635.Z 162,- €
1630.xx 266,- €
1630.xx Z 279,- €
1631.xx 271,- €
1631.xx Z 284,- €
50 mm
25 mm
Leica GPH1
Prisms HIP-U Leica
Order-No.
reflecting target
Order-No.
Order-No.
1645 100,- €
1645.Z 113,- €
prism center
regular format
prism center
marked red
1640.xx 217,- €
1640.xx Z 230,- €
1641.xx 222,- €
1641.xx Z 235,- €
Prisms holder in U-shape with Leica stud bold thread Ø 12 mm (snap connector).
Accessories for series HIP and HIP-U
Distance pin
For holders with glass prisms
HD 50 and HD 100 to measure vertical points, e.g. building fronts. Can be screwed in the M6-thread at
the back side of the prism casing. Available for every system constant to reach a round distance (= longitudinal eccentricity) to the top of the pin (object point).
50 mm
Prism constant
defined at the
total station/EDM
(Leica in brackets)
Longitudinal eccentricity (correction)
+ 50 mm
Article
100 mm
50 mm
-11 (+23,1) mm
-16/17 (+17,5) mm
-30 (+4,4) mm
-34 (0) mm
-35 (-0,6) mm
+ 100 mm
Order-No.
1650.39
1415.34
1650.20
1650.16
1650.15
HD50/11
HD50/16
HD50/30
HD50/34
HD50/35
7,50 €
7,50 €
7,50 €
7,50 €
7,50 €
Article
HD100/11
HD100/16
HD100/30
HD100/36
HD100/35
Order-No.
1650.89
1415.84
1650.70
1650.66
1650.65
7,50 €
7,50 €
7,50 €
7,50 €
7,50 €
For holders with reflecting foil
The distance pin will be screwed into the back side of the tiltable target holder. The distance from the
top of the pin to the vertical axis is exactly 50 mm. Therefore, a longitudinal eccentricity (correction) of
+50 mm has to be considered when measuring with a distance pin.
distance pin RD 50
Order-No. 1029.50
7,80 E
Order-No. 1029.100
7,80 E
for longitudinal eccentricity +100 mm.
distance pin RD 100
2014/2.1
2014/XX.X
Page 2 (of 2)
S u r v e y i n g
E q u i p m e n t .
10
Prisms and reflectors on L-holders
The newly developed holders are characterised as follows:
• Stable L-profile made of aluminium with a protective coating in orange-red signal colour
• Complete program of mini glass prisms is available with every required prism constant
• NEW: with reflecting foil as inexpensive alternative to glass prisms
• Precision fabrication and placing of the prisms/foils in the visible prism centre. Therefore minimised
errors in the angle and distance measurements, also with a prism/reflector not correctly aligned
to the total station/EDM.
•Widely usable because of maintaining general standards:
- Tilting axis height 50 mm with 5/8” thread
- Tilting axis height identical with Leica prism system with Leica vertical bolt
Compatible to accessories (s. catalogue 2014/2.5 p. 1-3).
On customer request the L-holders are made with black protective coating.
The orange-red holders are only partially available - please request -.
Orders without further details are supplied in black!
Prisms/Reflectors with 5/8” thread connection
HIP Ø 17,5 mm
Holder
50 mm
50 mm
HIP Ø 25 mm
• 5/8" female thread and 50 mm tilting axis height
• The tilting resistance can be done with a fork spanner (13 mm).
• Available with all prisms of the series HIP (s. catalogue 2014/2.1 p.1-2) and the series TOP
(s. catalogue 2014/2.3 p.1-2).
• Available also with high quality reflecting foil (40 x 40 mm) as inexpensive alternative to glass prisms
for modern total stations/EDM.
• A simple circular level is integrated in the holders with prisms of the series HIP
Prism constant
(Leica in brackets)
Reflexfolie
50 mm
50 mm
TOP
Reflecting foil on
With glass prism
With glass prism
For mini prism MP24
Prism constant tilØ 25 mm
Ø 17,5 mm
(s. series TOP cat.
table holder
(s. seriess HIP
(s. seriess HIP
2014/2.3 p.1)
p.1 with tilcat. 2014/2.1 p.1)
cat. 2014/2.1 p.1) table prism connection
-with circular level- -with circular level- without prism Order-No.
0 (+34,4) mm
––
-11,3 (+23,1) mm
––
(= Leica 360°-Prisma)
-16,5 (+17,9) mm
1000.16*
-16,9 (+17,5) mm
1000.17*
-30,0 (+4,4) mm
1000.30*
-34,4 (0) mm
1000.34*
-35,0 (-0,6) mm
1000.35*
Order-No.
Order-No.
Order-No.
––
––
––
1010.0
51,- €
1020.0*
40,- €
––
1000.11*
122,- €
1010.11
51,- €
––
––
112,- €
112,- €
162,- €
162,- €
162,- €
––
––
––
––
––
––
––
––
––
––
1010.16*
1010.17*
1010.30
1010.34
1010.35
51,- €
51,- €
51,- €
51,- €
51,- €
––
––
––
––
––
––
––
––
––
––
Note:
• For all prism holders marked with *, the tilting axis and the vertical axis goes through the visible prism
centre. For the holder with reflecting foil, they go exactly through the centre of the printed target.
• Further details regarding prism and addition constants siehe Catalogue 2014/1.1 S. 1-2.
L-Carrier for ball prism Ø 30 mm
For the use of the ball prism in other application fields
The ball prism(-target sign) s. cat. 2014/2.10 has a M6-thread on the back, with which it can be screwed
onto the following L-carriers.
• Tilting axis height 50 mm.
• 5/8" female thread for the usage on prism poles, wall bolt adapter etc.
• Prism constant K = -11,3 (Leica = +23,1) mm
• Ball prism is able to go through on the tiltable carrier 360°
• Tilting resistance can be adjusted (SW 13)
• Carrier is only available in black
L-Carrier with 5/8“ female thread for ball prisms (without prism)
Order-No. 1011
L-Carrier with 5/8“ female thread incl. ball prism Nr. 1450
Order-No. 1011.P
2014/XX.X
2014/2.2
51, €
159,- €
Page 1 (of 4)
S u r v e y i n g
E q u i p m e n t .
11
Prisms/reflectors with Leica connection
• Leica vertical bolt connection Ø 12 mm and tilting axis height of the Leica prism system.
• After placing on the vertical bolt and aligning to the total station/EDM, the holder will be fixed with a
set screw.
• The tilting resistance can be done with a fork spanner (13 mm).
• Available with all prisms of the series HIP (s. catalogue 2014/2.1 p.1-2) and of the series TOP
(s. catalogue 2014/2.3 p. 1-2).
• Available also with high quality refelcting foil (40 x 40 mm) as inexpensive alternative to glass prisms
HIP Ø 25 mm
Leica GPH1
Holder
Prism constant
(Leica in brackets)
Reflexfolie
Leica GPH1
Leica GPH1
TOP
With glass prism
Ø 25 mm
(s. seriess HIP
cat. 2014/2.1 p.1
p.1)
With glass prism
Ø 17,5 mm
(s. seriess HIP
cat. 2014/2.1 p.1)
p.1
For mini prism MP24
(s. seriess TOP cat.
2014/2.3 p.1)
p.1 with tiltable prism connection
-without prism-
reflecting foil on
tiltable holder
Order-No.
Order-No.
Order-No.
Order-No.
0 (+34,4) mm
––
-11,3 (+23,1) mm
––
(= Leica 360°-Prism)
-16,5 (+17,9) mm
1002.16*
-16,9 (+17,5) mm
-30,0 (+4,4) mm
-34,4 (0) mm
-35,0 (-0,6) mm
1002.17*
1002.30*
1002.34*
1002.35*
––
––
––
1012.0
51,- €
1022.0*
40,- €
––
1002.11*
122,- €
1012.11
51,- €
––
––
112,- €
––
––
1012.16*
51,- €
––
––
112,- €
172,- €
172,- €
172,- €
––
––
––
––
––
––
––
––
1012.17*
1012.30
1012.34
1012.35
51,- €
51,- €
51,- €
51,- €
––
––
––
––
––
––
––
––
Note:
centre. For the holder with reflecting foil, they go exactly through the centre of the printed target.
• Further details regarding prism and addition constants siehe Catalogue 2014/1.1 S. 1-2.
L-holder for ball prism Ø 30 mm
For the use of the ball prism in other application fields
• Tilting axis height = Leica prism system
• Leica bolt thread for the use on prism poles, wall bolt adapters etc.
L-carrier for ball prisms (without prism), Leica-Thread
Order-No. 1013
L-carrier with ball prism Nr. 1450; Leica-Thread
Order-No. 1013.P
2014/XX.X
2014/2.2
51, E
159,- €
Page 2 (of 4)
S u r v e y i n g
E q u i p m e n t .
12
Prisms/Reflectors with boring for M8 screw
Drilling to attach by M8 screw on bolts or plugs with M8 female thread
The ideal prism for permanent construction surveying/monitoring:
• Because of the cardanic installation, the prism can be aligned on every stand point
• Need of one tool only (fork spanner 13 mm) to a) fix the holder at the building and b) to fix the
tilting axis
• Durable, robust attachment at the building by a large set screw and a holder made of full metal
• Available with all prisms of the series HIP (s. cat. 2014/2.1 p. 1-2) and series TOP (s. cat. 2014/2.3 p. 1).
• Available also with high quality reflecting foil (40 x 40 mm) as inexpensive alternative to glass prisms
• Delivery with M8 screw made of stainless steel and wearing part.
holder
Prism constant
(Leica in brackets)
with glass prism
Ø 25 mm
(s. series HIP
Cat. 2014/2.1 p. 1)
HIP Ø 25 mm
TOP
Order-No.
reflective foil
0 (+34,4) mm
-11,3 (+23,1) mm
(= Leica 360°-Prism)
-16,5 (+17,9) mm
-16,9 (+17,5) mm
-30,0 (+4,4) mm
-34,4 (0) mm
-35,0 (-0,6) mm
reflecting foil on
tiltable holder
with glass prism for mini prism MP24
Ø 17,5 mm
(s. series TOP Cat.
(s. series HIP
2014/2.3 p. 1)
Cat. 2014/2.1 p. 1) tiltable prism connection -without prismOrder-No.
Order-No.
Order-No.
––
––
––
––
1015.0
49,- €
1025.0*
38,- €
––
––
1005.11*
118,- €
1015.11
49,- €
––
––
1005.16*
1005.17*
1005.30*
1005.34*
1005.35*
108,- €
108,- €
158,- €
158,- €
158,- €
––
––
––
––
––
––
––
––
––
––
1015.16*
1015.17*
1015.30
1015.34
1015.35
49,- €
49,- €
49,- €
49,- €
49,- €
––
––
––
––
––
––
––
––
––
––
Note:
center. For the holder with reflecting foil, they go exactly through the center of the printed target.
• Further details regarding prism and addition constants see catalogue 2014/1.1 p. 1-2.
Ball prism Ø 30 mm for the monitoring of buildings
• All advantages of the above mentioned prisms
• combined with M8-screw it emerges a gimbal mounting
• Delivery with M8 stainless steel screw and washer
L-Carrier for ball prism (without prism), M8 thread
Order-No. 1016
L-Carrier with ball prism Nr. 1450, M8 thread
Order-No. 1016.P
2014/XX.X
2014/2.2
49,- €
157,- €
Page 3 (of 4)
S u r v e y i n g
E q u i p m e n t .
13
Accessories
Distance pins
The use of distance pins is possible for:
Holders with prisms of the series HIP: see catalogue 2014/2.1 p. 1-2
Holders with prisms of the series TOP: see catalogue 2014/2.3 p. 1-2
50 mm
Holders with Reflecting foil
Distance pin will be screwed into the rear side of the tiltable target holder. The distance from the top of
the pin to the vertical axis is exactly 50 mm. Therefore, a longitudinal eccentricity (correction) of +50 mm
has to be considered when measuring with a distance pin.
distance pin RD 50
Order-No. 1029.50
7,80 E
Additional accessories
s. catalogue 2014/2.5 p. 1-3
2014/XX.X
2014/2.2
Page 4 (of 4)
S u r v e y i n g
E q u i p m e n t .
14
Mini prism MP 24
Mini prism MP 24 (construction similar to OMNI- and CST- mini prism)
Mini prism MP 24 (construction similar to OMNI- and CST- mini prism)
Ø Glass prism
: 25 mm
Ø Casing
: 31 mm
Ø effective light entrance area
: 24 mm
Grinding accuracy
: 2"
Casing material
: Aluminium, anodised in black
Range distance measuring
: 500 to 1000 m (depending on EDM instrument and
weather)
Prism constant on the top of the distance pin
:0
Thread distance pin
:M6
Weight
: 30 g
Reflective surface
: silver coated
Mini prism MP 24
Order-No. 1410
75,- €
Same as above, however with special position of the prism in the casing.
Therefore shock resistant and water-proof.
mini prism MP 24 S
m
26
m
Order-No. 1400
100,- €
Holder for MP 24: series TOP / type ONRT
Reflector/Prism
Prism constant K (Leica in brackets)
0
Reflecting target *
(26 x 40 mm)
Mini prism MP 24
Mini
Mini
Mini
Mini
prism
prism
prism
prism
MP
MP
MP
MP
(+34,4) mm only available in ONRT 50
and ONRT L
(+34,4) mm
0
-11,3
-16,5
-16,9
-30,0
24
24*
24*
24
(+23,1)
(+17,9)
(+17,5)
(+4,4)
-34,4 (0)
-35,0 (-0,6)
Mini prism MP 24
Mini prism MP 24
Short name xx for Order-No.
mm = Leica 360°-Prism
mm
mm
mm
0
11
16
17
30
mm
mm
34
35
Available with Prism constants K (Leica in brackets): - see catalogue page 2014/1.1 p. 1Note:
• Prism holders marked with * have a tilting axis and standing axis going through the visible prism
center exactly.
In the case of holders with reflexing foil they go through the center of the printed-on target exactly.
• Further details regarding prism and addition constants, please see catalogue see cat. 2014/1.1 p. 1
50 mm
Prism with 5/8’’ thread connection
• 5/8’’ female thread on top and below with 50 mm tilting axis height each.
• Same characteristics and applications as series HIP. However:
- tilting and standing axis only go through the visible prism center with K = -16,5 mm (Leica = +17,9 mm)
- in the HIP series, the prism and holder are an unity, whereas in the TOP series the mini prism
MP 24 can be unscrewed from the holder and used for a different purpose.
50 mm
50 mm
Prism TOP 2 x 5/8’’
Holder TOP
without prism MP 24
Order-No.
Holder TOP
with prism MP 24
Order-No.
Holder TOP
with prism MP 24 S
Order-No.
1515.xx 117,- €
1515.xx Z 130,- €
1510.xx 182,- €
1511.xx 207,- €
1510.xx Z 195,- €
1511.xx Z 220,- €
• optional: circular level: s. catalogue 2014/2.5 p.1.
xx: please specify here the required prism constant (red) from above table without +/- signs.
Holders, that are ordered without tilting axis stubs, can be refit in a limited way only.
2014/2.3
2014/XX.X
Page 1 (of 3)
S u r v e y i n g
E q u i p m e n t .
15
Prism with 5/8” thread connection
Prism type ONRT 50
50 mm
50 mm
Prism holder in U-format with 50 mm tilting axis heigth:
• holder made of anodised aluminium, MP24 can be unscrewed.
• Adjustable tilting resistance
• integrated target with a bright red target ring and target wedge, optimised in vertical and tilting axis.
Therefore minimised target error, also in case prism is not aligned.
• 2 tilting axis stubs for measuring with cross eccentricities.
• Optional: circular level s. catalogue 2014/2.5 p. 1.
• Target with high quality reflecting foil (52x60mm) available as inexpensive alternative to glass prisms.
Holder ONRT 50
with reflecting foil
Order-No.
Holder ONRT 50
without prism MP 24
Order-No.
Holder ONRT 50
with prism MP 24
Order-No.
Holder ONRT 50
with prism MP 24 S
Order-No.
628 65,- €
625.xx 74,50 €
620.xx 154,50 €
621.xx 176,- €
Prism with Leica-connection
50 mm
Prism TOP Leica-5/8’’
Leica GPH1
50 mm
• Leica vertical bolt connection Ø 12 mm (push-button connection) with a tilting axis height = Leica
round prism GPH1.
• At the top, additional 5/8" female thread with 50 mm tilting axis height.
• Same characteristics and applications as series HIP. However:
- tilting and standing axis only go through the visible prism center with K = -16,5 mm (Leica = +17,9 mm)
- in the HIP series, the prism and holder are a unity, whereas in the TOP series the mini prism
MP 24 can be unscrewed from the holder and used for a different purpose.
Holder TOP
without prism MP 24
Order-No.
Holder TOP
with prism MP 24
Order-No.
Holder TOP
with prism MP 24 S
Order-No.
1525.xx 143,- €
1525.xx Z 156,- €
1520.xx 208,- €
1520.xx Z 221,- €
1521.xx 233,- €
1521.xx Z 246,- €
• Optional: circular level: see catalogue 2014/2.5 p. 1.
Holders, that are ordered without tilting axis stubs, can be refit in a limited way only.
Prisma Typ ONRT L
Leica GPH1
50 mm
Prism holder in U-format with Leica vertical bolt connection Ø 12 mm (push-button connection):
• holder made of anodised aluminium, MP24 can be unscrewed.
• Adjustable tilting resistance
• integrated target with a bright red target ring and target wedge optimised in vertical and tilting axis.
Therefore minimised target error, also in case prism is not aligned.
• 2 tilting axis stubs for measuring with cross eccentricities.
Holder ONRT L
with reflecting target
Order-No.
Holder ONRT L
without prism MP 24
Order-No.
Holder ONRT L
with prism MP 24
Order-No.
Holder ONRT L
with prism MP 24 S
Order-No.
658 91,- €
655.xx 102,- €
650.xx 182,- €
651.xx 207,- €
• Optional: circular level: see catalogue 2014/2.5 p. 1.
• Target with high quality reflecting foil (52x60mm) available as inexpensive alternative to glass prisms.
2014/2.3
2014/XX.X
Page 2 (of 3)
S u r v e y i n g
E q u i p m e n t .
16
Accessories for series TOP and type ONRT
Pin extensions MPV 50 and MPV 100
For measurement of vertical points, e.g. building fronts. Can be screwed into the M6-distance pin at the
rear of the MP24. Available for each system constant to reach a round distance (= longitudinal eccentricity) to the top of the pin (object point).
Prism constant
defined at the
total station/EDM
(Leica in brackets)
50 mm
100 mm
Longitudinal eccentricity (correction)
+ 50 mm
Article
0 (+34,4) mm
-11 (+23,1) mm
-16/17 (+17,5) mm
-30 ( +4,4) mm
-34
(0) mm
-35 ( -0,6) mm
+ 100 mm
Order-No.
1415.50
1415.39
1415.34
1415.20
1415.16
1415.15
MPV50/0
MPV50/11
MPV50/16
MPV50/30
MPV50/34
MPV50/35
7,50 €
7,50 €
7,50 €
7,50 €
7,50 €
7,50 €
Article
MPV100/0
MPV100/11
MPV100/16
MPV100/30
MPV100/34
MPV100/35
Order-No.
1415.100
1415.89
1415.84
1415.70
1415.66
1415.65
7,50 €
7,50 €
7,50 €
7,50 €
7,50 €
7,50 €
Note: To measure points directly with the top of the pin of the MP 24 (without extension) you have to
consider the prism constant, defined at the total station / EDM (not the values in brackets) with positive
sign as longitudinal eccentricity for the measured distance.
50 mm
For holders with reflecting foil
Distance pin will be screwed at the rear side into the tiltable target holder. Then, the distance from the
top of the pin to the vertical axis is exactly 50 mm. Therefore you have to consider a longitudinal
eccentricity (correction) of +50 mm.
distance pin RD 50
Order-No. 1029.50
7,80 E
Order-No. 1029.100
7,80 E
Longitudinal eccentricity of +100 mm
distance pin RD 100
2014/2.3
2014/XX.X
Page 3 (of 3)
S u r v e y i n g
E q u i p m e n t .
17
RUNDUM prism 6x60°
ø28 mm
An “all-around” (Rundum) prism – also called 360° prism – always has a reflection surface for the electrooptical distance measurement with the total station/EDM, independent of its alignment. It also allows the
reliable and therefore economic use of special function as automatic targeting (ATR), target pursuance
(Lock mode) and target search (power search).
Our newly developed RUNDUM prism allows all these applications. It consists of 6 triple prisms, which
are staggered by 60° and inserted in a thin aluminium cylinder. In this way, there are always 2 prism centres that point in the direction of the total station/EDM. The prisms are installed in a vertical staggered
position; so, each of the 6 prisms could be installed in the central symmetric point, that means the axis
of the cylindrical prism holder goes for all prisms through the visible prism centre.
In this way, it is for the first time, that with the 6x60° prism there is a RUNDUM prism also for precision
measurements, for which the positioning of the total station/EDM should be done automatically.
Leica
100 mm
Leica GPH1
86 mm
Construction and characteristics of the 6x60° prism in detail:
• Prism constant K = -11,3 mm (Leica system: +23,1 mm), therefore identical with the Leica-360°
reflectors GRZ4 and GRZ121.
• Cylindrical prism holder (Ø 28 mm) made of anodized aluminium
• 6 precision prisms (not tiltable), Ø 18 mm, silver coated reflective surfaces, each prism staggered by
60° (as the prisms are not tiltable, it might be necessary to use a tiltable single prism in case of
very upright measuring)
• the vertical axis of the prism cylinder goes through the visible prism centre (central symmetric point) of
all 6 prisms
• 2 possibilities for connection: 1x Leica vertical bolt connection, 1x 5/8” thread connection
• Lock of the Leica vertical bolt by newly designed push spring lock.
• Vertical coordination of certain prisms for an exact altitude measurement:
- On the side of the Leica connection, the 3rd prism is exactly on the level of the Leica
standard prism GPH1
- On the side of the 5/8” connection, the 2nd prism is exactly on the level of 50 mm
Remark: if you need to do not only an exact position measurement but also a correct altitude measurement, the corresponding prism has to be turned in direction of the total station/EDM. This is marked on
the cylindrical prism holder.
• It is very suitable also for the sighting frame stake out with automatic targeting; in the one-manoperation mode very recommendable in connection with the pendulum holder (see picture next page):
- Takes up little space on the sighting frame due to the slim construction of the prism cylinde
- Because of the special position of the prisms no errors in the horizontal angle measurement as with
other 360° prisms.
- In case of local vertical obstacles on the sighting frame (crossbeam, etc.), a prism can be aligned to
the total station/EDM simply by turning (because of the different prism levels).
The RUNDUM prism 6x60° is available in the following formats:
With Leica vertical bolt connection Ø 12 mm (for vertical bolts length 27 and 40 mm) and 5/8” female
thread, total length 179 mm, weight: 220 g.
50 mm
RUNDUM-Prism 6x60°, Leica St27 – 5/8" i
630,– €
With Leica vertical bolt connection Ø 12 mm (only for vertical bolts length 40 mm) and 5/8” female
thread, total length 193 mm, weight: 250 g
RUNDUM-Prism 6x60°, Leica St40 – 5/8" i
Page
drucken
Order-No. 5660.27
Schritt
zurück vor
Exit
2014/2.4
2014/XX.X
Page 1 (of 2)
Order-No. 5660.40
630,– €
Alle Preise zuzüglich Mehrwertsteuer.
S u r v e y i n g
E q u i p m e n t .
18
Accessories
Our full assortment of accessories can be used on the two universal connections, Leica vertical bolt
connection and 5/8” thread.
Examples
RUNDUM prism (all around), 6x60 with the stake out pin Leica (catalogue 2014/2.5 p. 3) and circular level
Zentral (s. catalogue 2014/2.5 p 1)
Order-No. 1587.30
40,50 €
stake out pin Leica, Höhe 200 mm
Order-No. 1858.140
38,– €
200 mm
adjustable circular level Zentral, accuracy 30‘
Examples of use
With pendulum holder on
the Sighting frame
close to ground
With prism pole
With rail angle
Page
drucken
Schritt
zurück vor
Exit
2014/2.4
2014/XX.X
Page 2 (of 2)
S u r v e y i n g
E q u i p m e n t .
19
Accessories prism series HIP, HIP-U,
TOP, ONRT and RUNDUM 6x60°
Circular level Integral (only series HIP and TOP)
Can be screwed at the top 5/8" connection at the side of the prism holder. Therefore free availability of
the 5/8"-connection for other purposes. (Cannot replace the circular level of the prism pole!)
• Level Ø 14 mm in a metal casing
• Grinding accuracy 50’
• tightly fixed in the stainless steel casing (no adjusting screws)
• horizontal boring as support for screwing off and on
• dimensions: Ø 16,5mm, height 13 mm, M5-male thread
circular level integral
Order-No. 1580
23,– €
Circular level Zentral (only series HIP, TOP and RUNDUM 6x60°)
If the top 5/8" connection is not needed for other purposes, a large circular level can here centrally be
screwed in. The high-quality glass level Ø 20 mm is fixed in a metal casing.
Not adjustable
• It is already adjusted on the screwing surface. Not further adjustable.
• dimensions: Ø 27mm, height (without thread): 25mm, 5/8"-male thread
• large horizontal boring as support for screwing off and on (e.g. with screw driver)
circular level, not adjustable, accuracy 30’
Order-No. 1585.30
25,50 €
circular level, adjustable, cut accuracy 30’
Order-No. 1587.30
40,50 €
circular level, adjustable, cut accuracy 10’
Order-No. 1587.10
43,50 €
Order-No. 1850
34,– €
Adjustable
•
•
•
•
Circular level can be adjusted with an Allen wrench (2,5 mm)
Dimensions: Ø 30 mm, Height (without thread): 43 mm
5/8“ mal thread
Delivery with Allen wrench
Circular level for prism type ONRT
Can be screwed on prism type ONRT 50 and ONRT L.
• adjustable
• sensitivity: 25’
• level diameter: 14 mm
circular level JDL 14
Extension 50 mm
Extension HV50
Order-No. 301.50
50 mm
100 mm
extends the 5/8" connection of the holders of the prism series HIP, HIP-U, L-holder, TOP, ONRT 50 and
RUNDUM 6x60° to the common tilting axis height of 100 mm.
• Diameter (27 mm) and signal coloured in orange-red, adapted to series HIP and TOP.
• waisted for exact targeting
• large horizontal hole to help with screwing on and off (e.g. with a screwdriver)
2014/2.5
2014/XX.X
24,50 €
Page 1 (of 4)
S u r v e y i n g
E q u i p m e n t .
20
Accessories prism series HIP, HIP-U,
Adapter Leica-5/8’’
Transition from Leica vertical bolt (Ø 12mm) to 5/8"- male thread.
Available in design PRO with quick connection or as single adapter with security screw.
If you screw the adapter Leica 5/8" into the 5/8"-thread of a holder with 50 mm tilting axis height (e.g.
our series HIP, HIP-U, TOP and ONRT 50), you obtain the same tilting axis height as with the Leica
Reflector GPH1. Therefore, it is best suited for an application with Leica prism poles as well as with our
wall adapter WA Leica (s. catalogue 2014/6.1 p. 1).
1. PRO-Leica Adapter
The practical adapter is characterised by the push-button which enables you to fix the prism on the Leica
vertical bolt in a very short time (single handed). Then, the prism can be turned with a slight resistance
around the vertical bolt preventing it from falling off.
Für alle Leica-Stehbolzen Ø 12 mm
Gewinde-Anschluss
oben
Kippachsenhöhe des
Reflektorträgers
5/8’’
5/8’’
M8
M10
50
60
50
50
mm
mm
mm
mm
Bezeichnung
PLA 5/8’’
PLAK 5/8’’
PLA M8
PLA M10
Order-No.
690
695
680
685
45,50 €
45,50 €
45,50 €
45,50 €
2. Single adapter Leica-5/8"
Same function like the PRO-Leica-Adapter, but after the mounting on the Leica vertical bolt a locking screw
must be tightened. Since the other dimensions are the same, regarding the tilting axis adjustment the
same possibilities arise as with the PRO-Leica-Adapter PLA 5/8".
For all Leica vertical bolts Ø 12 mm:
Adapter Leica St 27 - 5/8’’
Order-No. 302.27
26,50 €
Order-No. 302.40
27,50 €
Only for Leica vertical bolt Ø 12 x 40 mm:
Adapter Leica St 40 - 5/8"
Adapter 5/8"-Leica
Transfer of 5/8" female or male thread to Leica vertical bolts.
• Stainless steel construction. Precision-machined.
• Milling surfaces for fork wrench (SW 24) as on and unscrewing assistance
bottom
5/8’’ thread
female
female
male
male
top
Leica vertical bolt
St
St
St
St
Ø
Ø
Ø
Ø
12
12
12
12
x
x
x
x
27
40
27
40
mm
mm
mm
mm
effective
total length
47
60
40
60
mm
mm
mm
mm
Order-No.
377.27
377.40
378.27
378.40
24,50
30,50
24,50
30,50
€
€
€
€
Carrying pouch for mini prism
Available in various sizes: On request!
2014/2.5
2014/XX.X
Page 2 (of 4)
S u r v e y i n g
E q u i p m e n t .
21
Accessories prisms HIP, HIP-U,
Stake out pins
b
For all reflector holders with 5/8" female thread or Leica vertical bolt connection. Because of the low
distance from the center of the prism to the stake out pin, targets (in connection with a circular level)
can be exactly staked out. Longer models (b = 200 and 250 mm) with a long pin made of stainless
steel. Therefore very suitable for exact staking in ground. The stake out pins are available in several
lengths L.
L
L
V
L
V
Staking out pins 5/8"
Additional 5/8" male thread at the top of the pin to screw the pin into extensions or prism poles with
5/8"- female thread (pin protected and always there). When using it with 5/8" reflector holders with tilting
axis height = 50 mm (e.g. series HIP, HIP-U, TOP and ONRT 50) the following distances b from the
center of the prism to the pin can be achieved:
length L
L
20
30
40
50
75
150
200
extension V
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
––
5 mm
15 mm
25 mm
50 mm
50 mm
50 mm
distance b with
tilting axis height 50 mm
70
80
90
100
125
200
250
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
with additional
male thread
Order-No.
––
5/8’’
5/8’’
5/8’’
5/8’’
5/8’’
5/8’’
1852
1853.2
1854.2
1855.2
1856.75
1856.150
1856.200
20,– €
21,50 €
21,50 €
21,50 €
30,– €
38,– €
40,50 €
Stake out pins Leica
L
When using reflector holders with tilting axis height of the Leica GPH1 (e.g. our reflector holder of the
series HIP, HIP-U, TOP, ONRT L and RUNDUM 6x60°), the following distances b from the center of the
prism to the pin can be achieved:
length L
distande b with tilting axis height = GPH 1
Order-No.
40 mm
140 mm
190 mm
100 mm
200 mm
250 mm
1857.2
1858.140
1858.190
20,– €
38,– €
40,50 €
Handle (only for series HIP, TOP and RUNDUM 6x60°)
with 5/8" male thread, length approx. 130 mm.
To use at the top 5/8" side of the prism holder of the series HIP, TOP and RUNDUM 6x60°.
handle 5/8’’
Order-No. 700
27,– €
an be
sions c
For
” exten
/8
5
prism.
t
n
d
Dif fere
ndle an
a
h
n
e
e
se
d betw
ns plea
screwe
extensio
8 S. 3
/1
4
ue 201
g
lo
ta
a
s. C
2014/2.5
2014/XX.X
Page 3 (of 4)
S u r v e y i n g
E q u i p m e n t .
22
Prism holder for mounting on
horizontal and vertical bolts
For the use of height-bolts as position- and height-fixed point
• one holder for horizontal and vertical bolts
• the holder is clamped vertically with two thumb screws on the bolt
• then the prism centers are exactly above the defined position reference points:
with horizontal bolts:
with vertical bolts:
in the bolt axis of the extreme outer edge of the curved bolt front side
in bolt axis
• Height reference: The prism center of the lower HIP prism is always located exactly 110 mm above
the highest point of the bolt. If with the horizontal bolt, the radius is taken into account in the target
height, the height reference is also within the bolt axis.
• With fitting adapters, also existing prisms can be used.
Especially our prisms of the series HIP with appropriate accessories are suitable (see photos)
• because of full metal construction and precision manufacturing, high accuracies can be achieved
• the prisms can be delivered with all common constants!
• the slim design makes even use in confined areas possible
• when using 2 (or more) superposed prisms, they can be independently aligned and aimed to
the tachymeter.
horizontal bolt
vertical bolt
holder for bolts with head-Ø 30 mm
Order-No. 1330
90,– €
holder for bolts with head-Ø 45 mm
Order-No. 1345
90,– €
For the holders of the images shown above, the (wall-)adapter M8 Leica is not included.
adapter WA Leica
Order-No. 830
2014/XX.X
2014/2.5
17,– €
Page 4 (of 4)
S u r v e y i n g
E q u i p m e n t .
23
Ranging pole aligner for small reflectors
The combination of a mini / small prism with a pole level, which is attached to a device on a ranging
pole, gives a full and robust prism pole.
Features and Advantages:
• suitable for ranging poles of various diameters
• adjustballe bubble level
• option to screw in one or two small prisms
• easy installation and dismounting on the ranging pole
• quick change of position along the entire ranging pole length
• by attaching the ranging pole aligner at the foot of a not exactly perpendicular standing
ranging pole, the error of the distance measurement can be minimized.
• light weight and only little space is required
• variable fields of application
The ranging pole aligner is available in different designs:
The ranging pole aligner FRG is attached with a high quality elastic band at the ranging pole.
It is designed so that a conventional application (perpendicular adjusting by holding the ranging pole aligner to the pole manually) is guaranteed.
For small prisms with M6 male thread (e.g. MP24, CST, OMNI, TOPCON).
FRG 6
Order-No. 930
32,– €
On the ranging pole aligner FRK a spring steel clamp is mounted, with whom it is attached to the
ranging pole.
For small prisms with M6 external thread (for example: MP24, CST, OMNI, TOPCON)
FRK 6
Order-No. 940
27,– €
Ranging pole clamp for small reflectors
To adapt mini / small prisms to ranging, perpendicular and target poles.
Features and fixing to the pole as with the FRK, but without the circular level.
For small prisms with M6 external threads (for example: MP24, CST, OMNI, TOPCON).
FK 6
Order-No. 910
14,– €
Note:
For all models of ranging pole aligners and clamps, the same distance additions is taken into account up
to the vertical axis of the pole. The length eccentricity depends on the prism constant, set on the tachymeter. When using commercial ranging poles (Ø 26-28 mm), the following adjustment is to be attached
to the measured horizontal distance:
Prism constant (Leica in Klammer)
set on the tachymeter
0 (+34,4) mm
-11 (+23,1) mm
-16/17 (+17,5) mm
-30 (+4,4) mm
-34/35 (0) mm
2014/2.6
2014/XX.X
length eccentricity
(adjustment)
+15
+26
+31
+45
+50
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
Page 1 (of 1)
S u r v e y i n g
E q u i p m e n t .
24
Prisms and holders
Tiltable reflector type Leica GPH 1
Structurally identical Leica - Reflector GPH 1 + GPR 1, fully compatible, copper-coated glass prism,
Prism constant K = -34,4 mm (Leica = 0 mm)
Push button - Quick Connect.
Prism type Leica GPH 1 + GPR 1 with target plate + case
Order-No. 3437
179,– €
Tiltable reflector holder for Zeiss ETR 1N
Purpose-built made of anodized aluminum
•
50 mm tilting axis height
•
with wall adapter WA 50, s. catalogue 2014/6.1 p. 1
•
5/8’’ female thread
•
M8 knurled screw for screwing the prism ETR 1 without tools
•
adjustable tilting resistance
•
fixed Prism constant K = -35 mm
Reflector holder EZRT 50 (without prism)
Order-No. 155
41,50 €
For use on pendulum holder, with counterweight and integrated circular bubble,
tilting axis height 56 mm, otherwise version as EZRT 50th
Reflector holder EZP 5/8’’ (without prism)
2014/2.7
2014/XX.X
Order-No. 150.2
49,– €
Page 1 (of 1)
S u r v e y i n g
E q u i p m e n t .
25
Precision prism 17.5 – with bolt
For the surveying of object points on facades / buildings
Facade points are commonly executed without a reflector (Laser / Direct-Reflex). Does the tachymeter not
have this feature or is reflectorless measurement not accurate enough, a prism must be used and a twostep procedure has to be done:
1. Targeting of the object point with the crosshairs.
2. Holding the prism in front of the object point with a familiar distance to the prism center.
A few commercially available Mini-Prisms, e.g. our Mini Prism MP 24, have a screwed on bolt with a
Prism constant of K = 0 mm (Leica = +34,4 mm) on the tip. Is the object point held onto with this, there
is no additional offset distance to be considered.
The problem of this method of measurement are the errors that occur from inaccurate alignment of the
prism onto the tachymeter. In particular, the stakeout of a target point on a facade is very tedious if high
accuracies are required.
For precision measurements even the quality of the prism body is quite significant.
What's important:
• Accuracy of the distance between the center of the prism and the stopping point on the back.
• Accuracy of the stated prism constant.
• Possible change in length of the bolt on the back through deterioration.
pic 1
pic 2
With the precision prism PP 17.5 – with bolt we present a prism, which fullfills requirements for very
precise measurements:
• Ø glass prism: 17,5 mm
• Cut accuracy: 2“
• Reflective surfaces: silver mirrored on the back
• Casing: Outer-Ø 22 mm made of anodized aluminum
• Range distance measurement: up to over 500 m (equipment and weather dependent)
• Slim aluminum casing with a conical back and hardend steel bolt at the end.
After the prism is put onto a planar surface it can be tilted to 45° in each direction and therefore
aligned towards the tachymeter (pic. 2 and 3).
• The tip of the bolt is located exactly in the theoretical reversal point measurement beam, so the Prism
constant K = 0 (Leica = +34,4) mm and no offset in height has to be considered.
• No change in length of the bolt through deterioration.
• Visor and cap made of white plastic, that can be removed for cleaning of the prism (pic. 6).
pic 3
pic 4
The visor and protection cap fullfills 2 functions:
On the one hand, it serves for the exact alignment of the prism on the tachymeter. The cap has a length
of 20 mm and an inner diameter of 18 mm. Because the prism diameter is 17,5 mm, a part of the prism
is covered by the cap, if it isn't aligned exactly to the tachymeter (pic. 4).
Thus, if the circular front of the prism is completely visible, it also points exactly to the tachymeter (pic.
5). In addition, the PP 17.5s theoretical turning point of the measurement beam (K = 0 mm), which is
implemented as bolt tip, is only located 11.3 mm behind the visible center of the prism (central symmetric point).
pic 5
As a second function the prism can be gripped more securely with the cap (pic. 1) and is protected from
damage and weather.
precision prism PP 17.5 – with bolt, with visor and protection cap
Order-No. 1470
135,- €
pic 7
pic 6
Page
drucken
Schritt
zurück vor
Exit
2014/XX.X
2014/2.8
Page 1 (of 2)
S u r v e y i n g
E q u i p m e n t .
26
Lanyard for precision prism PP 17.5
For the secure transportation of the prism / no „slipping-out-of-the-hands“ while using it
•
•
•
•
•
flat-woven, 20 mm wide polyester ribbon
strap length 40 cm
10 cm end pieces with plastic buckle
snap hook
incl. connecting strap for attachment to the prism
Lanyard, red
Order-No. 1390.R
5,- €
Lanyard, black
Order-No. 1390.S
5,- €
2014/XX.X
2014/2.8
Page 2 (of 2)
S u r v e y i n g
E q u i p m e n t .
27
Surveying of concrete elements with bevel
Components of concrete have usually a bevel for structural and aesthetic reasons.
Often the measurement with the tachymeter of those isn't that easy, as the constructive edge of the
component (intersection of the two levels - without bevel) isn't suitable for holding on a Standard-prism
exactly without further steps.
For these cases, we have developed the special holder for concrete components with bevel SBF. It can
be used for all components from a bevel width of 20 mm and is ideal both for the positioning of precast
concrete products as well as for the control of concrete site elements.
The SBF is composed of 2 parts:
1. Flexible angle holder for precision prism (SBF-Flex-Angle)
Consisting of two plan aluminum plates which are connected by a hinge joint.
The angle holder can be held onto all components with a bevel of 20 mm and fits the angle of the
component. The hinge axis is located exactly in the line of intersection of the two bearing surfaces. The
holder for the precision prism PP 17 sits in the middle, which is screwed on with a M4 thread. The prism
may in the holder, regardless of the Flex-Angle, be rotated in all directions and aligned over a range of
180 ° to the tachymeter. The tilt resistance can be adjusted.
Other techn. data:
• Dimesions of the Flex-Angle: 100 x 100 mm per plate
• Milled grooves in each plate for accurate placement of the angle-holder on markings on the
concrete part
• Weight (without prism): around 250 g
SBF-Flex-Angle for concrete comp. with bevel (without prism)
Order-No. 1485
235,- €
2. Precision prism PP 17.5 – M4
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Ø glass prism: 17,5 mm
Cut accuracy: 2“
Reflective surfaces: silver mirrored on the back
Casing: Outer-Ø 22 mm made of anodized aluminum
Range distance measurement: up to over 500 m (equipment and weather dependent)
On the back: M4 male thread made of stainless steel
Prism constant using the SBF-Flex-Angle: K = 0 (Leica = +34,4) mm
Visor and cap made of white plastic that can be removed for cleaning of the prism.
The visor and protection cap fullfills 2 functions:
On the one hand, it serves for the exact alignment of the prism on the tachymeter. The cap has a length
of 20 mm and an inner diameter of 18 mm. Because the prism diameter is 17,5 mm, a part of the prism
is covered by the cap, if it isn't aligned exactly to the tachymeter (pic. 4).
Thus, if the circular front of the prism is completely visible, it also points exactly on the tachymeter (pic.
5). In addition, the PP 17.5s theoretical turning point of the measurement beam (K = 0 mm), which is
implemented as bolt tip, is only located 11.3 mm behind the visible center of the prism (central symmetric point).
As a second function the prism can be gripped more securely with the cap (pic. 1) and is protected from
damage and weather.
precision prism PP 17.5 – M4 with visor and protection cap
Page
drucken
Schritt
zurück vor
Exit
2014/XX.X
2014/2.9
Order-No. 1474
135,- €
Page 1 (of 1)
S u r v e y i n g
E q u i p m e n t .
28
Prism-Monitoring-System
Precise - universal - affordable
Ideally suited for tachymetric monitoring of buildings, structures, bridges, tunnels, railway tracks etc.
For structural monitoring the use of prisms is essential, if the sighting of the monitored points is to be
made economically with the automatic target recognition of modern tachymeters.
A disadvantage is the relatively high cost of a large number of measurement points and the difficulties of
the permanent attachment of the prisms on the monitored object.
Our prism monitoring system consists of two types of reflector holders and matching centerings:
Type 1: Ball prism or ball target marks with cylindrical base
The ball prism is a precisely crafted steel ball with a very well mounted triple prism in the center of the
sphere. On the cylindrical base (nest) with a conical top, the ball is forced to lie centered and can be aligned over the range of 180 ° in all directions.
In this case, the steel ball is held by a permanent magnet integrated in the base. Depending on the
application the magnet is available with different adhesive forces. Also a non-magnetized version
is available.
In the case of ball prisms you can choose between the diameters of 30 mm and 1.5" (38.1 mm). In the
smaller sphere there is a prism with a constant of K = -11.3 (Leica = +23.1) mm installed. The 1.5" ball is
available with the same prism and in addition with a larger prism with the constant K = -16.9 (Leica =
+17.5) mm.
Bases, tuned to both ball diameters are avilable. In addition for the 1.5" sphere next to the standard size
33 mm also the base diameter of 40 mm was added to the program in 2012.
25
mm
No matter which sphere and prism size with (matching) base is chosen: The signaled point by the visible
prism center is always exactly on the center axis of the base and has a distance of 30.8 mm from the
bottom (height-offset HO).
New 2013: Ball-base made of stainless-steel for 1,5"-ball with height-offset HO = 25 mm
Ø
40
mm
With the ball prism and the base highest precision for repeated measurements is ensured. The results are
far better than the quoted precision of electro-optical tachymeters.
The accuracy of the repeated positioning of the ball on the base of your system is therefore only dependent on the precision of the steel ball and the orientation of the prism towards the tachymeter.
Since the triple prism is mounted in the steel ball, ideally in the center symmetric point (visible prism
center), only the smallest errors arise from a bad alignment of the prism towards the tachymeter.
Type 2: Prism/Reflector on L-carriers with cylindrical magnetic base
With the L-carriers the prism monitoring system has been further extended.
With an identical diameter of the magnetic base, identical prism constants and an identical height, the
L-prisms are fully compatible with the ball prisms. When using the centering described below both reflector carrier types can thus be easily interchanged - the same point is always signaled.
The L-prisms are in addition to many other commercially available prism constants. The user can thus
carry out observations in the monitoring system without having to change the prism constant on the
tachymeter.
L-Prisms are only available with a height-offset HO of 30,8 mm!
Centerings
For a variety of monitoring functions, it is not necessary to equip every point permanently with a prism.
If the observation points are easily accessible the application of a centering plate before the zero measurement is often sufficient. Only when the measurement itself takes place, the ball prism is then, inserted
and aligned in the centering together with the magnetic base or with the L-prism with magnetic base force-centered, fast and highly precise.
Instead of the centering plate the base can be attached directly to the object point. Thus, a further
increase in accuracy is indeed achievable. But this is usually far below the achievable accuracy of the
tachymeter. There are also several permanent mounting options for centering and they are ultimately
more cost efficient.
2014/XX.X
2014/2.10
page 1 (of 11)
S u r v e y i n g
E q u i p m e n t .
29
Overall view Monitoring-Prism-System
Page 1 of 2
with
ball Ø 30 mm
Order-No. - Price €
ball Ø 1.5“ (38,1 mm)
L-Holder with magnetic base
Reflector-Type
1450 - 113,- €
1455 - 68,- €
1452 - 145,- €
1445 - 145,- €
Ø 20 mm
triple prism
Ø 17,5 mm
triple prism
Ø 25 mm
yes
yes
triple prism
Ø 17,5 mm
s. catalogue 2014
magnetic base necessary
2.10 page 4
yes
triple prism
Ø 17,5 mm
triple prism
35 x 25 mm
2.10 page 6
reflexive foil
35 x 25 mm
2.10 page 11
yes
yes
no
no
K = -16,9 mm (Leica +17,5)
1060.17 - 130,- €
K = -30,0 mm (Leica +4,4)
prism constant
K = -11,3 mm
(Leica +23,1 mm)
K = 0 mm
(Leica +34,4 mm)
K = -11,3 mm
(Leica +23,1 mm)
K = -16,9 mm
(Leica +17,5 mm)
K = -11,3 mm
(Leica +23,1 mm)
1060.30 - 180,- €
K = -34,4 mm(Leica 0)
1060.34 - 180,- €
1060.11 - 140,- €
K = 0 mm
(Leica +34,4 mm)
1060.0 - 60,- €
K = -35,0 mm (Leica -0,6)
1060.35 - 180,- €
each magnetic base
is delivered with a
galvanazied protection plate Ø 40 mm.
Protects from
dirt and weather.
s. catalogue 2014/
2.10 page 5
1460 - 24,50 €
magnetic
holding force: 1,5 kg
base /
magnetic base
with L-Holder
Ø 33 mm
s. catalogue 2014/
2.10 page 11
s. catalogue 2014/
2.10 page 5
s. catalogue 2014/
2.10 page 7
1460.S - 32,- €
magnetic
holding force: 4 kg
1457.S - 32,- €
magnetic
holding force: 3 kg
s. catalogue 2014/
2.10 page 5
s. catalogue 2014/
2.10 page 7
1460.S2 - 34,- €
1457.S2 - 34,- €
magnetic
holding force: 20 kg
magnetic
for adhering
magnetic
holding force: 6 kg
s. catalogue 2014/
2.10 page 11
for adhering and screwing
s. catalogue 2014/
2.11 page 2
fitting centering plate
Ø 33 mm
1464 - 10,- €
1461 - 7,50 €
protection plate for
centering Ø 33 mm
(incl. magnet)
1463 - 9,- €
for protection of
the centering from
dust and
weathering
s. catalogue2014/
2.11 page 3
1453.50 - 3,50 €
2014/XX.X
2014/2.10
back
page 2 (of 11)
S u r v e y i n g
E q u i p m e n t .
30
Overall view Monitoring-Prism-System
Page 2 of 2
with
Order-No. - price €
ball Ø 1.5“ (38,1 mm)
L-Holder with magnetic base
reflector type
1452 - 145,- €
1445 - 145,- €
triple prism
Ø 17,5 mm
triple prism
Ø 25 mm
triple prism
Ø 17,5 mm
yes
no
s. catalogue 2014
magnetic base necessary
triple prism
Ø 25 mm
2.10 page 4
reflective foil
35 x 25 mm
2.10 page 11
yes
no
no
K = -16,9 mm (Leica +17,5)
1070.17 - 130,- €
K = -30,0 mm (Leica +4,4)
prism constant
K = -11,3 mm
(Leica +23,1 mm)
K = -16,9 mm
(Leica +17,5 mm)
K = -11,3 mm
(Leica +23,1 mm)
1070.30 - 180,- €
K = -34,4 mm(Leica 0)
1070.11 - 140,- €
1070.34 - 180,- €
K = 0 mm
(Leica +34,4 mm)
1070.0 - 60,- €
K = -35,0 mm (Leica -0,6)
1070.35 - 180,- €
each magnetic base
is delivered with a
galvanazied protection plate Ø 40 mm.
Protects from
dirt and weather.
s. catalogue 2014/
2.10 page 7
1458.S - 32,- €
magnetic holding force: 3 kg
base /
magnetic base in
L-Holder
Ø 40 mm
s. catalogue 2014/
2.10 page 11
s. catalogue 2014/
2.10 page 7
magnetic
holding force: 6 kg
1458.S2 - 34,- €
magnetic holding force: 15 kg
s. catalogue 2014/
2.10 page 11
s. catalogue 2014/
2.10 page 7
1459 - 21,- €
without magnet
prism constant
stainless steel base
Ø 40 mm
(incl. protection plate)
fitting centering plate
Ø 40 mm
protection plate for
centerings Ø 40 mm
(incl. magnet)
K = -11,3 mm
(Leica +23,1 mm)
K = -16,9 mm
(Leica +17,5 mm)
s. catalogue 2014/
2.10 page 8
1430 - 58,- €
magnet. holding force: 5 kg
1431 - 47,- €
without magnet
s. catalogue 2014/
2.11 page 4
for adhering and
screwing
6009 - 11,- €
s. catalogue 2014/
2.11 page 5
for the protection of the
centering from dust and
weathering
6009.S - 3,50 €
2014/2.10
page 3 (of 11)
S u r v e y i n g
E q u i p m e n t .
31
Ball Ø 30 mm
Ball prism Ø 30 mm
30 mm
• material of the ball: galvanized steel.
• Ø steel ball: 30 mm ± 0,05 mm.
• back: M6 female thread.
• Ø glass prism: 17,5 mm.
• grinding accuracy: 2“.
• reflective surfaces: back side is silver mirrored.
• distance measuring range: up to more than 500 m (device-and weather dependent).
• mounting of the prism: ± 0,1 mm
• shockproof and waterproof.
• prism constant K = -11,3 (Leica = +23,1) mm.
ball prism Ø 30 mm, triple prism, K = -11,3 mm (Leica = +23,1) mm
Order-No. 1450
113,– €
(Without base)
With a purchase of 10 ball prisms at once you get
a transport case No. 1468 for free. (s. catalog 2014 2.11 p.7)
30 mm
Ball target mark Ø 30 mm with reflective foil
For measurements at shorter distances and without automatic target recognition, a ball with reflective foil
can be used. It is mounted in the center level of the ball, so that a prism constant K = 0 (Leica = 34.4)
mm is the result.
In the center of the sphere the target mark for a highly accurate angle measurement
is precisely located.
Outside-Ø reflective foil: 20 mm.
• outer Ø target mark for angle measurement: 5 mm
• inner Ø target mark for angle measurement: 0,5 mm (other versions available on request).
ball target mark Ø 30 mm, reflective foil, K = 0 (Leica = +34,4) mm
Order-No. 1455
68,– €
(without base)
Protective cap
A protective cap can be clipped onto the ball prisms and the ball target marks. It is made of resistant
white plastic. Especially when the prism remains at the base for a longer period of time, the cap reduces
a limitation to the reflection power through dust, rain, snow, etc.
Due to the "tunnel effect" more accurate alignment towards the tachymeter is required when using
the cap.
protective cap Ø 25 mm, white plastic, to be clipped on
Order-No. 1469
8,50 €
L-Carrier
With the M6 thread on the back, the ball prism Ø 30 mm can also be used on L-carriers for
structural monitoring.
The L-carriers are available with different mounting options:
5/8“ female thread:
s. catalog 2014/2.2 page 1
Leica - stud bolt thread:
M8 screw:
2014/XX.X
2014/2.10
page 4 (of 11)
S u r v e y i n g
E q u i p m e n t .
32
Ball-base with permanent magnet for ball -Ø 30 mm
30,8 mm
The all metal construction and accurate ball thread is ideal for precision measurement.
Suitable for ball prisms (No. 1450) and ball target marks (No. 1455):
Ø 33 mm
The base is made of hard anodized aluminum with an integrated permanent magnet. The base can therefore
be attached to all magnetic surfaces, eg. Railways, machinery, vehicles and centerings
(see catalog 2013/2.11 p.2)
The distance of the ball center from the base bottom is 30.8 mm ± 0.1 mm.
During the time when measurements are not taken, the base can be covered. It has a diameter of 40
mm, is also held in place magnetically and protects the ball thread of the base from dirt and weather
(see picture).
base Ø 33 mm for balls Ø 30 mm,
with permanent magnet (holding force aound 1,5 kg) + cover Ø 40 mm Order-No. 1460
24,50 €
Ball-base with strong magnet
For applications with high holding force necessary, eg. long-term monitoring on railroad tracks
When a train drives by, the rail is affected by strong vibrations. These vibrations are transmitted to the
base. Using the base with a standard magnet (1.5 kg holding force) the practice has shown that the
prism on the ball base adheres reliably, but the direction of the prism towards the tachymeter can be
turned over time.
For this reason, the base is now also available with a strong magnet. As the base with normal permanent
magnet it can be attached to the rail in three ways:
1. For short-term measurements: attaching the base directly to the rail (see picture).
2. For long-term observations: Additional fixing with mounting glue (see catalog 2014/11.2 p.6).
3. Also for long-term observations: attachment to a glued to the track centering
(see catalog 2014/11.2 p.2).
with permanent magnet (holding force aound 4 kg) + cover Ø 40 mm
Order-No. 1460.S
32,00 €
For special applications, we also provide a basis with extremely high holding force:
with strong magnet (holding force around 20 kg) + cover Ø 40 mm
Order-No. 1460.S2
34,00 €
Remover
Due to the very high holding force of the strong magnet, the ball base No. 1460.S2 can not be simply
removed "by hand". It is therefore advisable to use a remover tool.
•
•
•
•
•
Sturdy, break-resistant plastic
suitable for all bases
with carrying strap
Size: Ø 45 x 100 mm
Weight: 120 g
remover tool with carrying strap
Page
drucken
Schritt
zurück vor
Exit
2014/XX.X
2014/2.10
Order-No. 1460.Z
25,– €
page 5 (of 11)
S u r v e y i n g
E q u i p m e n t .
33
25
mm
Ball prism Ø 1.5" (38,1 mm)
Ø
40
mm
With triple prism made of glass Ø 17,5 mm
1.5" (38,1 mm)
17,5 mm
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Prism constant K = -11,3 mm (Leica = +23,1 mm)
galvanized steel
steel ball Ø 1.5 "(38.1 mm) ± 0.05 mm
accuracy of grinding of the triple prism: 2"
reflective surfaces: back side silver mirrored
range distance measurement: 300 to over 500 m (device-and weather permitting)
mounting of the prism: ± 0,1 mm
shockproof and waterproof
with M6 female thread on the back:
ball prism Ø 1.5" (38,1) mm, K = -11,3 (Leica = +23,1) mm, M6 female thread
Order-No. 1452
145,– €
Order-No. 1453
145,– €
without M6 female thread on the back:
ball prism Ø 1.5" (38,1 mm), K = -11,3 (Leica = +23,1) mm
Protective cap:
Onto the ball prisms and the ball target marks a protective cap can be clipped. It is made of resistant
white plastic. Especially when the prism remains at the base for a longer time, the cap reduces a lreduction of the reflection power due to dust, rain, snow, etc.
Due to the "tunnel effect" more accurate alignment towards the tachymeter is required by using
the cap.
protective cap Ø 25 mm, white plastic, to be clipped on
1,5" (38,1 mm)
Order-No. 1469
8,50 €
With triple prism made of glass Ø 25 mm
25 mm
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Prism constant K = -16,9 mm (Leica = +17,5 mm).
galvanized steel
Ø steel ball: 1.5" (38,1 mm) ±0,05 mm.
Accuracy of grinding of the triple prism: 2"
reflective surfaces: back side silver mirrored
Range distance measurement: 300 to over 500 m (device-and weather permitting)
Mounting of the prism: ± 0,1 mm
shockproof and waterproof
only without thread on the back available:
ball prism Ø 1.5" (38,1 mm), K = -16,9 (Leica = +17,5) mm
Order-No. 1445
145,– €
There is no protective cap available for order number 1445!
With a pruchase of 10 ball prisms at once you get
a Transport case No. 1468 for free. (s. catalog 2014/2.11 p.7)
2014/XX.X
2014/2.10
page 6 (of 11)
S u r v e y i n g
E q u i p m e n t .
34
Base for ball-Ø 1.5" (38,1 mm)
with permanent magnet:
The base is made of hard anodized aluminum with a integrated
permanent magnet. So the base can be attached to all magnetic surfaces,
eg. Railways, machinery, vehicles and centerings (s. catalog 2014/2.11).
During the time no measurements are taken, the base can be equipped with a cover. It has a diameter of
40 mm, is also held in place magnetically and protects the ball thread of the base from dirt and weather
(see picture).
Note:
When using the each matching base Ø 33 mm, the two ball prism systems Ø 30 mm and Ø 1.5" (38.1
mm) are fully compatible. The signaled point is always 30.8 mm axially above the base bottom.
Please note:
Bases for the ball Ø 30 mm are anodized normal.
Bases for the ball Ø 1.5" mm are anodized blue!
Available with two magnet strenghts:
base Ø 33 mm for balls Ø 1.5" (38,1 mm),
with magnet (holding force around 3 kg) + cover Ø 40 mm
Order-No. 1457.S
32,– €
Order-No. 1457.S2
34,– €
with magnet (holding force around 3 kg) + cover Ø 40 mm
Order-No. 1458.S
32,– €
Order-No. 1458.S2
34,– €
The ball base is also available with Ø 40 mm in two magnet strengths:
Remover
Due to the very high holding force of the strong magnet, the ball base No. 1460.S2 can not be simply
removed "by hand". It is therefore advisable to use a remover tool.
•
•
•
•
•
Sturdy, break-resistant plastic
suitable for all bases
with carrying strap
Size: Ø 45 x 100 mm
Weight: 120 g
remover tool with carrying strap
Order-No. 1460.Z
25,– €
Without permanent magnet:
For applications where no magnetic fixing of the prism is desired, the base is also available without
permanent magnets. Also in this configuration, the prism center is 30.8 mm in axial location to the base
bottom. Of course this base can be used only in horizontally mounted centerings Ø 40 mm.
not magnetic
2014/XX.X
2014/2.10
Order-No. 1459
21,– €
page 7 (of 11)
S u r v e y i n g
E q u i p m e n t .
35
25
mm
Stainless steel base for ball-Ø 1.5 "
(38.1 mm)
Structure and functioning of the stainless steel ball base is equal to the aluminum ball base.
Ø
40
mm
The integrated permanent magnet allows the ball base to be attached to all magnetic surfaces, for
example railways, machinery, vehicles and centerings (see catalog 2014/2.11 page 4 +5)
Special Features:
• base made of stainless steel (V2A)
• built-in magnetic ring with a central hole Ø 14 mm
• holding force of the magnet: - around 5 kg on the bottom-side of the base on magnetic surfaces
- around 3 kg of the ball prism on the prism base
• ball Prism Ø 1.5 "(38.1mm) with prism constant K = -11.3 (Leica +23.1) mm and
K = -16.9 (Leica + 17.5 mm) can be used (see catalog 2014/2.10 Page 6)
• positional accuracy of the prism in base: ± 0.03 mm
• height offset HO of the center of the ball above the bottom of the base: 25 mm ± 0.03 mm
• base bottom Ø : 40 mm ± 0.03 mm
• suitable for centering plate No. 6009 (see catalog 2014/11.2 Page 4 + 5)
• lettering engraved with the ball Ø 1.5"(38.1 mm) and 25 mm height offset HO
Stainless steel base is not available for:
- Ball prisms Ø 30 mm
- Centering plates Ø 33 mm
During the time no ball prism is attached to a base, it can be covered with a protective plate 40 mm
made of galvanized steel. It's also held by the base magnet and protects the ball base from dirt and
weather (see picture).
base Ø 40 mm for balls Ø 1.5 "(38.1 mm), with magnet
(holding force around 3 or 5 kg) + cover Ø 40 mm
Order-No. 1430
58,– €
25
mm
Please also note our special bases of stainless steel for industrial 3D-measurement
(see catalog 2014/2.12 + 2.13)
Ø
40
mm
Without permanent magnet:
For applications in which no magnetical hold of the ball prism is desired, the ball base also is available
without permanent magnets. The height offset is also 25 mm.
This base may only be used horizontally.
base Ø 40 mm for balls Ø 1.5 "(38.1 mm),
without magnet
2014/2.10
Order-No. 1431
47,– €
page 8 (of 11)
S u r v e y i n g
E q u i p m e n t .
36
Base with permanent magnet and thread for
ball-Ø 30 mm and 1.5"
If the ball prism/target mark is to be used on threads, ball-bases with different thread connections are
available. An universal application of the precise system is guaranteed, for example, with M8 wall studs
on prism poles as reference points for laser scanning, etc.
The distance of the center from the base bottom is always exactly 50 mm ± 0.1 mm (without thread).
Base for the ball-Ø 1.5" are andonized blue!
50 mm
for
ball-Ø
50 mm
thread
back
ball
folding force
magnet
with
female thread
with
male thread
Order-No.
Order-No.
30 mm
1/4"
normal
1465.14
37,– €
1465.14a
40,– €
30 mm
1/4"
strong
1465.214
46,50 €
1465.214a
49,50 €
1.5 " (38,1 mm)
1/4 "
strong
1466.14
46,50 €
1466.14a
49,50 €
30 mm
M8
normal
1465.08
37,– €
1465.08a
40,– €
30 mm
M8
strong
1465.208
46,50 €
1465.208a
49,50 €
1.5 " (38,1 mm)
M8
strong
1466.08
46,50 €
1466.08a
49,50 €
30 mm
5/8"
normal
1465.58
37,– €
1465.58a
40,– €
1465.258a
49,50 €
1466.58a
49,50 €
30 mm
5/8"
strong
1465.258
46,50 €
1.5 " (38,1 mm)
5/8"
strong
1466.58
46,50 €
All ball-bases are delivered incl. cover!
Other threads on request!
Example:
ball base No. 1465.08a screwed
into wall studs with M8 female thread
Cylindrical adapter for wall distance 100 mm
The ball prisms are also ideal for use on M8 wall bolts.
With the following intermediate pieces the foregoing bases can be accommodated with M8 thread on the
AdV distance of 100 mm (see catalog 2014/6.1 page 1).
The effective length (without thread) is 50 mm, diameter 25 mm.
Thread 1. side
Thread 2. side
Order-No.
M8 female thread
M8 female thread
372.50
22,50 €
M8 male thread
M8 female thread
372.50a1
23,50 €
M8 male thread
M8 male thread
372.50a2
24,50 €
Other threads on request!
100 mm
2014/XX.X
2014/2.10
page 9 (of 11)
S u r v e y i n g
E q u i p m e n t .
37
Centering with M8 female thread for ball-base with thread
• steel centering Ø 40 mm, galvanized, with M8 female thread
• for screwing on bolts with M8 male thread or by means of a threaded pin on bolt with M8
female thread
• while screwing the flat surface of the centering makes a precise connection with the ball-base possible
and guarantees a high positional accuracy of the ball prism doing repeated measurements.
• For long-term measurements, an additional fixing of the centering (eg. with mounting adhesive) is
recommended. (s. catalog 2014/2.11 p.6)
centering with M8 thread, for ball-base with M8 female thread
2014/XX.X
2014/2.10
Order-No. 1461.08
9,– €
page 10 (of 11)
S u r v e y i n g
E q u i p m e n t .
38
Prisms on L-carriers with cylindrical
magnetic base
expands the prism monitoring system to other common prism constants
• Stable, CNC-machined, anodized aluminum carrier
• Available with magnetic base Ø 33 mm and Ø 40 mm
• 6 kg carrying capacity of the magnet in the supporting leg ensures a
reliable adhesion on all magnetic surfaces
• Fitting for all centerings (s. catalog 2014/2.11)
• Distance of the center of the prism to the support base = 30.8 mm ± 0.1 mm. Thus, the same as the
distance from center of the prism to the base of the prism base
• Available with all common prism constants
• For all constants of the prism the centrally symmetric point (= visible prism center) is exactly
stored in tilt and vertical axis.
• Ball prisms (with base) and prisms on L-carriers with prism constant K = -11.3 (Leica = +23.1) mm and
K = -16.9 (Leica = +23.1) can be replaced with each other on the matching centerings - without having
to change the prism constant on the tachymeter.
• Prism / reflector with adjustable tilting resistance (wrench size 10), can also be set in a certain position.
Prism constant K
Reflector type
magnetic base Ø 33 mm
Order-No.
magnetic base Ø 40 mm
Order-No.
K = 0 (Leica = +34,4) mm
reflective foil
35 x 25 mm
1060.0
60,– €
1070.0
60,– €
K = -11,3 (Leica = +23,1) mm
triple prism
Ø 17,5 mm
1060.11
140,– €
1070.11
140,– €
K = -16,9 (Leica = +17,5) mm
triple prism
Ø 25 mm
1060.17
130,– €
1070.17
130,– €
K = -30 (Leica = +4,4) mm
triple prism
Ø 25 mm
1060.30
180,– €
1070.30
180,– €
K = -34,4 (Leica = 0) mm
triple prism
Ø 25 mm
1060.34
180,– €
1070.34
180,– €
K = 35,0 (Leica = -0,6) mm
triple prism
Ø 25 mm
1060.35
180,– €
1070.35
180,– €
Centerings s. catalog 2014/2.11 p. 2 + p. 4
2014/XX.X
2014/2.10
page 11 (of 11)
S u r v e y i n g
E q u i p m e n t .
39
Centerings for ball-bases
Cost efficient fixing of centerings of ball bases and L-Prisms
with magnetic base
In order to perform repeated measurements on the same point, the ball base / prism with magnetic base can be
glued directly onto the object that is being observed (mounting adhesive s. catalog 2014/2.11 p. 6).
If a large number of points have to be checked, it is much cheaper to install centerings on the object.
Depending on the ground they are glued or screwed.
On the solid galvanized steel plates, the magnetic ball base is securely fixed. A cylindrical recess is designed as
a fit for receiving the ball base. Centering accuracy is ± 0.2 mm.
To measure, a ball base / prism with magnetic base is inserted in the centering and the prism ball aligned
towards the tachymeter. After the measurement has been completed the base / L-Prism can be removed and be
used otherwise. The centering remains on the object for repeated measurement.
For protection against contamination by rain, dust, etc. it can be coated with a magnetic cover.
centering with
magnetic cover
2014/XX.X
2014/2.11
page 1 (of 7)
S u r v e y i n g
E q u i p m e n t .
40
Centering plate with centering Ø 33 mm - for adhering fits for ball bases Ø 33 mm
Order-No. 1460, 1460.S, 1460.S2
Order-No. 1457.S, 1457.S2
s. catalogue 2014/2.10 page 5
fits for cylindrical magnetic base Ø 33 mm
Order-No. 1060.0 bis .35
•
•
•
•
steel plate Ø 40 x 4 mm, galvanized
for adhering with mounting adhesive (s. catalog 2014/2.11 p. 6) on various grounds
fitting accuracy of the centering Ø 33 mm: ± 0,1 mm
centric bore Ø 8 mm for precise fixation while gluing the plate (e.g. on cross)
centering for adhering, with centering Ø 33 mm, bore 8 mm
Order-No. 1461
7,50 €
Centering plate with centering Ø 33 mm
- for adhering and/or for screwing • steel plate Ø 40 x 7 mm, galvanized
• fitting accuracy of the centering Ø 33 mm: ± 0,1 mm
• centric bore Ø 8 mm with counterbore
Mounting options:
• adhering with mounting adhesive (s. catalog 2014/2.11 p. 5) on various surfaces
• centric bore Ø 8 mm with counterbore: For fixation with one screw.
All metric countersunk screws are suitable, and dowels and wood screws with countersunk up to 8 mm
diameter
centering plate for adhering and/or for screwing, with centering Ø 33 mm
Order-No. 1464
10,- €
Centering plate with centering Ø 33 mm - for screwing -
•
•
•
•
steel plate Ø 60 x 4 mm, galvanized, with 4 bores Ø 4,5 mm
for adhering on various surfaces
fitting accuracy of the centering Ø 33 mm: ± 0,1 mm
centric bore Ø 8 mm for precise fixation of the plate while screwing (e.g. on cross)
centering plate for screwing, with centering Ø 33 mm, bore 8 mm
2014/XX.X
2014/2.11
Order-No. 1463
9,- €
page 2 (of 7)
S u r v e y i n g
E q u i p m e n t .
41
Covering for centering plates Ø 33 mm
(No. 1461, 1463 and 1464) s. catalogue 2014/2.11 page 2
For protection of the centering plate against dust and weathering
With a center-mounted permanent magnet, the protective plate adheres to the centering.
The curvature ensures that the cover is centered and can not slip on the plate.
covering for centering plates Ø 33 mm, with permanent magnet
2014/XX.X
2014/2.11
Order-No. 1453.50
3,50 €
page 3 (of 7)
S u r v e y i n g
E q u i p m e n t .
mm
42
25
Centering universal with centering Ø 40 mm
Ø
40
mm
fits for ball bases Ø 40 mm
Order-No. 1458.S, 1458.S2
Order-No. 1430
fits for cylindrical magnetic base Ø 40 mm
Order-No. 1470.0 to .35
- for adhering and/or for screwing • steel plate Ø 50 x 7 mm, galvanized
• fitting accuracy of the centering Ø 40 mm: ± 0,1 mm
Mounting options:
• Adhering with mounting adhesive (s. catalog 2014/2.11 p. 6) on various surfaces
• centric bore Ø 8 mm with counterbore: For fixation with one screw. All metric countersunk screws are
suitable, as well as dowels and wood screws with countersunk up to 8 mm diameter
• 4 eccentric bores Ø 5 mm with counterbore: For fixation with at least 2 up to max.
4 countersunk screws. All metric screws are suitable, as well as dowels and wood screws with countersunk up to 5 mm diameter.
centering plate for adhering and/or for screwing, with centering Ø 40 mm
Page
drucken
Schritt
zurück vor
Exit
2014/XX.X
2014/2.11
Order-No. 6009
11,– €
page 4 (of 7)
S u r v e y i n g
E q u i p m e n t .
43
mm
Covering for centering plate Ø 40 mm (No. 6009)
25
For protection of the centering plate against dust and weathering
Ø
40
mm
The covering exactly fits into the centering Ø 40 mm of the plate. Due to the center mounted permanent
magnet it is securely fixed.
covering for centering plate Ø 40 mm, with permanent magnet
2014/XX.X
2014/2.11
Order-No. 6009.S
3,50 €
page 5 (of 7)
S u r v e y i n g
E q u i p m e n t .
44
Mounting adhesive
For unalterable attachment of the ball-base or the centering for a long time on the object.
Features of the adhesive:
• bonding of metals, wood, plastic
(Stone, concrete, natural stone, plaster, polycarbonate, PSPU, PVC, plastic, copper, lead, zinc, aluminum, steel, wood, glass)
• very high initial adhesion
• bonding of heavy parts, including vertical locations
• odorless and solvent free
• resistant to weather, UV rays, water, chlorine, etc.
• antifungal
• processing temperature: +5/+40°C
Application: The parts to be bonded must be clean, free of oil and grease. Apply adhesive on one side,
reposition parts and press down firmly. The adhesion is immediate.
When using the ball-base on magnetic iron parts (eg tracks) the adhesion is additionally supported by a
permanent magnet till the glue is hardend.
For processing with standard hand caulking guns.
mounting adhesive, white, 1 cartridge à 290 ml
2014/XX.X
2014/2.11
Order-No. 1462
12,50 €
page 6 (of 7)
S u r v e y i n g
E q u i p m e n t .
45
Transport-case
For storage of ball prisms, bases, L-prisms, centering plates, cover plates, etc.
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
15 separate compartments.
inside: ca. 363 x 219 x 64 mm.
outside: ca. 385 x 290 x 75 mm.
weight: 920 g.
made of red ABS plastic
impact-resistant and shatter-proof
soft-click closures
pre-cut foam in the bottom
convoluted foam in the lid.
transport-case
Order-No. 1468
50,- €
Other transport-cases on request!
The ball prism monitoring system is also ideal for
connecting tachymetric 3-D measurement and levelling
monitoring height measurement.
If the ball or the centering of the ball-base is mounted
on a substantially horizontal surface a leveling rod can
be fitted onto the ball prism.
For ball-Ø 30 mm:
The height difference between the center of the prism
and contact surface leveling is exactly 15 mm
(spherical radius).
2014/XX.X
2014/2.11
page 7 (of 7)
S u r v e y i n g
E q u i p m e n t .
46
Ball base for industrial 3D-measurement
For three-dimensional determination of geometries in industrial surveying technology.
For more information about ball prisms and magnetized bases please refer to our monitoring
prism system (Catalog 2014/2.10)
Base (nest) for surveying edges with ball prisms Ø 1.5 "(38.1mm)
Features:
•
•
•
•
base made of stainless steel (V2A), lower part exactly semicircular
built-in permanent magnet
holding force of the magnet: 2 kg
applicable ball prisms: ø 1.5 "(38.1mm) with prism constant K = -11.3 (Leica +23.1) mm and
K = -16.9 (Leica +17.5 mm) (see catalog 2014/2.10 Page 6)
• positional accuracy of the prism at base: ± 0.03 mm
• height offset HO of the center of the ball above the edge: 25 mm ± 0.03 mm
• base ø : 40 mm
• engraved lettering with ball ø 1.5 "(38.1 mm) and height offset HO 25 mm
base for edges, for balls Ø 1.5 " (38.1 mm),
(magnet holding force around 2 kg), height offset HO: 25 mm
Order-No. 1432
126, - €
Base (nest) for surveying corners with ball prisms Ø 1.5 "(38.1mm)
Not every corner needs to be calculated by the cut of two edges with the method described above
for its coordination.
Square corners can be determined directly. For this purpose, the circular base bottom of the following
two bases is milled out; 90 ° for surveying of outer corners and 270 ° for inside corners. The base
is set to the corner, and the ball prism aligned towards the tachymeter to measure. With magnetic
surfaces the base holds by itself, by the integrated permanent magnet on the measurement object
and doesn't need to be held by hand during the measurement. The measurement point is at a distance
of exactly 25 mm from the corner point
Features:
• base made of stainless steel (V2A), base with 90 ° cut-out (quadrant)
• built-in permanent magnet
• holding force of the magnet: 2 kg
• applicable ball prisms: ø 1.5"(38.1mm) with prism constant K = -11.3 (Leica +23.1) mm and
K = -16.9 (Leica +17.5 mm) (see catalog 2014/2.10 Page 6).
•
•
•
•
positional accuracy of the prism on base: ± 0.03 mm
height offset HO of the center of the ball above the corner: 25 mm ± 0.03 mm
base ø 40 mm, centeral borehole: ø 10 mm
engraved lettering with ball ø 1.5"(38.1 mm) and height offset HO 25 mm
base for outside corners, for balls Ø 1.5 "(38.1 mm),
Order-No. 1434.A
126, - €
R
=
For inside corners:
.5
ax
m
m
m
The rounding-of-diameter of the inside corner must not be greater than 5 mm!
base for inside corners, for balls Ø 1.5 "(38.1 mm),
2014/2.12
Order-No. 1434
126, - €
page 1 (of 2)
S u r v e y i n g
E q u i p m e n t .
47
Base (nest) for surveying of boreholes with
ball prisms Ø 1.5 "(38.1mm)
With this base, the 3D coordinates of existing drillings made by tools and similar devices can be
determined. For this purpose the base is equipped with a concentric pin.
The accuracy of the stud diameter is made with an accuracy of h6.
The bolt of the base is inserted into the drilling and for measuring the ball prism is aligned towards the
tachymeter. Because of the integrated permanent magnet the base holds itself on magnetic surfaces while
measuring and doesn't need to be held by hand during the measurement.
The ball is located exactly in the center of the pin axis (drilling axis) by a distance of exactly 25 mm
above the contact surface.
Features:
•
•
•
•
L
D
Base made of stainless steel (V2A), base with cylindrical bolt with various diameters in precision h6
Built-in permanent magnet
holding force of the magnet: 2 kg
Applicable ball prisms: ø 1.5"(38.1mm) with prism constant K = -11.3 (Leica +23.1) mm
• height offset HO of the center of the ball on outside corner: 25 mm ± 0.03 mm
• Base diameter: 40 mm
• Engraved lettering with the ball ø 1.5"(38.1 mm) and height offset HO 25 mm
base in stainless steel for drillings, for balls ø 1.5"(38.1 mm),
(magnet holding force of around 2 kg), height offset HO: 25 mm
Bolt Ø D x length L
Order-No.
ø 6 x 8 mm
1433.06
126,– €
ø 8 x 10 mm
1433.08
126,– €
ø 10 x 12 mm
1433.10
126,– €
ø 12 x 14 mm
1433.12
126,– €
Other pin-ø on request!
Base (nest) with M8 male thread for ball prisms Ø 1.5 "(38.1mm)
Instead of a cylinder bolt, the base is also available with an M8 external thread.
It can thus be screwed in all the measured objects with M8 female thread, for example, wall studs
(see catalog 2014/6.4)
Due to the very small distance of 25 mm from the contact surface, very accurate repeated measurements
are possible.
Features:
• Base made of stainless steel (V2A), lower part with M8 male thread (length 8 mm)
• Built-in permanent magnet
• holding force of the magnet: 2 kg
• Applicable ball prisms: ø 1.5 "(38.1 mm) with prism constant K = -11.3 (Leica +23.1) mm and
• height offset HO from the support surface to the center of the ball: 25 mm ± 0.03 mm
• Base ø: 40 mm
• Engraved lettering with the ball ø 1.5 "(38.1 mm) and height offset HO 25 mm
base with external thread M8 x 8 mm, for balls ø 1.5 " (38.1 mm),
Order-No. 1433.M8
2014/2.12
126, - €
page 2 (of 2)
S u r v e y i n g
E q u i p m e n t .
48
Railway Surveying
As in many areas of geodesy, in railway surveying both methods, GNSS and with tachymeter are applied
in the field.
In classical surveying with the tachymeter one can achieve high differential accuracies if good measuring
arrangement and appropriate tools are used.
We offer two products in this area: Our well-known rail angle SW PRO is used for surveying the rail position. New to the program is the prism holder for horizontal bolts, that are used in the
track measurement.
For both products, our small prisms with closed-form of our series HIP and TOP are perfectly suitable.
Especially used for the horizontal bolt at catenary they show their strengths: because of their slim design
they can be rotated in any direction without problems (see picture) - and this is true even for prisms with
a large constant (eg, K = -34.4 mm / Leica = 0 mm).
It is therefore not necessary to buy an expensive special prism, which can be used only for the track
measurement. Do you own one of our "normal" small prisms, these can be used with the rail angle SW
PRO and with the prism holder for the horizontal bolt.
Rail angle SW PRO
Rail angles for exact surveying of the rail position. The reference point P (driving side) is situated at the
inner side of the rail, 14 mm below the top of the rail SOK (driving area). This point will be realised
exactly by setting the rail angle SW PRO.
Structure and advantages:
• metal construction with hardened, 14 mm long cylinder pin for exact setup at the reference point P.
• cylindrical setup of the SW PRO on the rail. Therefore, also on rails with a slope, a plumbed use with
the same distance to the top of the rail is assured.
• Screwing axis of the prism connection (M8-thread) is exactly situated above the reference point P.
• Possible use of the wall adapter WA50 (s. Catalogue 2014/6.1 S. 1) for prisms with 5/8" threads or of
the wall adapter WA Leica (s. Catalogue 2014/6.1 S. 1) for prisms with Leica vertical bolt connections Ø
12 mm. For both systems and with a fix rail angle, the prism can be turned around the prism axis and
aligned to the total station/EDM.
• Adjustable rubber stop. After setting the rail angle, this stop takes care that the cylinder pin will
always be pressed with light pressure on the reference point P. It is adjustable for all rail width, whereas the setup per rail form has to be done only once. In case you use a prism with upwards extension (e.g. prism pole), the rubber stop provides a secure and reliable positioning of the rail angle on the
reference point. The setting can be done in a standing position, which facilitates the work especially
with a large number of surveying points. If needed, a marking on the side of the rail can easily be
fixed with the small cylinder pin.
• The plumbing of the rail angle including the prism will be accomplished by using a circular level, which
can either be fixed at the prism holder or at the prism pole.
• With a fitting M8-Adapter the use of prisms with a 5/8“ thread or with a Leica stud bolt connection are
possible.
M8
rail angle SW PRO (without M8-Adapter)
Order-No. 800
95,– €
Please ask for rail angles for special widths (e.g. crane tracks)!
2014/3.1
2014/XX.X
Page 1 (of 3)
S u r v e y i n g
E q u i p m e n t .
49
Prism holder for bolt demarcation
The holder may be used on all bolts (Ø 12 mm), which are found on catenary poles made of steel or
spun concrete. After attaching the holder on the bolt, the prism is aligned to the tachymeter and placed
vertically with the help of the circular bubble (on the top of the prism). The state is fixed with the two
knurled screws and ready to measure.
We passed on installing a circular bubble on the holder itself, because its verification or adjustment is
difficult or even not possible to do.
M8
Installation and advantages:
Ø 12 mm
• Precisely machined metal structure made of anodized aluminum with ergonomic thumbscrews.
• Screwing axis of the prism thread (M8) is located exactly above the reference point (= center boltfront-edge).
• With the corresponding M8 adapter optional possibility of using prisms with 5/8 "threads or with Leica
bolt thread.
prism holder for horizontal-bolts (without M8 adapter)
2014/3.1
Order-No. 850
139,– €
Page 2 (of 3)
S u r v e y i n g
E q u i p m e n t .
50
M8 adapter for prisms with 5/8“- and Leica-thread
The following adapters can be used with both the rail angle SW PRO as well as with the prism holder for
bolt demarcation.
120 mm
100 mm
Tilting axis height 100 or 120 mm
When using prisms of our series HIP and TOP the results of the tilting axis height are 100 or 120 mm,
measured from the reference point.
Using the rail angle SW PRO it's the top of the rail, using the prism holder for bolt demarcation the highest point of the horizontal pin.
Tilting axis height 100 mm
For prisms with 5/8“ female thread:
adapter M8 – 5/8“, L = 30 mm (wall adapter WA 30)
Order-No. 820
37,- €
Order-No. 810
37,- €
Order-No. 830
17,- €
For prisms with 5/8“ female thread:
120 mm
adapter M8 – 5/8“, L = 50 mm (wall adapter WA 50)
For prisms with Leica-thread Ø 12 x 27 mm:
adapter M8 – Leica St27 (wall adapter WA Leica)
Our prisms inclusive accessories:
Prisms Series HIP
catalogue 2014/2.1 p. 1-2
Prisms Series TOP
Circular level for prisms
catalogue 2014/2.5 p. 1
Prism poles
2014/XX.X
2014/3.1
Page 3 (of 3)
S u r v e y i n g
E q u i p m e n t .
51
Prism Swan Neck
• Use of regular mini prisms with round prism casings and defined prism constant at the end of
the casing
• direct measuring of points on the surface of the wall and the inside and outside corners of buildings
• Possible to reach points hard to get to by using the flexible swan neck
• the visibility of the reflector is not impeded as it would be when holding the prism by hand
• secure holding of the prism; it will not slip out of the hand
• surveying without application of cross eccentricities
• simple way to extend:
with the grip PSGZ – all poles with 5/8" thread (e.g. prism poles),
with the grip PSW all regular telescopic extensions of WOLF garden tools.
• when using with extension: direct measuring of high situated or inaccessible building fronts,
ridge heights, etc.
• quick and exact definition of control points for photogrammetric application
Prism swan neck
consists of swan neck (length 40cm), ring clamp for connection to the prism and grip with
possibility to extend (without prism)
The swan neck is also available with Lanyard-eyelet for easy transportation
The stable eyelet isn't brought on disturbingly in front of the handle.
The swan neck can be used completely with the lanyard or be removed from the neckstrap via the
quick release.
handle
extension
possibility
with poles with
Ring clamp for prisms with casing-Ø
25-32 mm
z. B. MP 24/Omni/CST
without eyelet
with eyelet
Order-No.
32-50 mm
z. B. Zeiss P1
without eyelet
with eyelet
Order-No.
PSGZ
5/8" thread
741 78,50 €
741.0 84,– €
743 78,50 €
743.0 84,– €
PSW
WOLF-deviceconnection
751 78,50 €
751.0 84,– €
753 78,50 €
753.0 84,– €
Set for retrofitting
for retrofitting of an already available swan neck with an eyelet
Eyelet
The set includes
• self-adhesive foam rubber strip
• cable ties
• eyelet
After adhering the foam rubber strip in front of the handle of the swan neck the eyelet is then attached
to the cable tie. The protruding part of the tongue of the cable tie is cut.
set for retrofitting eyelet for lanyard
Order-No. 0740
6,- €
lanyard, red
Order-No. 1390.R
5,- €
lanyard, black
Order-No. 1390.S
5,- €
Lanyard
For secure transportation of a swan neck with eyelet
•
•
•
•
flat-woven, 20 mm wide polyester ribbon
strap length 40 cm
10 cm end pieces with plastic buckle
snap hook
2014/4.1
2014/XX.X
Page 1 (of 2)
S u r v e y i n g
E q u i p m e n t .
52
Extensions
for grip PSGZ (5/8"-thread) and grip PSW (WOLF-tools):
telescopic poles made of high quality, tread aluminium up to a length of 10 m
Characeristics:
•
•
•
•
•
low weight with relatively high solidity
anodised protection effective against corrosion
simple handling of rotary locks
smooth adjustment between minimum and maximum length
the poles can be dismantled into the telescopic parts and can be used separately
The big advantage of the flexible prism swan neck, i.e. the possibility to define or arrange the
prism according to the electro-optical total station/EDM, is also given when the telescopic pole is
fully extended – by pressing it against the wall.
The telescopic poles are available with 5/8"- threads or with the quick lock of WOLF- tools:
connection
for handle
length max.
5/8’’
5/8’’
5/8’’
WOLF
WOLF
PSGZ
PSGZ
PSGZ
PSW
PSW
3 m: 2 x 1,5 m
6 m: 3 x 2,0 m
10 m: 5 x 2,0 m
6 m: 3 x 2,0 m
10 m: 5 x 2,0 m
length min.
1,60
2,20
2,40
2,40
2,60
m
m
m
m
m
title
Order-No.
T3Z*
T6Z
T10Z
T6W
T10W
260.3
776
780
786
790
69,– €
112,– €
138,– €
112,– €
138,– €
* Material of T3Z: glass fiber (GFK) with ø23/27 mm and yellow protection coating
(s. catalogue 2014/7.1 p. 7)
Original WOLF-Devices telescopic extensions
WOLF ZMV1 (175-280 cm) Available in garden, construction and home improvement markets.
WOLF ZMV1 (175-280 cm) Available in garden, construction and home improvement markets.
The achievable heights or distances S resulting from the following calculation:
S = 0,5 m (swan neck) + 2 m (body height) + length max. telescopic pole
2014/XX.X
2014/4.1
Page 2 (of 2)
S u r v e y i n g
E q u i p m e n t .
53
Manual reflector holder for
sighting frame stake out
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
one holder for stake out and control of the nails
changeable marking pin
adjustable reflector holder
compact and light construction
2 circular levels in the handle
tiltable reflector may be pushed through
handle of Mahogany wood
Typ EZ
Special holder for reflectors from Zeiss.
• no adjustment of the reflector holder necessary
• Prism constant K = -35 mm.
Typ EZ (without prism)
Order-No. 550
83,– €
Typ T
Special holder for reflectors or reflector holders with 5/8" female thread
and 50 mm tilting axis height, for example TOPCON mini prism.
Especially suitable for our reflector holder series HIP-U and RT 50:
- HIP-U with integrated mini prism/reflecting target
- ONRT 50 with mini prism MP 24 or OMNI/CST-Mini prism or reflecting target
- L-holder (5/8”-thread) with prism or reflecting target
- EZRT 50 with Zeiss reflector ETR 1
• Individual adaptation to your EDM system by using prisms and prism constants according your needs.
• cardanic installation of the prism: after the setup of the reflector holder, the prism can be aligned on
every stand point without turning the handle.
Typ T (without prism and reflector holder)
2014/5.1
2014/XX.X
Order-No. 530
83,– €
Page 1 (of 1)
S u r v e y i n g
E q u i p m e n t .
54
Prism Nail holder HIT for
sighting frame stake out (DGBM)
The prism nail holder HIT is a new development and completes our program of accessories for sighting
frame stake out. It was developed especially for those colleagues who cannot use our pendulum holder,
as the floorboards or slats of their sighting frames do not have enough or don't even have any space to
the ground.
Also with the nail holder HIT a batter can be cut without a measuring assistant.
Bild 1
Structure and functioning:
The holder consists of a connection for a nail, a prism of the series HIP or TOP and of an impact bolt
(picture 1).
The nail connection has a quick clamp for simple and quick insertion of the nail (picture 2). The vertical
axis of the prism HIP (TOP) is identical with the nail axis. The impact bolt is screwed on the upper end
of the prism holder. By hitting on the bolt with a hammer, the nail can be driven into the board as much
as necessary to make the nail holder stand on its own (picture 3). The plumbing is done with the circular
level integrated in the holder HIP (TOP). To protect the material, the nail will be driven directly with the
hammer to the desired depth after removing the nail holder.
Bild 2
Advantages:
Bild 3
• The nail serves as stake-out point. After correct measuring the holder will be removed – the nail
remains unchanged at the surveyed position. A possible identity error can be eliminated, an additional
control is not necessary. After an approximation or an auxiliary measurement, the nail can be taken out
of the board with the prism nail holder at any time and can be placed anywhere else.
• After hitting the nail, the prism including the holder can be turned around the nail axis and aligned to
the total station/EDM.
• The prism remains on the stake out board without any further manual support. In this way, staking out
can be done on your own without a colleague's support.
• As the nail and the holder provide a firm base when measuring, the nail also remains in a plumbed
position after removing the holder (picture 4).
Bild 4
• The nail holder HIT can also be placed on already existing nails. To do this, the nail has to have an
exposed length of at least 25 mm.
• All nails with a regular head and a length of 50 mm and a Ø of 2,5 to 3,5 mm can be used.
• The prism nail holder HIT is set up modularly: Nail connection, prism and impact bolt can be separated.
Therefore the prism can also be used for other applications (e.g. with the prism pole).
Bild 5
2014/5.2
2014/XX.X
Page 1 (of 2)
S u r v e y i n g
E q u i p m e n t .
55
The nail holder HIP is available with a 5/8"- thread or with Leica 12 mm vertical bolt and with the following prism constants K (Leica in brackets): - see catalogue 2014/1.1 p. 2 optional:
red marked
prism center
Reflector/Prism
Prism constant K
(Leica in brackets)
reflecting target
0
(26 x 40 mm)
glass prism Ø 25 mm 0
glass prism Ø 17,5 mm-11,3
glass
glass
glass
glass
glass
prism
prism
prism
prism
prism
Ø
Ø
Ø
Ø
Ø
25
25
25
25
25
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
-16,5
-16,9
-30,0
-34,4
-35,0
number xx
for Order-No.
Note
(+34,4) mm
only available in design HIP
(+34,4) mm
(+23,1) mm
0
11
(+17,9)
(+17,5)
(+4,4)
(0) mm
(-0,6)
16
17
30
34
35
mm
mm
mm
mm
only available in design TOP
}
available in design HIP
and TOP
Note:
In all versions of the HIP, tilt and vertical axis run exactly through the visible center of the prism.
The TOP versions only with the prism constant K = -16.5 / -16.9 mm.
Using the holder with reflective foil, the axis runs exactly through the center of the printed target.
Prism Nail Holder HIT:
Holder without
tilting axis bolts
Order-No.
Holder with
2 tilting axis bolts
Order-No.
Prism HIP 2 x 5/8", Prism center red marked
Prism HIP Leica-5/8", Reflecting Target
Prism HIP Leica-5/8", Prism center normal
Prism HIP Leica-5/8", Prism center red marked
Prism TOP 2 x 5/8", without Prism MP 24
4615.0 254,- €
4610.xx 371,- €
4611.xx 376,- €
4635.0 279,- €
4630.xx 396,- €
4631.xx 401,- €
4515.xx 248,- €
4610.xx Z
4611.xx Z
4635.0 Z
4630.xx Z
4631.xx Z
384,- €
389,- €
292,- €
409,- €
414,- €
Prism TOP 2 x 5/8", with Prism MP 24 S
Prism TOP Leica-5/8", without Prism MP 24
Prism TOP Leica-5/8", with Prism MP 24 S
4511.xx 358,- €
4525.xx 274,- €
4521.xx 384,- €
4515.xx Z
4511.xx Z
4525.xx Z
4521.xx Z
261,- €
371,- €
287,- €
387,- €
impact bolt + nail connection with quick clamp
+ circular level integral
Prism HIP 2 x 5/8", Reflecting Target
Prism HIP 2 x 5/8", Prism center normal
4615.0 Z 267,- €
xx: Please specify here the required prism constant (red) from above table without +/- signs.
Examples:
Nr. 4615.0
Nr. 4611.11
Nr. 4631.11Z
2014/5.2
2014/XX.X
Nr. 4511.35Z
Nr. 4521.16
Page 2 (of 2)
S u r v e y i n g
E q u i p m e n t .
56
Pendulum Holder for sighting frame stake out
Pendulum holder (patented)
suitable for regular prisms and reflectors; depending on the manner of construction, it takes a plumbed
position on its own after placing it on the sighting frame (directly on the board or the nail).
Discrepancies and errors by manual holding can be avoided. Sighting frame stake out can be done
without support of an assistant. In “One-man-operation” ideal in connection with the 6x60° prism.
Pendulum holder – complete – consists of:
• Pendulum head (reflector connection + setup and marking pin + integrated nail set-up case).
The nail set-up case is connected with the set up pin and can be installed in a way, that after staking
out of a point, the pendulum holder can be safely hung on the nail driven into the board (picture 2).
To manually hold the reflector, the pendulum head can be detached in a few seconds (picture 3+4)
Available with 5/8" thread or Leica stud bolt.
Leica
5/8"
• Pendulum bow with handle, with a fixed length (40 cm)
or telescopic extension (20-40 cm).
• Pendulum weight (1500 g), assures a plumbed position
of the pendulum holder
bow
length
(cm)
pic 1
for reflectors or reflector holders with
pendulum
weight (g)
5/8’’ thread
Leica vertical bolt
Ø 12 x 27 mm
Leica vertical bolt
Ø 12 x 40 mm
Description
Order-No.
Description
Order-No.
Description
Order-No.
40
1500
PHN 5/15
421
145,- €
PHN L/15
431
145,- €
PHN LG/15
434
149,- €
Teleskop
20-40
1500
PHT 5/15
427
154,- €
PHT L/15
437
154,- €
PHT LG/15
438
158,- €
pic 1
pic 1
pic 1
(circular level as special equipment)
s. vatalogue 2014/5.3 p. 2)
selection of prisms with 5/8" or Leica thread
2014/XX.X
2014/5.3
Page 1 (of 2)
S u r v e y i n g
E q u i p m e n t .
57
Accessories Pendulum Holder
Put-on circular level
Attachable at the removed pendulum head.
For manual holding of a reflector, that does not yet have an integrated level.
May be attached on the pendulum bow, if not needed (see picture).
put-on circular level
Order-No. 140
20,– €
pendulum head, 5/8“-thread
Order-No. 121
41,– €
pendulum head, Leica vertical bolt ø 12 x 27 mm
Order-No. 181
41,– €
pendulum head, Leica vertical bolt ø 12 x 40 mm
Order-No. 181.4
45,– €
Pendulum head, single
with integrated nail setup case
Stake out pins and circular level
The combination of an installed circular level with a pendulum head is ideal for the exact surveying of
points without a prism pole.
Suitable for all prisms with 5/8"- thread or Leica vertical bolt connections without integrated circular level
in the prism holder.
The installed circular level is rotatable in all directions, regardless of the type of screw thread the
reflector has. This assures an optimal view of the level, also in difficult surveying situations.
The stake out pin is equipped with an integrated fixed nail setup case.
Therefore optimal control of the nails driven on the sighting frame.
Without prism:
Stake out pin with circular level, 5/8"
Order-No. 122
61,– €
Stake out pin with circular level, Leica vertical bolt ø 12 x 27 mm
Order-No. 182
61,– €
Stake out pin with circular level, Leica vertical bolt ø 12 x 40 mm
Order-No. 182.4
65,– €
Without prism:
2014/5.3
2014/XX.X
Page 2 (of 2)
S u r v e y i n g
E q u i p m e n t .
58
Instrument holder for the batter boards
with automatic centering on the linchpin
With the holder, any surveying instrument with 5/8 "thread can be mounted fast and stable on the batter
boards. If required, it centers itself automatically on a (vertically nailed in) linchpin.
The holder is made of a base plate for the instrument, and a clamping device. Both are screwed to one
another and form a unit.
With the clamping device, a high-power-screw-clamp, the holder can be attached to boards or planks extremely fast and stable!
While the installation of the holder on a linchpin, it automatically centers itself due to it's construction.
Clamping on the batter without a linchpin is possible too. Due to the large span of the screw-clamp of
190 mm the measurement possibilities are almost limitless.
Handling when centering on a linchpin:
• open screw-clamp
• Mounting the holder to the linchpin. Doing so the cross slide with the central bore of the 5/8 "- thread
is placed over the linchpin (see picture).
• Tighten the clamp. A circular level in the base plate allows a rough pre-leveling of the holder (see
picture). Since the cross slide can "wander freely" along a slot, no force is exerted on the linchpin
when tightening the clamp.
• Screwing of the instrument-tribrach to the 5/8 "thread of the holder (see picture). For devices without a
separate tribrach it gets screwed on the holder directly.
• Leveling of the surveying instrument
• The instrument sits ready for measurement, stable and centered nicely over the linchpin!
• The dismounting, proceeds in reverse order: thus first unscrewing the instrument,
then loosen the clamp and remove the holder. When working with a separate tribrach, it does not need
to be completely unscrewed from the holder, but a slight loosening of the tribrach screw is necessary
before the clamp is opened.
Techn. specifications:
•
•
•
•
5/8 "thread centers itself above the linchpin on boards and planks over a range of 60 mm width.
For use on nails with max. Head diameter 9.5 mm.
Dimensions: 180 (300) x150 (180) x 100 mm (incl. clamp).
Total weight of unit: 2.1 kg.
Span of the clamp: 190 mm.
instrument holder (5/8“) for batter boards, 190 mm
Order-No. 805
205,– €
Order-No. 806
218,– €
Span of the screw-clamp: 290 mm.
instrument-holder (5/8“) for batter boards, 290 mm
(screw-clamps with bigger span on request !)
2014/XX.X
2014/5.4
page 1 (of 1)
S u r v e y i n g
E q u i p m e n t .
59
100 mm
M8 – Wall bolts as surveying points
Application:
100 mm
Marking of surveying points with a wall bolt (M8- female thread):
• as connection points instead of ground points in the land register and engineers surveying
• of the points in the building control surveying that have to be verified
Principle:
• the prism is automatically centered in the required point in the position (X, Y) and height (Z), by
screwing in the wall adapter with the respective reflector holder (including prism) into the M8 wall bolt
AdV version:
• The bolts have an M8 female thread and can be attached on buildings by plugging or mortar.
• The required surveying point P0 is by definition on the axis of the M8 thread, 100 mm before the set
up area on the wall bolt.
• The prism is rotatable around the screwing axis of the M8 thread and the tilting axis of the reflector
holder. Because of the cardanic installation, the prism can be aligned on every instrument stand point.
Wall adapters for M8 bolts are available for prism holders with 5/8"- and Leica connection:
Practical example:
s. Verm.-Ing. 5/1996,
G. Weithe : London Heathrow Airport :
Innovative surveying concept
in luggage tunnel construction
Wall adapter M8-5/8"
structural principle:
• 5/8"- thread for connection of the tiltable reflector holder.
• M8- thread for screwing in regular wall bolts.
• 5/8" and M8 threads have a common axis and are independently rotatable around this axis
• The turning resistance can be adjusted by a self securing screw.
• secure screwing in the wall bolt and reflector holder possible without tools
• In addition, the unscrewing of the wall adapter from the wall bolt can be supported by a fork spanner
(13 mm)
• All wall adapters are made of stainless steel.
wall adapter
Order-No.
tilting axis height
of the prism
matching prisms/
reflecting targets
see catalogue
page
WA 50
810 37,- €
50 mm
series HIP-U 5/8’’
L-holder 5/8’’
series ONRT 50
Zeiss ETR 1 with holder EZRT 50
2014/2.1 p. 1
2014/2.2 p. 1
2014/2.3 p. 2
2014/2.7 p. 1
WA 40
WA 30
815 37,- €
820 37,- €
60 mm
70 mm
TOPCON mini prism
prism P 60 with holder PRT 60
CST-/OMNI mini prism
–
–
–
Wall adapter M8-Leica (=WILD)
For tiltable reflector holders with Leica connection and same tilting axis height as Leica reflector GPH1.
Structural principle same as WA 50. However, the reflector connection is not done by a 5/8" thread, but
by the practical Leica push-button connection (one-hand use).
wall adapter
Order-No.
WA Leica
830 17,––E
2014/6.1
2014/XX.X
matching prisms/reflecting targets
+ holder
see catalogue
page
• series HIP-U Leica
2014/2.1 p. 2
• L-holder Leica
• series ONRT L
• all prism holders with 50 mm tilting axis height +
PRO-Leica Adapter PLA 5/8’’
• Leica (WILD) GPH1, GPR1 (original + compatible)
2014/2.2 p. 1
2014/2.3 p. 2
2014/2.5 p. 1
2014/2.7 p. 1
Page 1 (of 1)
S u r v e y i n g
E q u i p m e n t .
60
Wall bolt with M8- female thread
Wall bolt made of brass, inscription "Mess-Punkt", installation by mortar.
Mortar wall bolt, length 45 mm
Order-No. 891
1,95 E
Wall bolt made of synthetic material with a full brass core, which is spread by a thread tap.
Inscription "Mess-Punkt". Allen key necessary to spread the shank.
Plug wall bolt, white, length 30 mm
Order-No. 893
1,05 E
Plug wall bolt, white, length 40 mm
Order-No. 895
1,10 E
Plug wall bolt, brown, length 30 mm
Order-No. 896
1,05 E
Plug wall bolt, brown, length 40 mm
Order-No. 897
1,10 E
Allen Key, SW4
Order-No. 899
1,10 E
Note: All wall bolts are also being shipped separately without a minimum order quantity.
Special step drill for wall bolts
12 mm-drill with integrated counterbore for wall- or ground flush installation of the wall bolt series
special step drill for wall bolts
2014/6.2
2014/XX.X
Order-No. 890
55,- €
Page 1 (of 1)
S u r v e y i n g
E q u i p m e n t .
61
G 3/8" wall adapter for tunnel construction
100 mm
Application:
Geodesic convergence surveying in tunnel construction, to register actual three-dimensional movements
of
the tunnel construction.
Principle:
100 mm
The convergence bolt with G 3/8" male thread also considers the characteristics of the AdV, same as the
M8 wall bolt: the surveying point P0 is situated on the axis of the G 3/8" thread, 100 mm before the
measuring stop of the convergence bolt. For centering in the point 0 we use:
Tilting axis height prism/reflecting target + length wall adapter = 100
To measure, you only have to screw the cardanically installed prism onto the convergence bolt and align
it to the total station/EDM.
The visibility has to be done with existing spotlight or hand lamp by reflection.
Structural Principle:
see wall adapter for M8 wall bolts.
Wall adapter to connect with convergence bolts
with G 3/8” male thread:
• all wall adapters made of stainless steel
• screwing the wall adapters on or off of the wall bolt can be done with a fork spanner 13 mm.
• matching prisms/reflecting targets and holders: see wall adapter for M8 wall bolts
(s. catalogue 2014/6.1 p. 1)
reflector connection
tilting axis height
of the reflector
wall adapter
description
Order-No.
5/8’’
5/8’’
5/8’’
Leica (WILD)
50 mm
60 mm
70 mm
= Leica GPH1
WAG 50
WAG 40
WAG 30
WAG Leica
825
826
827
832
2014/6.3
2014/XX.X
37,- €
37,- €
37,- €
25,- €
Page 1 (of 1)
S u r v e y i n g
E q u i p m e n t .
62
Prism pole standard
Strong and light 2-piece prism pole
• Outer pipe made of carbon, Ø 32 mm. Allows the screwing of accessories, such as controllers, data
radio, battery, etc.
• Inner pipe made of aluminium with cm-divisions.
• Easy to adjust 20’ circular level.
• Soft rubber grip for comfortable handling even in winter.
• Optional: Stainless steel locking-pin for more secure fixation of the tilt axes or antenna height in 20
cm intervals starting at 1.60 m. The locking-bolt is firmly secured with a steel cord and can be stowed
when not in use in the clamping element.
• With classic TwistLoc-screw-clamping.
• Replaceable tip with 5/8" female thread.
• Pole length:
- without adapter/prism: 1,18 – 2,05 m,
- with adapter + prism (to prism center): 1,33 – 2,20 m (= scaling).
• Weight (without adapter/prism): 1,1 kg.
Prism pole standard screw clamping, 1,33 – 2,20 m
Order-No. 5610
230,- €
Prism pole S_10 – clamping with
eccentric lever
Material and construction of the prism pole S_10 corresponds to the above-described standard pole.
The clamping of the inner tube however is done not with TWISTLOC-screw clamp, but with an eccentric
lever.
Advantage: With the clamping system known mainly from cycling, very high clamping forces can be generated - while still having smooth operation. The clamping force can be adjusted with an adjusting ring,
which is placed on the other side of the clamping lever. Once set, the other clamping operations are
done again with the same force. The risk of unwanted "retracting" of the inner tube, as it can occur with
a screw clamp, due to weak tightening, is effectively reduced with the clamping by the eccentric lever.
prism pole S_10 with eccentric lever clamping, 1,33 – 2,20 m
2014/7.1
2014/XX.X
Order-No. 5612
240,- €
Page 1 (of 7)
S u r v e y i n g
E q u i p m e n t .
63
Accessories prism pole
Adapter for the prism pole
KH
WL
The offered standard prism poles and S_10 x are supplied with a 5/8 "x 11-male thread in the inner tube.
the adapters, that are needed for the respectively prism systems are screwed into this thread.
The separation of the telescopic elements is matched to the special adapter below.
The use of other adapters may cause height errors. Please follow strictly the adjacent sketch. The measure
WL shown in the table is the "effective" length of the adapter.
Relevant for the choice of the adapter, however, is only the horizontal axis height (KH) of your prism. For
example you can measure the height KH with a ruler, when the prism is placed on a table or
something similar.
For the most common types of prisms, we offer standard adapters, for less common prisms with 5/8 "
thread, we supply the adjustable adapter 2090.14. On request, we can quickly and inexpensively manufacture special adapters to your specifications.
connection
tilting axis height (KH)
WL
LEICA / Wild vertical bolt
LEICA / Wild vertical bolt
5/8“ male thread
5/8“- male thread
5/8“ male thread
5/8“ male thread
5/8“ male thread
5/8“ male thread
5/8“ male thread
5/8“ male thread
5/8“ male thread, Geodimeter 600
1/4“ male thread (LEICA GRZ101)
86 mm
universally adjustable
50 mm
70 mm
97 mm
100 mm
115 mm
135 mm
universally adjustable
0 mm (GPS antenna)
prism movable
LEICA 360° mini prism
64 mm
100 mm
80 mm
53 mm
50 mm
35 mm
15 mm
150 mm
-
E/pc. Order-No.
20,00
35,00
20,00
20,00
20,00
20,00
20,00
20,00
20,00
20,00
20,00
20,00
2090.10
2090.17
2090.20
2090.19
2090.23
2090.11
2090.12
2090.13
2090.14
2090.15
2090.21
2090.22
All prism poles can be used with the adapter 2090.15 as a GNSS pole.
5/8”
Wear and spare parts for prism poles
The prism poles are so durable that only the tip is to be regarded as a common wear part.
tip for prism pole, complete
Order-No. 5194.03
15,– €
tip for prism pole, only steel ending
Order-No. 5194.007
4,50 €
33
86
M10
5194.03
5194.007
Extensions
Made of the same material as the pole S_04. Therefore extremely light and resistant. The extensions are
made to be put in between the adapter and the reflector or the prism.
Length: 1,00 m
Tube- Ø: 26 mm
Bottom: 5/8” female thread, top: 5/8” male thread,
Weight: 300 g
extension VS 1
Order-No. 5503
80,– €
Bottom: Connection for Leica vertical bolt Ø 12 x 40 mm, Top: Leica vertical bolt Ø 12 x 40 mm,
Weight: 350 g
extension VS 1 W
Order-No. 5503.L
2014/7.1
2014/XX.X
95,– €
Page 2 (of 7)
S u r v e y i n g
E q u i p m e n t .
64
Prism pole S_10 with double prism
Prism HIP 2x5/8"
or HIP-U 5/8"
Many prism poles can not be inserted in more than 1.3 m target height. If the prism would be attached
to the lower end of the pole, measurements could be performed, while the field of view to the upper
part of the pole is limited. In addition, the error of the circular level and the error due to inaccurate aligning would be minimized.
Characteristics and advantages:
of the
Prisms
8"
IP 2x5/ p. 1
series H
/2.1
4
ue 201
g
s. catalo
• Sturdy unit of the telescopic pole with the two prisms.
• The height of the upper prism is displayed correctly on the scaling of the inner tube
(1,33 to 2,20 m)
• the lower prism has a tilting axis of consistently 136 mm
(tip = 86 mm + 1/2 holder height = 50 mm).
• The two prisms can be aligned to 2 different tachymeter positions.
• By a rotation in different directions of the prisms it can also be controlled, which one of the prism is to
be detected by the automatic target seeking.
• Possible use as a standard prism pole (only upper prism) by using a 100 mm extension instead of the
lower prism.
• The prisms of the series HIP are available with all common prism constants.
In addition the visible center of the prism lies (central symmetric point) exactly in the axis of the pole
with all of the prism constants. Measurement errors caused by inaccurate alignment to the tachymeter
are minimized.
With eccentric clamping !
prism pole S_10 for double prism, below: 5/8“, on top: 5/8“ (without prism)
Order-No. 5612
240,- €
Prism HIP 2x5/8"
(Leica = +23,1 mm)
Prism pole S_10 with double prism
for Leica-Prism
Instead of the upper prism with 5/8 "thread, the use of a Leica prism is possible. All prisms can be used,
which have a Leica vertical bolt (Ø 12 mm) and a distance of the vertical bolt top edge to the center of
the prism of 60 mm.
For example: Original Leica-prism GPR1+GPH1, GP121, GPH1P and the 360°-prisms GRZ4, GRZ121 and
GRZ122.
As the lower prism, a prism of the series HIP 2x5/8“ has to be used. It must have a total length
of 100 mm.
They are available with the identical prism constant of the mentioned Leica prisms:
GPR1 + GPH1, GPR121, GPH1P: K = -34,4 m (Leica = 0)
GRZ4 and GRZ122:
K = -11,3 mm (Leica = +23,1 mm)
Advantages:
of the
"
Prisms
ica-5/8
and Le +2
"
8
/
5
x
1
2
.
p
IP
.1
series H talogue 2014/2
s. ca
• The prism constant doesn't need to be changed.
• On the lower prism (0.136 m above the ground) very precise measurements can be made because:
1. the errors caused by inexact perpendicular positioning of the pole has only minimal effect.
2. the visible center of the prism is exactly in the axis of the pole at the prisms of the series HIP and
therefore, there is only a minimal error in the angle and distance measurement with imprecise alignment to the total station.
Instead of an original Leica prism as an upper prism, of course, a prism of our series with Leica HIP connection can also be used.
Prism HIP 2x5/8"
(Leica = +23,1 mm)
Heights to prism center:
• Height of the lower prism is always: 0,136 m
• Height of the upper prism is displayed correctly on the scaling of the inner tube: 1,40 m – 2,20 m
With eccentric clamp!
prism pole S_10 for double prism, below: 5/8“, top: Leica (without prisms)
2014/XX.X
2014/7.1
Order-No. 5616
265,- €
Page 3 (of 7)
S u r v e y i n g
E q u i p m e n t .
65
Accessories prism-/GNSS-poles
Adjustable circular level in holder
• Sturdy aluminum construction
• for mounting on all prism- / GNSS-antenna poles with Ø 32 mm (1 1/4“)
• easy screwing/height adjusting of the level holder with an Allen wrench (5 mm)
• adjusting of the level with 2,5 mm Allen wrench
• glas level in aluminium casing
• accuracy of the level: 10’ or 30’
Second-Level
With todays tachymeters measurements, points can be determined with an accuracy of a few mm. Even
modern GNSS devices bring theoretical results in the cm range. In order to achieve this in practice with a
2 m long prism or antenna pole, a good circular bubble is first requirement for perpendicular positioning.
Here, a very high accuracy cut isn't necessarily that important.
For one thing, the leveling is a lengthy process (especially in unilateral sunlight) and for another, the
level has to be continuously adjusted exactly.
A however necessary continuous surveying during the measurement on the field, is very complex and
therefore will be omitted in most cases.
So a circular level, which is fixed to the pole will not be sufficient, if the adjustment is not
sufficiently tested.
To increase the reliability of the measurement, we therefore recommend the use of a second level
for high accuracy requirements.
It is screwed onto the pole independentely of the first level. After a careful adjustment of both levels, the
safety of the correct vertical level of the rod is very hig, as soon as both levels are
centered simultaneously.
The two levels are checking basically each other mutually. Only when the levels do no longer correspond,
one must necessarily take an adjustment.
holder with circular level 10’, for poles with 32 mm diameter
Order-No. 3008.10
49,- €
holder with circular level 30’, for poles with 32 mm diameter
Order-No. 3008.30
46,- €
For other poles with diameters of 20 to 32 mm we offer a reducing sleeve made of plastic. It ensures a
fixed fit of the level holder and preserves the pole surface.
- Please specify exact diameter of the pole holder with circular level 10’ and reducing sleeve
Order-No. 3008.10R
52,50 €
holder with circular level 30’ and reducing sleeve
Order-No. 3008.30R
49,50 €
Simple circular level with velcro closure
• for mounting on all poles with Ø 35 mm with velcro closure
• plastic level with accuracy 50’
• shipped already adjusted (not adjustable)
• Weight: 25 g
circular level with velcro closure
2014/7.1
2014/XX.X
Order-No. 5425
20,- €
Page 4 (of 7)
S u r v e y i n g
E q u i p m e n t .
66
Strut bipods
For quick and easy installation of the prism poles on even and uneven ground.
Bipod (Seco)
•
•
•
•
Upper push button clamp
Adjustable area of the legs: 1,05 – 1,80 m
Open clamp for installing the poles from the side
Can be used for poles with Ø 25 – 38 mm
strut bipod, 2-legged, aluminium, red, 1,8 kg
Order-No. 2091.R
154,– €
strut bipod, 2-legged, aluminium, yellow, 1,8 kg
Order-No. 2091.G
154,– €
transportation bag bipod, Cordura orange
Order-No. 2094
39,50 €
strut tripod, 3-legged, aluminium, red, 2,4 kg
Order-No. 2093.R
210,– €
strut tripod, 3-legged, aluminium, yellow, 2,4 kg
Order-No. 2093.G
210,– €
transportation bag bipod, Cordura orange
Order-No. 2094
Tripod (Seco)
•
•
•
•
Upper push button clamp
Adjustable area of the legs: 1,05 – 1,80 m
Inserting the poles from above
Can be used for poles with Ø 25 – 38 mm
42,– €
Ranging pole tripod
Standard model, tribrach, with clamp on the ball-and-socket joint, height approx. 95 cm, legs PVC coated,
luminous paint, weight approx. 1,5 kg or 2,8 kg.
ranging pole tripod FS 45
Order-No. 2090
19,– €
ranging pole tripod FSG 45
Order-No. 2090.G
28,– €
Adjusting-basis for prism poles
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Ideal for periodic monitoring or adjustment of the circular level prism poles.
Sturdy construction made of black powder-coated aluminum.
For mounting on walls.
Perpendicular orientation of the contact surfaces via knurled screws.
Onetime, simple adjustment using plumb line or spirit level.
Secure contact pressure of the prism pole to the adjustment-basis by quality rubber holders with
handle straps.
For prism poles from 0,80 m length up and Ø 25-50 mm.
Incl. mounting material.
Dimensions: 50 x 50 x 850 mm, Weight 1,5 kg.
adjusting-basis JB
Order-No. 2260
2014/7.1
2014/XX.X
145,- €
Page 5 (of 7)
S u r v e y i n g
E q u i p m e n t .
67
Telescopic and Range Poles made of GFK
GFK Telescopic Pole
For use as prism pole, extension or for measuring with DISTO, two-part pole, Ø 23/27 mm, without
graduation. Made of fibre glass (GFK) with yellow protective coating, light construction.
Stable clamp, simple to handle.
Available in 3 lengths: (please specify when ordering)
L1 = 0,5 m, extendible till 0,75 m
L2 = 0,9 m, extendible till 1,5 m
Order-No. 255.1-278.1
Order-No. 255.2-278.2
54,- €
56,50 €
top
bottom
male thread
5/8’’
female thread
5/8’’
Leica vertical bolt
40 mm
male thread 1/4’’
for DISTO
Order-No.
Order-No.
Order-No.
Order-No.
female thread 5/8’’
Leica connection for
vertical bolt 27 mm
Leica connection for
vertical bolt 40 mm
point (V2A)
not possible to unscrew
255
260
256
261
257
262
258
263
265
266
267
268
270
271
272
273
275
276
277
278
GFK Range Pole
Stable range pole made of fibre glass (GFK) for use with prisms and holders with standard connections
(5/8", Leica) or with DISTO (1/4"). As extension, it has a 5/8" female thread on the bottom (point
optional) or as prism pole and for DISTO surveying with range pole norm point.
Length = 1,5 m, Ø 26 mm.
top
bottom
female thread 5/8’’
norm point
male thread
5/8’’
female thread
5/8’’
Leica vertical bolt
40 mm
for DISTO
Order-No.
Order-No.
Order-No.
Order-No.
280
285
49,- €
49,- €
281
286
49,- €
49,- €
282
287
49,- €
49,- €
283
288
49,- €
49,- €
Point
Made of aluminium /V2A with 5/8" male thread for poles with a 5/8" female thread (see above):
• GFK – telescopic range (Order-No. 260-263)
• GFK – range pole (Order-No. 280-283)
• Length (without thread): 50 mm
point 5/8’’
Order-No. 264
2014/7.1
2014/XX.X
23,- €
Page 6 (of 7)
S u r v e y i n g
E q u i p m e n t .
68
Adjustable circular level in holder
• for mounting on all prism- / GNSS-antenna poles with Ø 32 mm (1 1/4“)
• easy screwing/height adjusting of the level holder with an Allen wrench (5 mm)
• adjusting of the level with 2,5 mm Allen wrench
• glas level in aluminium casing
• accuracy of the level 30’
circular level holder for GFK telescopic pole
Order-No. 279
49,50 €
circular level holder for GFK ranging pole
Order-No. 289
49,50 €
Simple circular level with velcro closure
• for mounting on all poles with Ø 35 mm with velcro closure
• plastic level with accuracy 50’
• shipped already adjusted (not adjustable)
• Weight: 25 g
circular level with velcro closure
2014/XX.X
2014/7.1
Order-No. 5425
20,- €
Page 7 (of 7)
S u r v e y i n g
E q u i p m e n t .
69
Telescopic pole 4,50 m
Sturdy 4-piece telescopic pole made of fiberglass / carbon fiber
blended fabric
- without scaling •
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Length: 1,50 to 4,50 m
Weight: 2,4 kg
Pipe-Ø outside: 44, 38, 32 and 26 mm
5/8“ thread or Leica vertical bolt
state of the art composite material with high bending stiffness
easy handling even in cold weather
Orange-Red outer fabric layer for better visibility in traffic, on construction site, etc.
removable tip (length: 0,10 m) made of aluminum with replaceable stainless steel tip and large
horizontal drilling as input on-, and unscrewing help
• Centric clamps made of high quality plastic and smooth eccentric levers
• High quality adjustable circular level on the outer tube (Ø 44 mm), accuracy: 30 '
telescopic pole, 4-piece, 1,50-4,50 m, 5/8“ female thread
Order-No. 5545.I
430,- €
telescopic pole, 4-piece, 1,50-4,50 m, 5/8“ male thread
Order-No. 5545.A
430,- €
telescopic pole, 4-piece, 1,50-4,50 m, Leica vertical bolt Ø 12 x 40mm Order-No. 5545.L
430,- €
Telescopic extension for poles
with Ø 32 mm (1¼")
ø32 mm
2-piece telescopic pole for extension below prisms and GPS poles. Suitable for all poles with a
diameter of 32 mm and unscrewable top with 5/8 "thread.
For measurements with prism poles an extension of the prism pole is often required due to local obstructions between total station and prism.
Also, in GNSS measurements. If it is not possible to measure with a standard height, due to shadowing
or vegetation, the increase of the antenna above the ground is necessary.
The extension was inserted between the bar and Prism (or GNSS antenna) ever since. Due to the small
diameter of the pole, the possibility of extension, however, is severely limited. In addition, the stability
and the handling is inadequate.
With the new 2-part telescopic extension, the extension is done on the existing 32 mm pole to bottom.
After removing the tip, the pole is threaded onto a connecting element of telescopic extension (5/8"
thread). In most cases the 32 mm pole can then inserted up to the circular bubble in the telescopic
extension or be extended by up to 2.40 m (see picture). Therefore antenna heights up to 4,50 m are possible depenging on the length of the pole which is used.
Features / Technical Details:
• see above: telescopic pole No. 5545 (pipe-Ø outter: 44 and 38 mm)
• Weight: 1,7 kg.
• Length: 1,40-2,40 m
telescopic pole extension for ø 32 mm, 2-pieces, 1,40-2,40 m Order-No. 5540
2014/XX.X
2014/7.2
310,- €
Page 1 (of 1)
S u r v e y i n g
E q u i p m e n t .
70
Height determination of prisma/reflector/GNSSantenna on multi-part telescopic poles with
the laser distance meter
Conventional multipart prism poles with scaling are not without risk. They run the risk of an erroneous
reading of the extended height, especially in case of permanent changes to the individual telescopic
extensions. Thus, the respective upper extension must be pulled up to the stop so that the scale displays
the correct height. At the same time, you have to ensure that, the lower extensions are fully retracted if
necessary. A high quality and tolerance-free as possible processing is also requirement for
accurate results.
When measuring with a laser distance meter (LSM) in conjunction with our tiltable holder KiLas® and our
target plate HMZ, these sources of error are eliminated completely. Ideally, a LSM with an adjustable offset should be used.
Before the measurement, the following one-time determination is carried out:
• Mounting of the KiLas® with laser distance meter at a certain height TU at the lowest extension. To
check against a possible offset and for repeated measurements the zero point (center of rotation) is
marked permanently (with a felt pin etc.).
• Screwing on of the target plate HMZ at the uppermost extension directly under the prism or the GNSSantenna. At the pole, the height of the bottom target plate surface is also marked permanently.
• Determination of the distance TO from the lower plate surface to the center of the prism.
Setting of the (positive) offset on the laser distance meter:
Offset = TU + TO
Subsequently, the height of the prism, or the GNSS-antenna can be reliably determined.
The various extension can be extended and retracted as wished – if the offset it set permanentely, the
laser distance meter measures the correct height on every measurement!
KiLas® for laser distance meters (s. catalogue 2014/11.1-11.9)
Target plate HMZ
When using a single prism, the long side of the HMZ should be screwed on towards the prisms front
side. Thus, the prism can be reliably aligned with the total station, even for very large target heights
• Size: 150 x 100 mm
• Available in beige and white
• Clamp for screwing onto poles of different diameters
for poles with
color of the plate
Order-No.
white
5548. W1
55,- €
beige
5548. B1
55,- €
white
5548.W3
62,- €
beige
5548.B3
62,- €
ø 18 to 32 mm
ø 30 to 45 mm
Application note:
The measuring arrangement described is ideal for those multi-part telescopic poles without scaling
offered by us (s. catalogue 2014/7.2 p. 1).
However, existing telescopic poles can be retrofitted with this system. Moreover, if a laser distance meter
with adjustable offset already exists, target and antenna heights can be reliably determined, at
moderate cost.
In addition, the Kilas with laser distance meter can be used also for measuring distances or other object
points (s. catalogue 2014/11.1-11.9).
2014/7.3
2014/XX.X
Page 1 (of 1)
S u r v e y i n g
E q u i p m e n t .
71
GNSS antenna pole
5/8"
Leica
ø 12 x 40
High quality pole with tube diameter 32 mm, consisting of composite CFK/GFK.
The unsurpassed material properties are light weight, high stiffness and longevity. The good visibility of
the orange-red color, also increases road safety.
Special pole „Frame“
Modular combined pole, consisting of tip, one-meter pole section, computer-holder "Frame" and pole-top,
all screwed together with 5/8 "threads.
Features:
• Detachable tip (length 0.10 m) made of aluminum and replaceable stainless steel tip. Large horizontal
hole as on- and unscrewing assistance.
• Adjustable circular level made of glass in aluminium casing, accuracy: 30'
• Combination of high- and meter sections is done with standardized 5/8 "thread.
Connecting the GNSS antenna or adapter: Optional with 5/8 " male thread or Leica Stud St12 x 40
Weight: 2200 g
The additional computer-holder „Frame“ allows the use of heavy machines on the GNSS pole.
•
•
•
•
•
•
High-quality frame made of torsionally rigid aluminum profiles and lightweight CFK/GFK-pipes.
Central M8 thread in the frame, for mounting of computer holder or ball joint.
Protected position of the computer in the frame.
Good view of both the computer display and the circular level.
Secure installation of the pole to the ground point.
Comfortable carrying of the pole together with computer.
for Tablet-PC:
GNSS antenna pole „Frame“, 4 pieces, 2,10 m,
5/8“ male thread on top, frame height 0,36 m
Order-No. 5480
390,- €
Leica Stud Bolt ø 12 x 40 mm on top, frame height 0,36 m
Order-No. 5480.L
405,- €
5/8“ male thread on top, frame height 0,50 m
Order-No. 5482
400,- €
Leica Stud Bolt ø 12 x 40 mm on top, frame height 0,50 m
Order-No. 5482.L
415,- €
for Laptop:
5/8"
Note:
The total length of the pole can be adjusted by a corresponding pole top part of your requirements.
Request, if necessary!
M8
5/8"
The computer-holder „Frame“ is also available seperately and thus can be optionally used with existing
5/8 "poles.
Thread: Bottom 5/8“i, Top: 5/8“a,
for Tablet-PC:
Dimensions W x H: Inner: 340 x 300 mm, outer: 400 x 360 mm; weight: 1230 g
computer-holder „Frame“, 5/8“, height 0,36 m
Order-No. Nr. 5485
225,- €
for Laptop:
Dimensions W x H: Inner: 340 x 440 mm, outer: 400 x 500 mm; weight: 1300 g
computer-holder „Frame“, 5/8“, height 0,50 m
2014/7.4
2014/XX.X
Order-No. Nr. 5487
235,- €
Page 1 (of 2)
S u r v e y i n g
E q u i p m e n t .
72
Accessories
Ball joint
To screw onto the center M8 thread in the computer frame.
With the ball head, the computer holder can be rotated and tilted as desired. Keyboard and display can
be positioned perfectly in seconds, in terms of ergonomics and sunlight. Therefore the star grip handle of
the ball head clamping screw can be turned in any direction for easy handling.
Features:
• simple and secure clamping of the chosen position.
• thread: top M8 male thread and bottom M8 female thread.
recommended for Tablet-PC up to 2,5 kg:
ball joint, M8, holding power up to 15 kg (weight: 140 g)
Order-No. 5081
48,- €
recommended for Tablet-PC up to 2,5 kg and Laptops starting at 2,0 kg:
ball joint, M8, holding power up to 35 kg (weight: 250 g)
Order-No. 5082
65,- €
Second level
With todays tachymeters measurements points can be determined with an accuracy of a few mm. Even
modern GNSS devices bring theoretical results in the cm range. In order to achieve this in practice with a
2 m long prism or antenna pole, a good circular bubble is first requirement for perpendicular positioning.
Here, a very high accuracy cut isn't necessarily that important.
For one thing, the leveling is a lengthy process (especially in unilateral sunlight) and for another, the
level has to be continuously adjusted exactly.
An actually necessary continuous surveying during the measurement on the field however, is very complex and therefore will be omitted in most cases.
So a circular level which is fixed to the pole will not be sufficient, if the adjustment is not sufficiently
tested. To increase the reliability of the measurement, we therefore recommend the use of a second level
for high accuracy requirements.
It is screwed onto the pole independently of the first level. After a careful adjustment of both levels the
safety of the correct vertical level of the rod is then very high, when both levels are centered simultaneously.
Basically the two levels are checking each other mutually. Only when the levels do no longer correspond,
one must necessarily take an adjustment.
• suitable for poles with ø 32 mm (1/4")
• is screwed onto the antenna pole and then adjusted
• solid aluminum construction
circular level holder with glass level, accuracy 30'
2014/7.4
2014/XX.X
Order-No. 3008.30
46,- €
Page 2 (of 2)
S u r v e y i n g
E q u i p m e n t .
73
Compass with velcro closure
Simple compass for GPS- and prism poles for a rough indication of the direction in terrain.
An universal velcro closure allows a quick and secure mounting on all poles with a Ø 15 up to 45 mm.
weight: 20 g, compass-Ø: 20 mm
compass with velcro closure
Order-No. 5470
15,- €
Compass in holder
Simple compass for rough indication of direction in terrain
• For mounting on all prism- / GNSS antenna poles with Ø 32 mm (1 1/4“)
• Simple screwing / height adjustment of the level holder with allen key (5 mm)
holder with compass, for poles with 32 mm diameter
Order-No. 3008.K
36,- €
For other poles with diameters of 20 to 32 mm are delivered with a reducing sleeve, made of plastic.
It ensures a snug fit of the compass holder and spares the pole surface.
- Please specify exact diameter of the pole holder with compass an reducing sleeve
2014/7.5
2014/XX.X
Order-No. 3008.KR
39,50 €
Page 1 (of 1)
S u r v e y i n g
E q u i p m e n t .
74
Boom (eccentric) for sewer measuring pole
and prism poles
The position and height determination of the shaft points are usually done with a sewer measuring pole.
With our system Vektor (s. catalogue 2014/9.1 to 9.5) the pole is at an angle in the shaft, the two prisms
of the base are measured to, then the software calculates the coordinates of the pole tip after entering
the extension measure.
With the help of the measuring strap VB1 tube diameters of supply, exhaust and intakes can be determined in addition.
drain opening
If the position of the shaft is already known, it may be necessary to determine and to control the heights
of points in the shaft. For this purpose the use of the described 2-prism-method is not essential.
Height determination of shaft points with boom
With our boom vertical standing bars/slats, points in the shaft in terms of height (not positionally) can be
determined.
Thus, for example one can measure all points of a shaft DN 1000 (see sketch) with a once adjusted
extension length of about 45 cm.
In this case the height itself can be determined in different ways (also depending on the accuracy
requirement):
drain (income)
• Reading of the cutting-off level on the top of the lid opening (lid height must be known).
See Vector system with integrated measuring tape (s. catalogue 2014/9.3 and s. catalogue 2014/9.5).
• Measurement of a pole/bar prism mounted on the pole with the tachymeter (entering the pole length
as a reflector height)
• Determining with a pole attached to the GNSS antenna (with consideration of the pole length)
runoff
shaft main point (center)
Suitable for use on all poles with a 5/8“ tip to unscrew:
• Poles at the bottom 5/8“ female thread and tips with 5/8“ male thread, e.g.
- System Vektor, Tip SG 0.1, Length = 100 mm (s. catalogue 2014/9.1 to 9.5)
- GFK ranging pole, tip length = 50 mm (s. catalog 2014/7.1 page 6)
• Poles at the bottom 5/8“ male thread ands tips with 5/8“ female thread,
e.g. tips of a lot of prism poles, length = 86 mm
Design and features:
•
•
•
•
Suitable for use on all poles with a 5/8" tip to unscrew.
stable profile made of anodized aluminum
Telescopic 0,38 m to 0,60 m, continuously adjustable
M8 stainless steel mal thread centered above the tip for screwing on
the optional tip on the top (s. next page)
• Weight: 850 g
boom (eccentric) for sewer measuring pole, 5/8"
Order-No. 2058
139,- €
2014/XX.X
2014/7.6
S u r v e y i n g
E q u i p m e n t .
75
Determination of pipe diameters
Another feature is the determination of pipe diameters (nominal sizes). Beginning at 15 cm.
This requires an upwardly facing second tip, which is available as an option.
Top tip
• stainless steel Allen, for mounting with key SW14
• M8 female thread to screw onto the boom
Depending on what minimum diameter intakes are to be determined, the appropriate length of the
upper peak must be chosen so that a rounded distance between the two peaks yields.
minimal diameter =
distance AS of the
two tips
height
boom
length of the tip below
length of
the tip on
the top
100 mm
150 mm
Order-No.
30 mm
50 mm (GFK-Stab)
20 mm
2059.20
18,- €
30 mm
86 mm (Prism pole)
34 mm
2059.34
18,- €
150 mm
30 mm
100 mm (System Vektor)
20 mm
2059.20
18,- €
200 mm
30 mm
86 mm (Prism pole)
84 mm
2059.84
22,- €
200 mm
30 mm
70 mm
2059.70
22,- €
With vertically positioned pole (s. sketch)
Determination of the heights of the points PSohle and PScheitel
Possible measurement methods:
1. Reading of the two parting-off-dimensions of point PSohle and PScheitel each to the top of the lid-opening
using an bar scaling, attached to the pole.
See Vector system with integrated measuring tape (s. Catalogue 2014/9.3 and s. Catalogue 2014/9.5).
D = parting-off-dimension PSohle - parting-off-dimension PScheitel + distance AS
2. Determination of the height (Z-coordinates) of point PSohle and PScheitel with the tachymeter with the help
of a prism mounted to the pole.
3. Determination of the height (Z-coordinates) of point PSohle and PScheitel with the help of a GPS antenna
mounted to the pole.
1. and 3. -> Pleas note:
The measurement PScheitel compared to the measurement PSohle has to be
done with a reduced pole length / reflector height by the distance of AS.
The calculation of the pipe diameter D is then as follows:
D = height PScheitel - height PSohle
With tilted standing pole
The measurement methods 2 and 3 can not be applied with a tilted standing pole.
A measurement of the pipe diameter D on site is still possible!
This requires as in our system vector when using the measurement boom a "slider".
Sketch and description of the method s. Catalogue 2014/9.1 p.4
2014/XX.X
2014/7.6
Page 2 (of 2)
S u r v e y i n g
E q u i p m e n t .
76
Prism pole for eccentric measurement of
building corners
pic 1
With this newly developed pole a modern, variable tool for tachymetric surveying of building points using
lateral offset is available.
pic 2
•
•
•
•
•
basic measure of the lateral offset: 0,20 m (pic 1).
simple extension to 0,40 m or 0,50 m by screwing a GRP / CFRP pole (pic 2).
Target collimator for exact orthogonal orientation of the pole to the tachymeter.
The prism can be rotated on the L-holder independently of the target collimator to its vertical axis.
Use of regular prisms and reflectors.
Lateral prism pole
Consisiting of: L-prism-holder, tagert collimator, Leica vertical bolt 40 mm, stainless steel tip, 5/8“ male
thread to screw on extensions.
When using prisms with Leica connection and original tilting axis height, no other adapter is required.
0,20 m
prism pole, lateral offset 0,20 m, Leica vertical bolt
Order-No. 5800
135,- €
Adapter
For prisms/reflectors with a thread an adapter required. For tilting axis height of 50 mm and 60 mm the
following adapters for 5/8 "threads are available as standard:
Pro-Leica-Adapter
for prisms/reflectors with 5/8 "female thread and 50 or 60 mm tilting axis height, with push button for
one-handed operation:
Adapter Pro Leica – 5/8“, for prisms with H = 50 mm
Order-No. 690
45,50 €
Adapter Pro Leica – 5/8“, for prisms with H = 60 mm
Order-No. 695
45,50 €
Simple Adapter
for prisms/reflectors with 5/8 "female thread and 50 mm tilting axis height,
with horizontal locking screw:
Simple Adapter Leica – 5/8“, for prisms with H = 50 mm
Order-No. 302.27
26,50 €
Note: Also other reflectors/prisms with other thread connections up to a tilting axis height of 70 mm can
be used. For this purpose, the length of the adapter or of the vertical bolt must be adjusted. Please ask!
Extensions
GRP-/CFRP pole for extending the lateral offset to 0.40 m and 0.50 m, stainless steel tip,
5/8" female thread for screwing on the stainless steel tip of the 0.20 m-prism pole
L
0,40 m
0,50 m
extension to 0,40 m for lateral pole, 5/8“, L=292 mm
Order-No. 5814
45,- €
extension to 0,50 m for lateral pole, 5/8“, L=392 mm
Order-No. 5815
50,- €
Circular Level
Optional: circular level to screw on for use as a mini-range pole with 0.20 or 0.40 m
(or 0.50 m) prisms-/reflector height, including mounting screws
circular level, adjustable glass level, 25'
2014/8.1
2014/XX.X
Order-No. 1850
34,- €
Page 1 (of 1)
S u r v e y i n g
E q u i p m e n t .
77
Exzentrumsmessungen mit Rundumbzw. 360°-Prismen
Handelsüblichen Rundum- bzw. 360°- Prismen ermöglichen die automatische Zielverfolgung des
Tachymeters und somit die Aufmessung von Bodenpunkten im Einmann-Messbetrieb. An die Grenzen stößt
das System bei der Bestimmung von nicht zentrisch aufmessbaren Punkten wie z.B. Gebäudeecken. Sie
können nur über ein Längs- oder Querexzentrum koordiniert werden.
Beim seitlichen Anhalten an ein Hauseck wird der rechte Winkel im Exzentrum oft geschätzt, was aufgrund
der relativ großen Bauform der Prismen schnell zu größeren Ungenauigkeiten führen kann. Ist zudem
der Feldrechner am Prismenstab befestigt, ergibt sich das Problem, dass bei lotrechtem Prismenstab ein
direktes Anhalten an das Gebäudeeck gar nicht möglich ist.
Auch die Bestimmung von Innenecken mit einem Rundum-Prisma über ein Längsexzentrum ist im
Einmann-Betrieb zeitraubend und mühselig.
Mess- und Visiereinrichtung für Quer- und Längsexzentren (MVE)
Die MVE wird je nach Bauweise unter dem Prisma in den Stab eingeschraubt oder darüber aufgeschraubt
(s. Bilder). Die Visiereinrichtung, ein kippbarer Diopter, erlaubt die exakte Anzielung des Tachymeters.
Für die Messung von Querexzentren können wahlweise auf einer oder auf beiden Pagen Abstandsdorne
aufgeschraubt werden – bauartbedingt liegen sie rechtwinklig zur Visurrichtung. Für die Messung von
Längsexzentren kann ein Abstandsdorn in Verlängerung der Visurrichtung aufgeschraubt werden. Wird nur
ein Abstandsdorn verwendet, ist es egal ob er als Quer- oder Längsexzentrum eingesetzt wird, in allen
Fällen ergibt sich die gleiche (runde) Exzentrumsstrecke.
Aufbau und Ausstattung der Mess- und Visiereinrichtung:
• Aluminium-Halter mit 2 x 5/8“- Innengewinden. Bei Bedarf wird ein Innengewinde durch einen
Gewindestift zum Außengewinde
• Bauhöhe: 100 mm.
• Signalanstrich in oranger Farbe.
• Kippbare Visiereinrichtung mit justierbarem Diopter.
• 3 Außengewinde aus Edelstahl (M5) zum Aufschrauben der Abstandsdorne:
2 für Quer-, 1 für Längsexzentrum
Mess- und Visiereinrichtung MVE (ohne Abstandsdorne)
Order-No. 5820
133,- €
Abstandsdorne
Die Dorne sind in verschiedenen Längen erhältlich und so gebaut, dass sich ein rundes Maß von der
Spitze des Dorns bis zur Stehachse des Prismenstabs (= Exzentrumsstrecke) ergibt.
Bei Verwendung eines Längsexzentrums sollte genügend Platz zwischen Gebäudeeck und Prismenstab
zur Verfügung stehen um den Tachymeter anvisieren zu können. Erfahrungsgemäß sollte hier ein Dorn
mit einem Exzentrumsmaß von mindesten 300 mm verwendet werden.
Die Dorne bestehen aus eloxiertem Aluminium und haben ein M5-Innengewinde-Edelstahleinsatz.
Die Spitze des Dorns ist aus gehärtetem Edelstahl.
Exzentrumsmaß
100 mm
200 mm
300 mm
400 mm
500 mm
Order-No.
5820.100
28,50 €
5820.200
31,50 €
5820.300
34,50 €
5820.400
37,50
5820.500
41,50 €
Andere Längen auf Anfrage !
Page
drucken
Schritt
zurück vor
Exit
2014/XX.X
2014/8.2
Page 1 (of 2)
S u r v e y i n g
E q u i p m e n t .
78
Additional target sign to align the MVE from the tachymeter
When measuring with a 2-man operation, it is advantageous when the possibilty exists, to do or to
control the alignment of the MVE by the observer at the tachymeter. For this purpose an additional target
sign is attached to the bottom of the diopter tilting element. The observer adjusts the vertical line of the
crosshair on the prism pole center, and then instructs the survey assistant, to turn the prism pole until
the tip of the additional target sign is aligned correctly (s. pictures below).
additional target sign MVE
Order-No. 5821
49,- €
side view
view through
Tachymetertelescope:
aligned length eccentric
Page
drucken
Schritt
zurück vor
Exit
2014/XX.X
2014/8.2
Page 2 (of 2)
BOHNENSTINGL
BOHNENSTINGL
BOHNENSTINGL
BOHNENSTINGL
S u r v e y i n g
BOHNENSTINGL
E q u i p m e n t .
79
System Vektor
Universal prism pole Vektor (light – stable – accurate)
The prism pole for multiple use with excellent characteristics
inal
The orig bon!
f car
made o
Base
The core of the prism pole System Vektor is always the Base 1.1 with 2 prisms, which are synchronically
tiltable, in a distance of exactly 1 m.
The Base 1.1 is available in 2 formats:
1. Base 1.1Z and 1.1W
Prisms completely integrated in the carbon tube.
(also available as Base 2.1 with 3 prisms in a distance of 1 m each).
2. Base 1.1 HIP
modularly built with components of the prism series HIP
For both formats, the following prism constants K (Leica in brackets) are available:
-11,3 (+23,1) mm = Leica 360°-Prism
-16,5 (+17,9) mm
see catalogue 2014/1.1 p. 1
-30
(+4,4) mm
-34/35 (0)
mm
}
• use of very strong mini prisms (Ø 18 mm for K = -11 mm, all others Ø 25 mm).
• central symmetric point (visible center) for all prisms is in the tube axis.
This is a requirement for the maximum achievable accuracy of the angle and distance measurements.
• additional red target point in the center of the prism for exact positioning of the reticule.
• tilting of the prisms:
Base 1.1Z and 1.1W: synchronic tilting of the prism by linkages in the tube.
For constants K = -11 (+23,1) mm and K = -16 (+18,4) mm there is a lever at the rear side.
Base 1.1 HIP: synchronic tilting of the prisms for all prism constants by an exterior linkage made of
carbon fibre.
The base 1.1 HIP is available also with reflecting target as inexpensive alternative to glass prisms.
Prism constant K = 0 mm (= -34,4 mm in the Leica system)
Extensions
Material and components correspond to the actual standards of technology:
Tube construction (outside Ø 44 mm, inside Ø 40 mm) made of extremely light and strong carbon or of a
blend of carbon fibre / glass fibre)
Advantages compared to aluminium:
• carbon fibre is lighter by approx. 40%. Blend 10-20%.
• much higher pliability.
• can not be deformed permanently, 100% re-set to the original shape even after extreme use.
• expansion coefficient (temperature) is 100 times smaller.
• no corrosion.
• comfortable handling also in cold temperatures.
Further advantages:
• all extensions are waterproof.
• the coating is made of signal red colour.
• prism case and linkages are made of very solid anodised aluminium
• thread and thread inserts are made of stainless steel.
• standardised connection of the extensions with 5/8" threads.
The prism pole can be used for multiple purposes due to its compact method of construction, e.g. as
• standard prism pole (s. catalogue 2014/9.1 p. 2)
• prism pole to measure hidden points (s. catalogue 2014/9.1 p. 2)
• as sewer measuring rod to measure tube diameters (s. catalogue 2014/9.1 p. 4)
2014/9.1
2014/XX.X
Page 1 (of 4)
S u r v e y i n g
E q u i p m e n t .
80
System Vektor
Vektor as standard prism pole
For the standard prism pole with Base 1.1Z together with the point SG 0.1 and the mini prism pole MZ,
all connections are 5/8" threads.
Instead of the mini prism pole MZ, all other prism poles with 5/8" male thread and a defined graduation
can be used for the prism tilting axis height of 100 mm.
For the standard prism pole with Base 1.1W (W=WILD=Leica) the connection to the mini prism pole MW
is done with Leica vertical bolts (Ø 12x40 mm), all other connections are 5/8" threads. Instead of the
mini prism pole MW, all other prism poles with Leica vertical bolt (Ø 12x40 mm) and with a graduation
according to original Leica prisms, can be used.
By combining Base 1.1Z or 1.1W + mini prism pole, it is possible to smoothly measure points in face left
(position I) with a prism target height of 0,80 to 1,25 m (prism 1) and of 1,80 to 2,25 m (prism 2). The
target height can be read on the defined graduation of the prism pole (2 mm graduation). In face right
(position II), the target height is 0,2m for the 1. prism and 1,2m for the 2. prism.
The additional use of the pin SG 0.1 avoids the time consuming screwing of the pin of the mini prism
pole when changing from position I to position II.
In both positions, 2 adjustable circular levels on the mini prism pole MZ or MW with an accuracy of 25'
assure a plumbed position.
The mini prism pole is equipped with a very simple quick clamp.
This new clamp prevents the unintentional closing of the telescopic extension.
Because of the light construction of the System Vektor, a simple ranging pole tripod is sufficient.
(clamp opening > 45 mm!)
Vektor as prism pole to measure hidden points
Also the prism pole Vektor in combination Base 1.1Z or 1.1W + mini prism pole, is very suitable to
measure hidden points.
The co-ordinates X, Y, Z of the visible prisms 1 and 2 will be defined by the electronic total station/EDM.
The co-ordinates X, Y, Z of the hidden point P can be calculated with the length L (can be read at the
graduation of the mini prism pole).
For that purpose, the prism pole can be held in any inclination. Only the pin has to be on the point P
and the two prisms have to be aligned on the total station/EDM. It is understood that the position of the
prism pole should not be changed during measuring of prism 1 and 2.
This makes it necessary to use a tripod.
(see catalogue 2014/9.6 p. 1 "Universal tripod" and Ranging Pole "Tripod FS 45").
In this way, the prism pole Vektor can replace old tools for surveying hidden points as for example the
optical square or the cross staff.
Further possibilities for use are points that are difficult to access or where a prism cannot be put directly,
e.g.
• inside corners in rooms
• gable of a roof
In this way, the point can be measured in face left and face right (position I and position II), whereas
especially face right (position II) assures a very exact measurement due to the short length of L = 0,2 m.
Measuring of points difficult to access that are far away can be done by extensions which can be screwed
onto the opposite side of the prism pole.
2014/9.1
2014/XX.X
Page 2 (of 4)
NSTINGL
BOHNENSTINGL
BOHNENSTINGL
BOHNENSTINGL
S u r v e y i n g
E q u i p m e n t .
81
System Vektor
Vektor as sewer measuring rod
The structural principle is the same as for the surveying of hidden points. However, as for measuring
shaft ground points (channel bottom, etc.) the points are far away, the use of a regular prism pole as
extension is not sufficient.
Regular telescopic prism poles with multiple extensions show the following disadvantages:
• heavy weight
• length often insufficient
• unstable
• clamp between the single telescope parts not stable enough
• graduation not exact
• no way to define tube diameters
The extension V of the System Vektor does not show these disadvantages. Because of the outstanding
characteristics of the carbon fibre tube, it is possible to extend to more than 6 m without problems.
When using the Base 1.1Z, all connections are 5/8" threads – same as for Vektor as standard prism pole.
When using the Base 1.1W, the connection to the extension V0.8W is done by a Leica vertical bolt (Ø 12 x
40 mm). This is necessary when using the bow (see page 29); all other sections will also be screwed
with 5/8" threads.
The combination of Base 1.1 + extension V0.8 + pin SG 0.1 has a usable length of 1 m (= distance
between bottom prism and pole pin). It can be extended with the extensions V1 and V2 in steps
of 1m or 2m.
The System Vektor creates a new dimension in sewer measuring poles,
regarding handling and precision.
Examples:
Base 1.1Z + 4 m extension Carbon (V08Z, V2, V1, SG 0.1):
Weight approx. 2,8 kg
Base 1.1Z + 4 m extension in a blend of Carbon/GFK- (V08Z, V2, V1, SG 0.1):
0,1 m
Weight approx. 3,1 kg
SG 0.1
2014/XX.X
2014/9.1
Page 3 (of 4)
S u r v e y i n g
E q u i p m e n t .
82
System Vektor
Additional definition of tube diameters by the use of
the bow VB1
If the definition of the tube nominal diameter was possible from outside, mostly all channel diameters
could be registered without physically going down into the channel.
This problem can be resolved with the Bow VB1:
• can be screwed onto extension V0.8, V1 or V2 with a 5/8" thread
• extremely light and rigid because of carbon fibre construction and aluminium profile
• additional pins S0 to measure tube vertex.
"rider"
The definition of the inner diameter D for tubes with D > 0,2 m can be done in 2 ways:
1. local measuring of the tube diameter D:
(The Base 1.1 W will be equipped with a "rider", a 20cm case made of synthetic material, which can be
moved between the two prisms).
pin
a.) Mounting the measurement prism pole with the tip SG 0.1 on pipe invert.
---> reading of the vertical distance u from the rider bottom side up to reference position (road
surface) with a rule or steel band. To calculate easily, the "rider" should be rounded off
(e.g. 0,9 m).
b.) Touching of the tube vertex with the pin S0 of the measuring rod.
---> reading of the vertical distance 0 from the rider upper part up to the reference position (e.g.
1,3m).
c.) Tube diameter D = 0-u (e.g. D = 1,3 m – 0,9 m = 0,4 m).
tip
2. Determination with the tachymeter:
a.) Mounting the measurement prism pole with the tip SG 0.1 on pipe invert.
---> calculation of the coordinates X, Y, Z of point P by measurment of prism 1 and 2 and the entering of the extension dimension Lu (for example Lu = 2 m).
b.) Contacting of the measurement prism pole with tip So at the top of the pipe.
---> calculation of the coordinates X, Y, Z of point P
analogous point P
with the entering of the extension dimension of Lo = Lu-0,2 m (for example Lo = 1,8 m).
c.) Pipe diameter D = Z
-Z
Sohle
Scheitel
P(Scheitel)
Sohle
P(Sohle)
To be able to align the base with the synchronous tilting prisms independently of the measuring bracket
VB1 on the Tachymeter, only in combination with the base 1.1 W + V0.8 W (Leica vertical bolt) a useful
application of the measurement bracket is possible.
Between the extension V0.8 W and the measuring bracket VB1 any amount of extensions V1 and V2
(5/8"-Gewinde) can be screwed on.
2014/9.1
2014/XX.X
Page 4 (of 4)
S u r v e y i n g
E q u i p m e n t .
SG 0.1
83
System
overall view
Extensions
V 1.8 W
end pieces
SN 0.1
V2
VB 1
MW
V 0.8 W
V 0.8 Z
SG 0.1
V1
MZ
V 1.8 Z
5/8 "
Verl ngerung
Prismenstab
beliebiger
any prism
pole oroder
extension
Leica (WILD)
 12x40
5/8 "
any prism
pole oroder
extension
Verl ngerung
Prismenstab
beliebiger
Bases
Basis 1.1 W, HIP
Basis 1.1 W
Basis 1.1 Z
Basis 1.1 Z, HIP
Basis 2.1 Z
Basis 2.1 W
5/8 "
5/8 "
2014/9.2
2014/XX.X
Page 1 (of 1)
S u r v e y i n g
E q u i p m e n t .
84
Material and equipment
Bases and extensions of the system Vektor are made of different materials and available in
different formats
Materials:
Tubes made of compound material with 100% carbon fibre (Carbon, CFK):
• outside Ø: 44 mm, inner Ø40 mm
• very light
• high pliability
• can't be deformed permanently, 100% re-set to the original shape even after extreme use
• expansion coefficient is 100 times smaller than aluminium
• no corrosion
• comfortable handling also in cold temperatures
• the coating is made of signal red colour
• all extensions are water-proof
• thread and thread insert are made of stainless steel
• 100% Carbon is expensive material
Compound material made of a blend of carbon/glass fibre (CFK/GFK)
Characteristics same as of the tubes made of 100% carbon, however:
• slightly higher weight (s. table data: catalogue 2014/9.4 p.1 and 9.5 p. 1)
• orange-red outside colour instead gel coating
• lower material price
Features:
All extensions (V0.8Z, V0.8W, V1.8Z, V1.8W, V1 and V2) of the system Vektor are also available with
integrated measuring band.
The measuring band is 13 mm wide and attached to the exterior of the carbon fibre or blend fibre tube.
The graduation cannot be removed and shows the mm-graduation on both sides. For poles with maximum 5 m extension, the numbers are continuing cm-values in black, the decimetre numbers are in red
for a better visibility.
When the single extensions will be screwed together, the graduation build one continuous line (to get a
correct measurement, it is understood that the extensions have to be screwed together
in the correct order.)
With the integrated measuring band, there are further possibilities, e.g.:
• as stable, precise levelling rod upto 6m length and more
• for direct stake out of channel bottoms
2014/9.3
2014/XX.X
Page 1 (of 1)
S u r v e y i n g
E q u i p m e n t .
85
Individual parts of the System Vektor
With red-marked
prism center
Bases with prisms and tilting mechanisms integrated
completely in the tube
100% carbon fibre or a blend of carbon/glass fibre (carbon/GFK). Inserts made of aluminium, female
thread 5/8”i made of stainless steel.
The visible prism center for all prism constants is exactly in the tube axis.
5/8"i
o,1 m
5/8"i
description
(material)
prism constant (Leica in brackets)
K = -11,3 (+23,1) mm K = -16,5 (+17,9) mm K = -30 (+4,4) mm
weight
Base 1.1 W
Base 1.1 Z
5/8"i
Order-No.
2002.11
895,- €
3002.11
816,- €
2004.11
945,- €
3004.11
866,- €
weight
Order-No.
2002.16
895,- €
3002.16
816,- €
2004.16
945,- €
3004.16
866,- €
800 g
820 g
850 g
870 g
Leica
ø 12 x 40 mm
900 g
920 g
weight
850 g
870 g
900 g
920 g
Order-No.
2002.34
895,- €
3002.34
816,- €
2004.34
945,- €
3004.34
866,- €
consisting of holders of the series HIP, which are equipped either with glass prisms or with reflecting targets (s. catalogue 2014/2.1 p. 1-2).
2 holders built a precise and tough base together with a GFK insert, different adapters and a tilting bar.
This base can be disassebled with only a few steps, so the prism holders may be used for
other applications.
The synchronic tilting of the prisms or the reflecting targets is done by an exterior connection bar
(flexible, durable carbon fibre pole)
(4)
Base 1.1 W HIP
Base with 2 holders HIP with glass prisms
Base 1.1 Z HIP
870 g
Order-No.
2002.30
895,- €
3002.30
816,- €
2004.30
945,- €
3004.30
866,- €
Bases with modular design
(5)
(6)
weight
850 g
Bases with 3 prims (length 2 m) on request!
o,1 m
o,1 m
1,0 m
Base 1.1 Z
800 g
(Carbon)
Base 1.1 Z
820 g
(Carbon/GFK)
Base 1.1 W
850 g
(Carbon)
Base 1.1 W
870 g
(Carbon/GFK)
K = -34 /35 (0) mm
(s. catalogue 2014/2.1 p. 1-2)
In all designs, the visible prism centre goes exactly through the tube axis.
Weight of the base: 800 g
Structure:
(1) Adapter 5/8“i – 5/8“a (for 1.1 Z)
(2) Adapter Leica – 5/8“a (for 1.1 W)
(3) Prism HIP 2 x 5/8“
(4) GFK-insert 5/8"i – Leica St. 12 x 40 mm
(5) Prism HIP-U Leica
(6) Tilting bars
Prism constant (Leica in brackets)
describtion
K = -11,3 (+23,1) mm K = -16,5 (+17,9) mm
Order-No.
(3)
(2)
(1)
5/8"i
Leica
ø 12 x 40 mm
K = -30 (+4,4) mm
K = -34 /35 (0) mm
Order-No.
Order-No.
Order-No.
Basis 1.1 Z HIP
2006.11 591,- €
2006.16 591,- €
2006.30 591,- €
2006.34 591,- €
Basis 1.1 W HIP
2007.11 591,- €
2007.16 591,- €
2007.30 591,- €
2007.34 591,- €
Base with 2 holders HIP with reflecting targets
(s. catalogue 2014/2.1 p. 1-2)
The centre of the target on the reflecting target goes exactly through the tube axis. The prism constant is
K = 0 mm (= +34,4 mm in the Leica-System).
Structure:
(1) Adapter 5/8“i – 5/8“a (for 1.1 Z)
(2) Adapter Leica – 5/8“a (for 1.1 W)
(3) Prism HIP 2 x 5/8“
(4) GFK-insert 5/8"i – Leica St. 12 x 40 mm
(5) Prism HIP-U Leica
(6) Tilting bars
Base 1.1 Z HIP – Reflecting
Order-No. 2008
Base 1.1 W HIP – Reflecting
Order-No. 2009
2014/9.4
2014/XX.X
357,- €
357,- €
Page 1 (of 1)
S u r v e y i n g
E q u i p m e n t .
86
Separate parts of the System Vektor
Extensions:
Describtion
V1
V0.8 Z
V0.8 W
Made of 100% carbon fibre or a blend of carbon / fibre glass (Carbon/GFK).
Inserts of aluminium. Threads and Leica vertical bolts of V2A stainless steel.
V 0.8 Z
V1.8 W
V 1.8 Z
V2
V1.8 Z
V 0.8 W
V 1.8 W
V1
V2
Material
0,80 m
0,80 m
0,80 m
0,80 m
1,80 m
1,80 m
1,80 m
1,80 m
1,00 m
1,00 m
2,00 m
2,00 m
Weight
Carbon
Carbon/GFK
Carbon
Carbon/GFK
Carbon
Carbon/GFK
Carbon
Carbon/GFK
Carbon
Carbon/GFK
Carbon
Carbon/GFK
~ 450
~ 490
~ 500
~ 540
~ 810
~ 890
~ 860
~ 940
~ 500
~ 600
~ 940
~ 1020
g
g
g
g
g
g
g
g
g
g
g
g
Order-No.
Comments
2012
3012
2014
3014
2053
3053
2054
3054
2051
3051
2052
3052
for
for
for
for
for
for
for
for
224,- €
171,- €
224,- €
171,- €
346,- €
228,- €
346,- €
228,- €
243,- €
177,- €
368,- €
237,- €
base
base
base
base
base
base
base
base
1.1
1.1
1.1
1.1
1.1
1.1
1.1
1.1
Z
Z
W
W
Z
Z
W
W
Extensions, same as above, however with integrated measuring band
Describtion
V0.8
V1
V2
V 0.8 Z
V 0.8 W
V 1.8 Z
V 1.8 W
V1
V2
Material
0,80 m
0,80 m
0,80 m
0,80 m
1,80 m
1,80 m
1,80 m
1,80 m
1,00 m
1,00 m
2,00 m
2,00 m
Weight
Carbon
Carbon/GFK
Carbon
Carbon/GFK
Carbon
Carbon/GFK
Carbon
Carbon/GFK
Carbon
Carbon/GFK
Carbon
Carbon/GFK
~ 450
~ 490
~ 500
~ 540
~ 810
~ 890
~ 860
~ 940
~ 500
~ 600
~ 850
~ 1000
g
g
g
g
g
g
g
g
g
g
g
g
Order-No.
Comments
2014M 244,- €
3012M 191,- €
2014M 244,- €
3014M 191,- €
2053M 376,- €
3053M 258,- €
2054M 376,- €
3054M 258,- €
2051M 263,- €
3051M 197,- €
2052M 398,- €
3052M 267,- €
for
for
for
for
for
for
for
for
base
base
base
base
base
base
base
base
1.1
1.1
1.1
1.1
1.1
1.1
1.1
1.1
Z
Z
W
W
Z
Z
W
W
Please mention in which order the extensions will be screwed together during the measurement.
The graduation of the first extension after the pin SG/SN 0.1 therefore starts with 10cm and ends at 110
cm for a V1, and for a V2 with 210cm. All further extensions will be adapted accordingly. The last extension V0.8 or V1.8 which is always followed by a base, will be delivered without 100cm graduation. In
this way, the Vektor pole can be used in any length by inserting or removing the extensions V1/V2 under
the extension V0.8 or V1.8. The reading on the V0.8 or on the V1.8 has always to be done by adding the
meter number of the extension used last.
A later order to extend the system is therefore also possible.
2014/9.5
2014/XX.X
Page 1 (of 2)
S u r v e y i n g
E q u i p m e n t .
87
Individual parts of the System Vektor
Bow VB 1 for definition of tube diameters. Length: 1,00 m
Bow profile made of aluminium. Additional pin made of aluminium/stainless steel. The “rider” for the base
is included.
Bow VB 1 Carbon
~ 1100 g
Bow VB 1 Carbon/GFK
~ 1250 g
Order-No. 2055
415,- €
Order-No. 3055
353,- €
End points
The pin SG 0.1 is installed by standard.
Material: Aluminium with pin made of V2A stainless steel and 5/8” thread. Length: 0,10 m
Pin SG 0.1
~ 120 g
Order-No. 2050
41,- €
If the pole is used as a levelling rod, the pin SN 0.1 will be screwed on, as end point of the extension
instead the standard pin SG 0.1.
Material: Carbon/GFK with 5/8” thread made of stainless steel.
Integrated measuring band with a graduation going from 0 to 100 mm.
Levelling pin SN SN 0.1
~ 180 g
Order-No. 2045
51,- €
Telescopic extensions
Describtion
Length
Weight
Order-No.
Comments
Mini prism pole MZ
Mini prism pole MW
0,75 bis 1,25 m
0,75 bis 1,25 m
~ 1000 g
~ 1000 g
2022
2024
for base 1.1 Z
for base 1.1 W
176,- €
176,- €
Mini prism poles made of aluminium with telescopic extension.
With 2 circular levels (accuracy 25’) for use in position I and II.
2014/9.5
2014/XX.X
Page 2 (of 2)
S u r v e y i n g
E q u i p m e n t .
88
System Vektor Accessories
Levelling rod
Levelling rod with adjustable circular level and elastic, to attach levelling rod on every position of the
Vektor extensions (not suitable for highly precise plumbing of the Vektor pole)
Levelling rod FRG V
Order-No. 950
32,- €
Carrying pouch for the Vektor pole
For the transport and the storage of Vektor equipment; for poles up to 8m length.
Durable fabric with 4 separate pockets and adjustable carrying strap.
Dimensions: 2,20m x 0,40m
Carrying pouch TTV
Order-No. 2010
60,- €
Universal bipod with quick connection
Bipod for:
• prism poles
• GPS- antenna poles
• Sewer measuring rods (e.g. Vektor)
Advantages:
• clamp connection for all poles with a diameter from 20 to 50 mm.
• very quick clamping of the bipod to the pole.
• no awkward and time consuming "threading" of the pole
• telescopic legs and ball-joint head for easy plumbing also on difficult surface
• secure connection also for slanting poles, e.g. prism pole Vektor when used as a sewer measuring rod
• stable and light aluminium construction with red warning coating
Universal bipod, 2-legged
Order-No. 2095
195,- €
Mobile pole clamp for Bipods and Tripods
For use with bipods and tripods that have a slot for cylindrical poles
• cylindrical pin Ø 32 mm
• tiltable and rotatable ball head
• Transport position of the spring clip
• The clamping of the poles is the same as in the above universal bipod with profiled legs for poles from
Ø 32 to 50 mm
mobile pole clamp, with cylindrical pin Ø 32 mm
Order-No. 2095.Mv
95,- €
Ø 32 mm
2014/9.6
2014/XX.X
Page 1 (of 2)
S u r v e y i n g
E q u i p m e n t .
89
System Vektor Accessories
Circular level for the System Vektor
General comments:
With the plumbed use of the insert circular level, the universal prism pole Vektor has
additional applications:
• prism pole with large reflector heights
• Antenna pole with a high antenna height for GPS measurements.
To do this, it is not necessary to use the prism base but work only with the Vektor – extension. The
big advantages of the Vektor system – light, stable, accurate – are also valid for this application.
On request, it is possible to adapt an extension to the length of the type of your antenna, in order that
the antenna height provides always rounded m- values. Reading errors, as they occur with telescopic
extensions, can be avoided this way.
Structure:
The circular level is set in a stable aluminium casing and is adjustable. It can be put between every 5/8"
screwing connection of the system Vektor. Large surfaces assure the exact connection with the
Vektor pole.
Technical characteristics of the circular level:
• metal casing with a diameter of 22,5 mm
• ground glass with a grinding accuracy of 10'
This allows exact measurements also for high prism or antenna heights.
insert Circular Level EDL 10'
2014/9.6
2014/XX.X
Order-No. 2040.10
70,- €
Page 2 (of 2)
S u r v e y i n g
E q u i p m e n t .
90
Boom (eccentric) for sewer measuring pole
and prism poles
The position and height determination of the shaft points are usually done with a sewer measuring pole.
With our system Vektor (s. catalogue 2014/9.1 to 9.5) the pole is held at an angle in the shaft. The two
prisms of the base are measured to, then the software calculates the coordinates of the pole tip after
entering the extension length.
With the help of the measuring strap VB1 tube diameters of supply, exhaust and intakes can be determined in addition.
If the position of the shaft is already known, it may be necessary to determine and to controll the
heights of points in the shaft. For this purpose the use of the described 2-prism-method is not essential.
Height determination of shaft points with boom
With our boom ,with vertical standing bars/slats, points in the shaft can be determined in terms of height
(not positionally).
Thus, for example one can measure all points of a shaft DN 1000 (see sketch) with an once adjusted
extension length of about 45 cm.
In this case the height itself can be determined in different ways (also depending on the accuracy
requirement):
• Reading of the cutting-off level on the top of the lid opening (lid height must be known).
See Vector system with integrated measuring tape (s. catalogue 2014/9.3 and s. catalogue 2014/9.5).
• Measurement of a pole/bar prism mounted on the pole with the tachymeter (entering the pole length
as a reflector height)
• Determining with a pole attached to the GNSS antenna (with consideration of the pole length)
Suitable for use on all poles with a 5/8“ tip to unscrew
• Poles at the bottom 5/8“ female thread and tips with 5/8“ male thread, e.g.
- System Vektor, Tip SG 0.1, Length = 100 mm (s. catalogue 2014/9.1 to 9.5)
- GFK ranging pole, tip length = 50 mm (s. catalog 2014/7.1 page 6)
• Poles at the bottom 5/8“ male thread ands tips with 5/8“ female thread,
e.g. tips of a lot of prism poles, length = 86 mm
Design and features:
•
•
•
•
Suitable for use on all poles with a 5/8" tip to unscrew.
stable profile made of anodized aluminum
Telescopic 0,38 m to 0,60 m, continuously adjustable
M8 stainless steel male thread centered above the tip for screwing on
the optional tip on the top (s. next page)
• Weight: 850 g
boom (eccentric) for sewer measuring pole, 5/8"
Order-No. 2058
139,- €
2014/XX.X
2014/9.7
S u r v e y i n g
E q u i p m e n t .
91
Determination of pipe diameters
Another feature is the determination of pipe diameters (nominal sizes) beginning at 15 cm.
This requires an upwardly facing second tip, which is available as an option.
Top tip
• stainless steel Allen, for mounting with key SW14
• M8 female thread to screw onto the boom
Depending on what minimum diameter of intakes are to be determined, the appropriate length of the
upper peak must be chosen so that a rounded distance between the two peaks yields.
minimal diameter =
distance AS of the
two tips
height
boom
length of the bottom tip
length of
the tip on
the top
100 mm
150 mm
Order-No.
30 mm
50 mm (GFK-Stab)
20 mm
2059.20
18,- €
30 mm
86 mm (Prism pole)
34 mm
2059.34
18,- €
150 mm
30 mm
20 mm
2059.20
18,- €
200 mm
30 mm
86 mm (Prism pole)
84 mm
2059.84
22,- €
200 mm
30 mm
70 mm
2059.70
22,- €
With vertically positioned pole (s. sketch)
Determination of the heights of the points PSohle and PScheitel
Possible measurement methods:
1. Reading of the two measured dimensions of point PSohle and PScheitel each to the top of the lid opening,
using a scaling which is attached to the pole.
See Vector system with integrated measuring tape (s. Catalogue 2014/9.3 and s. Catalogue 2014/9.5).
D = measured-dimension PSohle - measured-dimension PScheitel + distance AS
2. Determination of the height (Z-coordinates) of point PSohle and PScheitel with the tachymeter with the help
of a prism mounted to the pole.
3. Determination of the height (Z-coordinates) of point PSohle and PScheitel with the help of a GPS antenna
mounted to the pole.
1. and 3. -> Pleas note:
The measurement PScheitel compared to the measurement PSohle has to be
done with a reduced pole length / reflector height by the distance of AS.
The calculation of the pipe diameter D is then as follows:
D = height PScheitel - height PSohle
With tilted standing pole
The measurement methods 2 and 3 can not be applied with a tilted standing pole.
A measurement of the pipe diameter D on site is still possible!
With our system vector this requires a "slider" when using the measurement boom.
Sketch and description of the method s. Catalogue 2014/9.1 p.4
2014/XX.X
2014/9.7
Page 2 (of 2)
S u r v e y i n g
E q u i p m e n t .
92
Mini-Vector for tachymetric precision
measurements
m
0
10
m
V
The principle of the determination of concealed points (computational extension of a base, of which the
two prisms will be measured by a total station X, Y and Z) has since been mainly applied for receiving
sewer shafts (see our system Vektor catalogue p. 2014/9.1-9.6).
In this case, the base usually has a length of 1 m and the extensions often several meters.
Reducing the base length of the "two-prism method" it also can be used very well for all the points that
can't be measured exactly by a classical manner, neither electro-optically with a prism or reflector, or
directly by laser rangefinder.
With a base of 100 mm in length and as short as possible extensions with our new Mini-Vector high centering accuracy at the object point can be achieved.
(Examples below)
In general, the existing programs can be used for calculation of concealed points
Design and Specification
Mini-Vector
•
•
•
•
•
•
60 mm
40 mm
The Mini-Vector is available in 2 versions, which differ only in the type of connection for the extension:
M6 internal thread or Leica Stud connection.
Prism constant: K = -11,3 mm (Leica = +23,1 mm)
Basis length (Prism distance): 100 mm
Central Symmetrical Point (= visible prism center) is precisely in the axis of the mini-vector
Waterproof and shockproof
Sturdy construction made of anodized aluminum
5/8“ female thread on top, to screw on further accessorie-parts (e.g. circular level, see below)
Mini-Vector, M6 female thread
Order-No. 5900
374,- €
Mini-Vector, Leica Stud Bolt Connection
Order-No. 5910
394,- €
Extensions with centering tips
Both extensions have a hardened centering tip.
In the M6 extension, the center point is integrated in an aluminum ring, which has as a screw-assistance
a knurling and a horizontal hole. The default extension is V = 40 mm. Larger extensions are available on
request.
M6-extension, V = 40 mm
Order-No. 5901
28,50 €
The extension with Leica stud bolt is inserted into the mini-vector and locked with a spring-lock. Due to
the length of the stud the shortest possible extension length is V = 60 mm. Larger extensions are
available on request.
Leica-extension, V = 60 mm
Order-No. 5911
28,50 €
Circular level
Optionally, the Mini-vector can be held with a screwed on circular level perpendicular to the target point.
There are then two prisms with different target heights for the sighting available. The anodized aluminum
levels have a 5/8 "external thread for screwing onto the Mini-vector
(see also catalogue page 2014/2.5 p.1).
Page
drucken
Schritt
zurück vor
circular level central, glass level, accuracy 30’
Order-No. 1585.30
25,50 €
adjustable circular level, glass level, accuracy 30’
Order-No. 1587.30
40,50 €
Exit
2014/10.1
2014/XX.X
Page 1 (of 3)
S u r v e y i n g
E q u i p m e n t .
93
Joint-Tripod
With the joiont tripod mthe ini-vector can be positioned in any desired position and fixed for the measurement. This is done by tightening a central screw which clamps all moving parts of the joint-tripod.
Depending on the application, the tripod joint is threaded onto different tripod bases (see below).
•
•
•
•
Hydraulic clamping
Joint-arms made of anodized aluminum
Reach of action: 270 mm
Weight: 350 g
Joint-tripod (not an actual tripod)
Order-No. 5920
175,- €
Tripod basis
Depending on the application, the joint stand can be screwed on a M8 thread on different stands:
Steel ring
For the common positioning of the joint-tripod: The ring is placed on the ground in the objects area and
the tip of the mini-vector centered on the to determined point using the central clamp attached at the
joint-tripod. Hereby the object point can be located within the operating range of the joint-tripod (see
picture examples).
•
•
•
•
galvanized steel ring with M8 internal thread to screw in the tripod joint
3 rubber pads for stability of the ring
Diameter: 155 mm
Weight: 750 g
steel ring for joint-tripod
Order-No. 5932
35,- €
Magnetic stand
To use the Mini-vector in steel constructions and engineering: The magnetic base is mounted so the to
determined point is within the range of the joint-tripod. Due to the arbitrary position of the mini-vector it
is also suitable for those points that could not be detected with methods used since, or only with inadequate safety / accuracy.
•
•
•
•
On/Off - Switch
Holding force: 600 N
M8 female thread to screw in the tripod joint
Weight: 970 g
magnet stand for joint-tripod
Order-No. 5930
35,- €
Clamp
For the universal mounting of the joint-tripod of spatial objects up to a span of 250 mm: If the clamp is
screwed within the radius of action of the joint-tripod, any object point can be measured with the Minivector.
•
•
•
•
•
•
Clamp in magnesium die-casting, clamping mechanism of high-quality glass fiber reinforced plastic
Force build-up to 1200 N, easy with 2 fingers
easy to dose, for gentle clamping
secure tighten, loosen quickly
Several M8 female threads to screw in the tripod joint
Weight: 425 g
clamp for tripod-joint
Page
drucken
Schritt
zurück vor
Exit
2014/10.1
2014/XX.X
Order-No. 5934
Page 2 (of 3)
60,- €
S u r v e y i n g
E q u i p m e n t .
94
Suction Holder
To use the Mini-vector on all surfaces with gas-tight surface such as glass, plastic, metal, coated wood
and marble.
•
•
•
•
•
Material casing: Aluminium
Suction plate: Ø 120 mm
Carrying capacity of a suction holder: 15 kg
M8 female thread to screw in the tripod joint
The suction is done by switching the lever. The suction holder must be pressed with relaxed rubber
washer firmly onto the surface. When pressing the switch the resistance produced by the vacuum must
be felt clearly.
• Weight: 320 g
suction holder for joint-tripod, without vacuum display
Order-No. 5936
46,- €
Also available with vacuum display.
The vacuum is continuously checked. If the warning-rocker sunk in the rocker arm (see picture 1), the
required holding force was reached and the holder is loadable. If the rocker departs and the red edge is
visible, the vacuum is loosing force. If the edge is clearly visible (see Figure 2), the Suction Holder must
be removed from the ground and sucked again.
pic 1
pic 2
• Weight: 340 g
suction holder for joint-tripod, with vacuum display
2014/10.1
2014/XX.X
Order-No. 5938
76,- €
Page 3 (of 3)
S u r v e y i n g
E q u i p m e n t .
95
Anwendungsbeispiele für Laserstreckenmesser
mit Halterung NiLas / KiLas®
Traufhöhen mit Stab
Prismen- und Antennenhöhen mit Spezial-Zieltafel
Leuchtenhöhen mit Stab
Gebäudehöhen mit Stab
Gebäudeecken
mit Prismenstab +
Winkelspiegel
oder Bogenschlagmethode
Gebäudeecken
mit Kreuzscheibe
+ Prisma
Gebäudeecken mit GNSS
(Bogenschlagmethode)
Leuchten + Verkehrszeichen mit GNSS
(Bogenschlagmethode)
Innenvermessung mit Fotostativ
Verwendungsmöglichkeiten von NiLas / KiLas mit:
GNSS-Stab
Prismenstab
Instrumentenstativ
Teleskopstab
Fluchtstab
2014/11.1
2014/XX.X
Fotostativ
Nivellierlatte Kreuzscheibe
Page 1 (of 4)
S u r v e y i n g
E q u i p m e n t .
96
Produktreihe NiLas / KiLas® für
Laserstreckenmesser (LSM)
Zur millimetergenauen Bestimmung der Strecken vom Bodenpunkt zum Objektpunkt bzw. vom Zentrum
zum Exzentrum.
1
Die hohe Messgenauigkeit eines LSM wird durch Messung aus der Hand oft zunichte gemacht. Für geodätische Anwendungen lässt sich durch die Verwendung der Halterungen NiLas und KiLas® die Strecke von
einem Bodenpunkt zu einem Objektpunkt millimetergenau bestimmen. Ein Messgehilfe ist hierbei in vielen Fällen entbehrlich. Gefahrensituationen wie etwa bei der Messung mit dem Messband über eine stark
befahrene Straße werden minimiert.
Hervorragend eignen sich die NiLas - und KiLas®-Halterungen zur Aufnahme exzentrisch liegender
Objektpunkte bei GNSS-Messungen (Bild 1) und bei der Polaraufnahme mit dem Tachymeter (Bild 2).
2
4
3
Der LSM wird auf der Halterung NiLas bzw. KiLas® durch einfaches Drehen eines Klemmhebels (Bild 3)
blitzschnell sicher fixiert. Das Eindrehen einer Schraube in das rückseitige Fotogewinde entfällt, so dass
der LSM praktisch ohne Zeitverlust sofort wieder für Messungen aus der Hand zur Verfügung steht.
Mittels einer Klemmschraube (Bild 4) kann die Halterung an zylindrische Stäbe aller Art (Prismen-, Flucht-,
GNSS-Stäbe usw.) angebracht werden.
LSM
LSM
Alle Halterungen sind mit Klemmschrauben für unterschiedliche Durchmesser erhältlich:
Größe 1: Stäbe Ø 18 – 32 mm
Größe 2: Stäbe Ø 32 mm
5
Die Größe 2 wird zur Schonung des Rohrmaterials empfohlen, wenn der NiLas/KiLas ausschließlich an
Stäben mit Ø 32 mm verwendet wird (Bild 5).
Der Bezug zwischen Klemmschraube (Stabachse) und Anfangspunkt der Streckenmessung ist konstruktionsbedingt klar definiert. Es entstehen keine Fehler wie bei der Messung auf einem Fotostativ.
Durch die seitliche Anbringung am Stab kann die Bedienung und Ablesung sowohl bei tief als auch hoch
angebrachtem LSM erfolgen.
Je nach Messaufgabe ist beim Kauf eines LSM auf die gewünschte Ausstattung und Funktionalität zu
achten. Zur praxisgerechten Umsetzung der Messmöglichkeiten sind verschiedene Modelle NiLas / KiLas®
erhältlich:
Die Reihe NiLas
Zur Messung von Horizontalstrecken
NiLas-: Der Laserstrahl verläuft rechtwinklig zur Stabachse, also horizontal. Eine Kippung der Halterung ist
nicht möglich. Zur Anzielung des Objektpunkts kann eine Höhenanpassung über Verschieben des NiLas
am Stab erfolgen oder ggf. über den Teleskopauszug des GNSS- oder Prismenstabs.
LSM
NiLas+: Funktionsweise wie beim NiLas-. Mit Hilfe einer zusätzlichen Stellschraube kann eine am LDM
eingebaute Dosenlibelle eingespielt werden (s. Bild 6)
6
2014/11.1
2014/XX.X
Page 2 (of 4)
S u r v e y i n g
E q u i p m e n t .
97
Die Reihe KiLas®
Zur Bestimmung von Schräg- und Horizontalstrecken und Höhendifferenzen
Die Halterungen KiLas® bieten gegenüber dem NiLas ein erweitertes Anwendungsspektrum. Während
beim NiLas ausschließlich Horizontalstrecken gemessen werden können, erlaubt der komfortable
Kippmechanismus des KiLas® das sichere Ausrichten des Laserstrahls auf jeden sichtbaren, auch höhenmäßig versetzten, Objektpunkt. Die Achse der Kippvorrichtung verläuft durch die Laserstrahlachse,
wodurch keine Fehler entstehen, wie etwa bei der Verwendung auf einem Fotostativ. Der Anfangspunkt
der Streckenmessung ist klar definiert und „wandert“ nicht in Abhängigkeit des Kippwinkels.
Fehlerkorrigierende Spezialvorrichtungen sind somit nicht nötig.
Mit einem Drehhebel lässt sich der Kippwiderstandes komfortabel einstellen (Bild 7)
7
Der KiLas kann um volle 360° gedreht werden. Dadurch sind auch Messungen in Lage II möglich. Der
Laserstrahl verläuft immer durch die Drehachse.
KiLas-®: Die in höherwertigen LSM vorhandenen Funktionen (z.B. Minimum/Maximum-Tracking, Breitenund Höhenbestimmungen, Pythagorasfunktion usw.) lassen sich optimal anwenden. Ein Neigungsmesser
ist nicht vorhanden.
8
KiLas+®: Ein zusätzlicher Neigungsmesser (Bild 8) bietet die Möglichkeit gemessene Schrägstrecken in
Horizontalstrecken und Höhendifferenzen umzurechnen. Der Neigungsmesser besitzt allerdings keine
Schnittstelle. Die Kippfähigkeit zusammen mit der Berechnungsmöglichkeit von Horizontaldistanz und
Höhendifferenz erlauben die Aufnahme von exzentrisch liegenden Objektpunkten bei der GNSS-Messung,
selbst bei schwierigen Topographie- und Vegetationsverhältnissen (s. nebenstehenden Literaturhinweis)
KiLas®: Zur optimierten Verwendung von LSM mit integriertem Neigungssensor (z.B. Leica A3, A8, D5, D8).
Für deren einwandfreie Funktion ist die Halterung so konstruiert, dass das Bedienfeld/Display nach oben
zeigt (Bild 9).
9
2014/11.1
2014/XX.X
Page 3 (of 4)
S u r v e y i n g
E q u i p m e n t .
98
Produktreihe NiLas / KiLas®
Serie LC für Laserstreckenmesser (LSM)
Bei der neuentwickelten, kostengünstigen Serie LC wird der Laserstreckenmesser (LSM) nicht mit einem
Klemmhebel, sondern durch ein hochwertiges Gummiband befestigt. Dieses wird unterhalb des Displays
über das LSM-Gehäuse geführt und in einem Längsschlitz sicher arretiert (Bild 10 + 11).
Ein zeitaufwändiges Einschrauben einer Anzugsschraube in das rückseitige Fotogewinde ist somit auch
bei der Serie LC nicht notwendig. Das Gewinde dient lediglich zur präzisen Fixierung des LSM auf der
Halterung (s. Bild 12). Wenn dieses bei einfachen Geräten fehlt, erfolgt die passgenaue Lagerung auf der
Halterung mittels der Gehäusekanten.
Der Vorteil, praktisch ohne Zeitverlust zwischen Freihand-Messung und NiLas/KiLas-Messung wechseln zu
können, bleibt auch mit den Modellen der Serie LC erhalten.
10
11
12
Abhängig von Ausstattung und Funktionsvielfalt der LSM sind auch die Halterungen der Serie LC in mehreren Ausführungen erhältlich: NiLas- LC, NiLas+ LC, KiLas®-LC, KiLas® + LC und für LSM mit integriertem
Neigungssensor der KiLas LC.
Bei den Modellen KiLas® kann über eine gut bedienbare Anzugsschraube der Kippwiderstand eingestellt
werden.
Alle Halterungen sind mit Klemmschrauben für unterschiedliche Durchmesser erhältlich:
5
Größe 2: Stäbe Ø 32 mm
Die Größe 2 wird zur Schonung des Rohrmaterials empfohlen, wenn der NiLas/KiLas ausschließlich an
Stäben mit Ø 32 mm verwendet wird (Bild 5).
13
14
Alternativ zur Klemmschrauben für unterschiedliche Stabdurchmesser ist die Halterung KiLas® LC auch mit
einer Klettverschlussbefestigung mit integrierter Dosenlibelle erhältlich. Diese lässt sich an einer Vielzahl
von Stäben und Latten verschiedener Durchmesser und Querschnitte verwenden:
Größe 2: Stäbe Ø 35 – 55 mm und andere Querschnitte, z.B. Nivellierlatten.
15
Die Dosenlibelle erlaubt das exakte Lotrechtstellen, ohne dass der Stab (Bild 13), die Latte (Bild 14) oder
das Fotostativ (Bild 15) mit einer solchen ausgestattet sein muss.
2014/11.1
2014/XX.X
Page 4 (of 4)
S u r v e y i n g
E q u i p m e n t .
99
KiLas® für Laserstreckenmesser
Bosch DLE 50 PRO
zum Exzentrum.
(siehe hierzu unsere Systembeschreibung NiLas / KiLas®, Catalogue 2014/11.1)
Der Laserstreckenmesser (LSM) Bosch DLE 50 PRO ist für viele vermessungstechnische Anwendungen
geeignet, z.B. zur Bestimmung der horizontalen Strecke vom Zentrum zum Exzentrum bei der GNSSMessung.
Um auch seine integrierte Pythagorasfunktion praxisgerecht anwenden zu können, ist die Kippfähigkeit
der Halterung notwendig.
KiLas-® LC
Mit der Halterung KiLas-® LC lassen sich Schräg- und Horizontalstrecken bestimmen und mit Hilfe der im
Bosch DLE 50 PRO integrierten Pythagorasfunktion auch Höhendifferenzen. Dabei erlaubt der komfortable Kippmechanismus des KiLas-® LC das sichere Ausrichten des Laserstrahls auf jeden sichtbaren, auch
höhenmäßig versetzten, Objektpunkt. Die Achse der Kippvorrichtung verläuft durch die Laserstrahlachse,
Der LSM Bosch DLE 50 PRO wird nicht wie bei der klassischen KiLas-Bauweise mit einem Klemmhebel,
sondern durch ein hochwertiges Gummiband befestigt. Dieses wird unterhalb des Displays über das DLMGehäuse geführt und in einem Längsschlitz sicher arretiert (Bild). Ein zeitaufwändiges Einschrauben einer
Anzugsschraube in das rückseitige Fotogewinde ist somit auch bei der Serie LC nicht notwendig. Das
Gewinde dient lediglich zur präzisen Positionierung des LSM auf der Halterung (s. Bild)
So kann auch beim KiLas-® LC praktisch ohne Zeitverlust zwischen Freihand-Messung und KiLas®-Messung
gewechselt werden.
Da der DLE 50 PRO keine im Gehäuse eingebaute Röhrenlibelle besitzt, können mit der an der Halterung
KiLas-® LC angeschraubten Röhrenlibelle horizontale Zielungen ausgeführt werden (Bild).
Mittels einer Klemmschraube kann die Halterung an zylindrische Stäbe aller Art (Prismen-, Flucht-, GNSSStäbe usw.) angebracht werden. Bei ausschließlicher Verwendung an Stäben mit ø 32 mm wird zur
Schonung des Rohrmaterials (Bild) die Verwendung der Order-No. 2510.F empfohlen.
KiLas®- LC für Bosch DLE 50 PRO, für Stäbe ø 18 – 32 mm
Order-No. 2510
KiLas®- LC für Bosch DLE 50 PRO, für Stäbe ø 32 mm
Order-No. 2510.F
KiLas®- LC für Bosch DLE 50 PRO, für Stäbe ø 30 – 45 mm
Order-No. 2510.G 102,– E
95,– E
102,– E
Alternativ zur Klemmschrauben für unterschiedliche Stabdurchmesser ist die Halterung KiLas- LC auch mit
von Stäben und Latten verschiedener Durchmesser und Querschnitte verwenden.
Die Dosenlibelle erlaubt das exakte Lotrechtstellen, ohne dass der Stab (Bild), die Latte (Bild) oder das
Fotostativ (Bild) mit einer solchen ausgestattet sein muss.
KiLas®- LC für Bosch DLE 50 PRO, für Stäbe bis ø 35 mm
Order-No. 2710
KiLas®- LC für Bosch DLE 50 PRO, für Stäbe ø 35 – 50 mm und Latten Order-No. 2710.G
2014/11.2
2014/XX.X
95,- €
95,- €
Page 1 (of 1)
S u r v e y i n g
E q u i p m e n t .
100
NiLas für Geo Fennel Eco Dist Plus
zum Exzentrum.
Der Laserstreckenmesser (LSM) Geo Fennel Eco Dist Plus ist ein preiswertes Einsteigermodell. Er hat keine
eingebauten Programme, für die eine Kippung der Halterung notwendig wäre (z.B. Pythagorasfunktion).
Für viele vermessungstechnische Anwendung, wie etwa die Bestimmung der horizontalen Strecke vom
Zentrum zum Exzentrum bei der GNSS-Messung, ist er dennoch sehr gut geeignet.
NiLas- LC
Der Laserstrahl verläuft rechtwinklig zur Stabachse, also horizontal. Eine Kippung der Halterung ist nicht
möglich. Zur Anzielung des Objektpunkts kann eine Höhenanpassung entweder über Verschieben des
NiLas- LC am Stab erfolgen oder ggf. über den Teleskopauszug des GNSS- oder Prismenstabs.
Der LDM wird nicht wie bei der klassischen NiLas-Bauweise mit einem Klemmhebel, sondern durch ein
hochwertiges Gummiband befestigt. Dieses wird unterhalb des Displays über das LDM-Gehäuse geführt
und in einem Längsschlitz sicher arretiert (Bild) Die passgenaue Lagerung auf der Halterung erfolgt sehr
präzise mittels der Gehäusekanten.
Auch beim NiLas- LC kann praktisch ohne Zeitverlust zwischen Freihand-Messung und NiLas-Messung
gewechselt werden.
Schonung des Rohrmaterials die Verwendung der Order-No. 2430.F empfohlen (Bild).
NiLas- LC für Geo Fennel Eco Dist Plus, für Stäbe ø 18 – 32 mm
Order-No. 2430
79,- €
NiLas- LC für Geo Fennel Eco Dist Plus, für Stäbe ø 32 mm
Order-No. 2430.F
86,- €
NiLas- LC für Geo Fennel Eco Dist Plus, für Stäbe ø 30 – 45 mm
Order-No. 2430.G
86,- €
Alternativ zur Klemmschrauben für unterschiedliche Stabdurchmesser ist die Halterung auch mit einer
Klettverschlussbefestigung mit integrierter Dosenlibelle erhältlich. Diese lässt sich an einer Vielzahl von
Stäben und Latten verschiedener Durchmesser und Querschnitte verwenden.
NiLas- LC für Geo Fennel Eco Dist Plus, für Stäbe bis ø 35 mm
Order-No. 2630
NiLas- LC Geo Fennel Eco Dist Plus, für Stäbe 35 bis ø 50 mm u. Latten Order-No. 2630.G
2014/11.3
2014/XX.X
79,- €
79,- €
Page 1 (of 1)
S u r v e y i n g
E q u i p m e n t .
101
NiLas für Leica DISTO A2
zum Exzentrum.
Der Laserstreckenmesser (LSM) Leica DISTO A2 ist ein preiswertes Einsteigermodell. Er hat keine eingebauten Programme, für die eine Kippung der Halterung notwendig wäre (z.B. Pythagorasfunktion).
Für viele vermessungstechnische Anwendung, wie etwa die Bestimmung der horizontalen Strecke vom
Zentrum zum Exzentrum bei der GNSS-Messung, ist er dennoch sehr gut geeignet.
NiLas- LC
Der Laserstrahl verläuft rechtwinklig zur Stabachse, also horizontal. Eine Kippung der Halterung ist nicht
möglich. Zur Anzielung des Objektpunkts kann eine Höhenanpassung entweder über Verschieben des
NiLas- LC am Stab erfolgen oder ggf. über den Teleskopauszug des GNSS- oder Prismenstabs.
Der DISTO wird nicht wie bei der klassischen NiLas-Bauweise mit einem Klemmhebel, sondern durch ein
hochwertiges Gummiband befestigt. Dieses wird unterhalb des Displays über das DISTO-Gehäuse geführt
und in einem Längsschlitz sicher arretiert (Bild) Die passgenaue Lagerung auf der Halterung erfolgt sehr
präzise mittels der Gehäusekanten.
So kann auch beim NiLas- LC praktisch ohne Zeitverlust zwischen Freihand-Messung und NiLasLC-Messung gewechselt werden.
Schonung des Rohrmaterials die Verwendung der Order-No. 2400.A2F empfohlen (Bild).
NiLas- für DISTO A2, für Stäbe ø 18 – 32 mm
Order-No. 2400.A2
79,- €
NiLas- für DISTO A2, für Stäbe ø 32 mm
Order-No. 2400.A2F
86,- €
NiLas- für DISTO A2, für Stäbe ø 30 – 45 mm
Order-No. 2400.A2G 86,- €
Alternativ zur Klemmschrauben für unterschiedliche Stabdurchmesser ist die Halterung NiLas- LC auch mit
NiLas- LC für DISTO A2, für Stäbe bis ø 35 mm
Order-No. 2600.A2
NiLas- LC für DISTO A2, für Stäbe ø 35 - 50 mm und Latten
Order-No. 2600.A2G 79,- €
2014/11.4
2014/XX.X
79,- €
Page 1 (of 1)
S u r v e y i n g
E q u i p m e n t .
102
KiLas® für Leica DISTO D3
zum Exzentrum.
Der Laserstreckenmesser (LSM) Leica DISTO D3 bietet durch seine sehr gute Ausstattung und umfangreiche interne Funktionen viele Möglichkeiten in der Vermessung. Mit den nachfolgend beschriebenen
Halterungen eignen er sich hervorragend zur Aufnahme exzentrisch liegender Objektpunkte bei GNSSMessungen (Bild) und bei der Polaraufnahme mit dem Tachymeter.
KiLas® (klassische Bauweise)
Der DISTO wird auf der Halterung KiLas® durch einfaches Drehen eines Klemmhebels (Bild) blitzschnell
sicher fixiert. Das Eindrehen einer Schraube in das rückseitige Fotogewinde entfällt, so dass der DISTO
praktisch ohne Zeitverlust sofort wieder für Messungen aus der Hand zur Verfügung steht.
Der Kippmechanismus des KiLas® erlaubt das sichere Ausrichten des Laserstrahls auf jeden sichtbaren, auch höhenmäßig versetzten, Objektpunkt. Die einwandfreie Funktion des im D3 integrierten
Neigungssensors wird durch das nach oben zeigende Bedienfeld/Display gewährleistet.
Der Kippwiderstand kann durch den Drehhebel nach Bedarf eingestellt werden.
Mittels einer Klemmschraube kann die Halterung an zylindrische Stäbe aller Art (Prismen-, Flucht-, GNSSStäbe, Mittelsäule Fotostativ, usw.) angebracht werden. Bei ausschließlicher Verwendung an Stäben mit
ø 32 mm wird zur Schonung des Rohrmaterials (Bild) die Verwendung der Order-No. 2380.D3F empfohlen.
KiLas® für DISTO D3, für Stäbe ø 18 – 32 mm
Order-No. 2380.D3
130,- €
KiLas® für DISTO D3, für Stäbe ø 32 mm
Order-No. 2380.D3F
137,- €
KiLas® für DISTO D3, für Stäbe ø 30 – 45 mm
Order-No. 2380.D3G
137,- €
Da Winkelmessungen mit dem D3 nur bis ± 45° möglich sind, besitzt der KiLas® eine zusätzliche
Röhrenlibelle für exakte lotrechte Messungen zum Nadir (-90°) und zum Zenit(+90°).
2014/XX.X
2014/11.5
Page 1 (of 2)
S u r v e y i n g
E q u i p m e n t .
103
KiLas® LC für Leica DISTO D3
Bei der neuentwickelten, kostengünstigen Serie LC wird der Laserstreckenmesser (LSM) nicht über einen
Klemmhebel befestigt, sondern durch ein hochwertiges Gummiband. Dieses wird unterhalb des Displays
über das DISTO-Gehäuse geführt und in einem Längsschlitz sicher arretiert (Bild). Ein zeitaufwändiges
Einschrauben einer Anzugsschraube in das rückseitige Fotogewinde ist somit auch bei der Serie LC nicht
notwendig. Das Gewinde dient lediglich zur präzisen Positionierung des LSM auf der Halterung
Der Vorteil, praktisch ohne Zeitverlust zwischen Freihand-Messung und KiLas®-Messung wechseln zu
können, bleibt erhalten.
Der Kippmechanismus des KiLas® LC erlaubt das sichere Ausrichten des Laserstrahls auf jeden
Objektpunkt. Über die gut bedienbare Anzugsschraube kann der Kippwiderstand eingestellt werden.
Die Klemmschrauben-Befestigung an zylindrischen Stäben entspricht der klassischen KiLas®-Bauweise.
Bei ausschließlicher Verwendung an Stäben mit ø 32 mm wird zur Schonung des Rohrmaterials die
Verwendung der Order-No. 2500.D3F empfohlen (Bild).
KiLas® LC für DISTO D3, für Stäbe ø 18 – 32 mm
Order-No. 2500.D3
95,- €
KiLas® LC für DISTO D3, für Stäbe ø 32 mm
Order-No. 2500.D3F
102,- €
KiLas® LC für DISTO D3, für Stäbe ø 30 – 45 mm
Order-No. 2500.D3G
102,- €
KiLas® LC für DISTO D3 für Stäbe bis ø 35 mm
Order-No. 2700.D3
KiLas® LC für DISTO D3, für Stäbe bis ø 50 mm und Latten
Order-No. 2700.D3G
95,- €
102,- €
Da Winkelmessungen mit dem D3 nur bis ± 45° möglich sind, besitzen beide Ausführungen des KiLas® LC
eine zusätzliche Röhrenlibelle für exakte lotrechte Messungen zum Nadir (-90°) und zum Zenit(+90°).
2014/11.5
2014/XX.X
Page 2 (of 2)
S u r v e y i n g
E q u i p m e n t .
104
NiLas / KiLas® für Leica
DISTO A5 und A6
zum Exzentrum.
Die Laserstreckenmesser (LSM) Leica DISTO A5 und A6 bieten durch ihre umfangreichen internen
Funktionen viele Möglichkeiten in der Vermessung. Mit den nachfolgend beschriebenen Halterungen eignen sie sich hervorragend zur Aufnahme exzentrisch liegender Objektpunkte bei GNSS-Messungen (Bild)
und bei der Polaraufnahme mit dem Tachymeter. DISTO A5 und A6 haben dieselbe Gehäuseabmessungen;
sie unterscheiden sich nur durch ihre Farbgebung und Ausstattung.
NiLas / KiLas® (klassische Bauweise)
NiLas-: Der Laserstrahl verläuft rechtwinklig zur Stabachse, also horizontal. Eine Kippung der Halterung
ist nicht möglich. Zur Anzielung des Objektpunkts kann eine Höhenanpassung entweder über Verschieben
des NiLas- am Stab erfolgen oder ggf. über den Teleskopauszug des GNSS- oder Prismenstabs.
Der DISTO wird auf der Halterung durch einfaches Drehen eines Klemmhebels blitzschnell sicher fixiert
(s. Bild).
NiLas- für DISTO A5/A6, für Stäbe ø 18 – 32 mm
Order-No. 2369.A5
95,- €
NiLas- für DISTO A5/A6, für Stäbe ø 32 mm
Order-No. 2369.A5F
102,- €
NiLas- für DISTO A5/A6, für Stäbe ø 30 – 45 mm
Order-No. 2369.A5G
102,- €
NiLas+: Funktionsweise wie beim NiLas-. Mit Hilfe einer zusätzlichen Stellschraube kann die am LSM
eingebaute Dosenlibelle eingespielt werden (Bild).
Verwendung der Order-No. 2370.A5F empfohlen (Bild).
NiLas+ für DISTO A5/A6, für Stäbe ø 18 – 32 mm
Order-No. 2370.A5
105,- €
NiLas+ für DISTO A5/A6, für Stäbe ø 32 mm
Order-No. 2370.A5F
112,- €
NiLas+ für DISTO A5/A6, für Stäbe ø 30 – 45 mm
Order-No. 2370.A5G
112,- €
KiLas®-: Der Kippmechanismus des KiLas-® erlaubt das sichere Ausrichten des Laserstrahls auf jeden
sichtbaren, auch höhenmäßig versetzten, Objektpunkt. Der Kippwiderstand kann durch einen Drehhebel
nach Bedarf eingestellt werden.
Die internen Funktionen (z.B. Pythagorasmessung, Minimum/Maximum-Tracking, Breiten- und
Höhenbestimmungen) lassen sich optimal anwenden. Ein Neigungsmesser ist nicht vorhanden.
KiLas®- für DISTO A5/A6, für Stäbe ø 18 – 32 mm
Order-No. 2380.A5
130,- €
KiLas®- für DISTO A5/A6, für Stäbe ø 32 mm
Order-No. 2380.A5F
137,- €
KiLas®- für DISTO A5/A6, für Stäbe ø 30 – 45 mm
Order-No. 2380.A5G
137,- €
2014/11.6
2014/XX.X
Page 1 (of 3)
S u r v e y i n g
E q u i p m e n t .
105
KiLas®+: Ein zusätzlicher Neigungsmesser bietet die Möglichkeit gemessene
Schrägstrecken in Horizontalstrecken und Höhendifferenzen umzurechnen (s. Bild).
Der Neigungsmesser besitzt allerdings keine Schnittstelle. Die Kippfähigkeit zusammen mit der
Berechnungsmöglichkeit von Horizontaldistanz und Höhendifferenz erlauben die Aufnahme von
exzentrisch liegenden Objektpunkten bei der GNSS-Messung, selbst bei schwierigen Topographieund Vegetationsverhältnissen.
Technische Daten des Neigungsmessers:
•
•
•
•
Messung des Höhenwinkels in (Alt)Grad in Lage I und II.
Anzeige in 0,1°-Schritten, Genauigkeit 0,3°. Wechsel der Ziffernstellung bei Messungen über 90°
Einfache Kalibrierungsmöglichkeit
Keine Schnittstelle
KiLas+ für DISTO A5/A6, für Stäbe ø 18 – 32 mm
Order-No. 2390.A5
250,- €
KiLas+ für DISTO A5/A6, für Stäbe ø 32 mm
Order-No. 2390.A5F
257,- €
KLiLas+ für DISTO A5/A6, für Stäbe ø 30 – 45 mm
Order-No. 2390.A5G
257,- €
KiLas® LC für DISTO A5 und A6.
Bei der neuentwickelten, kostengünstigen Serie LC wird der LSM nicht über einen Klemmhebel befestigt, sondern durch ein hochwertiges Gummiband. Dieses wird unterhalb des Displays über das DISTOGehäuse geführt und in einem Längsschlitz sicher arretiert (Bild). Ein zeitaufwändiges Einschrauben einer
Gewinde dient lediglich zur präzisen Positionierung des DISTO auf der Halterung.
Der Vorteil, praktisch ohne Zeitverlust zwischen Freihand-Messung und KiLas®-Messung wechseln zu können, bleibt erhalten.
KiLas®- LC:
Objektpunkt. Über die gut bedienbare Anzugsschraube kann der Kippwiderstand eingestellt werden.
Ein Neigungsmesser ist nicht vorhanden.
KiLas®- LC für DISTO A5/A6, für Stäbe ø 18 – 32 mm
Order-No. 2500.A5
95,- €
KiLas®- LC für DISTO A5/A6, für Stäbe ø 32 mm
Order-No. 2500.A5F
102,- €
KiLas®- LC für DISTO A5/A6, für Stäbe ø 30 – 45 mm
Order-No. 2500.A5G
102,- €
2014/11.6
2014/XX.X
Page 2 (of 3)
S u r v e y i n g
E q u i p m e n t .
106
KiLas®+ LC
Ein zusätzlicher Neigungsmesser bietet die Möglichkeit gemessene Schrägstrecken in Horizontalstrecken
und Höhendifferenzen umzurechnen. Der Neigungsmesser besitzt allerdings keine Schnittstelle. Die
Kippfähigkeit zusammen mit der Berechnungsmöglichkeit von Horizontaldistanz und Höhendifferenz erlauben die Aufnahme von exzentrisch liegenden Objektpunkten bei der GNSS-Messung, selbst bei schwierigen Topographie- und Vegetationsverhältnissen.
Technische Daten des Neigungsmessers Serie LC:
• Messung des Höhenwinkels in (Alt)Grad in Lage I und II
• Anzeige in 0,1°-Schritten, Genauigkeit ±0,1°. Wechsel der Ziffernstellung bei Messungen über 90°
• Kalibrierungsmöglichkeit über KiLas®+ LC –Halterung durch Messung in Lage I und II
• Arbeitsbereich: 0 bis 40 °C
• Vor Feuchtigkeit schützen
• Keine Schnittstelle
Schonung des Rohrmaterials die Verwendung der Order-No. 2501.A5F empfohlen.
KiLas®+ LC für DISTO A5/A6, für Stäbe ø 18 – 32 mm
Order-No. 2501.A5
KiLas®+ LC für DISTO A5/A6, für Stäbe ø 32 mm
Order-No. 2501.A5F 182,- €
KiLas®+ LC für DISTO A5/A6, für Stäbe ø 30 – 45 mm
Order-No. 2501.A5G 182,- €
2014/11.6
2014/XX.X
175,- €
Page 3 (of 3)
S u r v e y i n g
E q u i p m e n t .
107
KiLas® für Leica DISTO D5 und D8
zum Exzentrum.
Die Laserstreckenmesser (LSM) Leica DISTO D5 und D8 bieten durch ihre sehr gute Ausstattung und
umfangreiche interne Funktionen viele Möglichkeiten in der Vermessung.
Mit den nachfolgend beschriebenen Halterungen eignen sie sich hervorragend zur Aufnahme exzentrisch
liegender Objektpunkte bei GNSS-Messungen (Bild) und bei der Polaraufnahme mit dem Tachymeter
(Bild).
DISTO D5 und D6 haben dieselbe Gehäuseabmessungen; sie unterscheiden sich nur durch ihre
Farbgebung und Ausstattung.
Der DISTO wird auf der Halterung KiLas® durch einfaches Drehen eines Klemmhebels blitzschnell sicher
fixiert. Das Eindrehen einer Schraube in das rückseitige Fotogewinde entfällt, so dass der DISTO praktisch
ohne Zeitverlust sofort wieder für Messungen aus der Hand zur Verfügung steht.
Der Kippmechanismus des KiLas® erlaubt das sichere Ausrichten des Laserstrahls auf jeden sichtbaren,
auch höhenmäßig versetzten, Objektpunkt. Die einwandfreie Funktion des im D5 und D8 integrierten
ø 32 mm wird zur Schonung des Rohrmaterials die Verwendung der Order-No. 2380.D5F empfohlen (Bild).
KiLas® für DISTO D5/D8, für Stäbe ø 18 – 32 mm
Order-No. 2380.D5
130,- €
KiLas® für DISTO D5/D8, für Stäbe ø 32 mm
Order-No. 2380.D5F
137,- €
KiLas® für DISTO D5/D8, für Stäbe ø 30 – 45 mm
Order-No. 2380.D5G
137,- €
2014/11.7
2014/XX.X
Page 1 (of 2)
S u r v e y i n g
E q u i p m e n t .
108
KiLas® LC für Leica DISTO D5 und D8.
Bei der neuentwickelten, kostengünstigen Serie LC wird der Laserstreckenmesser (LSM) nicht über einen
Klemmhebel befestigt, sondern durch ein hochwertiges Gummiband. Dieses wird unterhalb des Displays
über das DISTO-Gehäuse geführt und in einem Längsschlitz sicher arretiert (Bild). Ein zeitaufwändiges
Einschrauben einer Anzugsschraube in das rückseitige Fotogewinde ist somit auch bei der Serie LC nicht
notwendig. Das Gewinde dient lediglich zur präzisen Positionierung des LSM auf der Halterung.
Der Vorteil, praktisch ohne Zeitverlust zwischen Freihand-Messung und KiLas®-Messung wechseln zu
können, bleibt erhalten.
Objektpunkt. Über die gut bedienbare Anzugsschraube kann der Kippwiderstand eingestellt werden (Bild).
Verwendung der Order-No. 2500.D5F empfohlen (Bild).
KiLas® LC für DISTO D5/D8, für Stäbe ø 18 – 32 mm
Order-No. 2500.D5
95,- €
KiLas® LC für DISTO D5/D8, für Stäbe ø 32 mm
Order-No. 2500.D5F
102,- €
KiLas® LC für DISTO D5/D8, für Stäbe ø 30 – 45 mm
Order-No. 2500.D5G
102,- €
KiLas® LC für DISTO D5/D8, für Stäbe bis ø 35 mm
Order-No. 2700.D5
KiLas® LC für DISTO D5/D8, für Stäbe bis ø 50 mm und Latten
Order-No. 2700.D5G
2014/11.7
2014/XX.X
95,- €
102,- €
Page 2 (of 2)
S u r v e y i n g
E q u i p m e n t .
109
KiLas® für Leica DISTO A8
zum Exzentrum.
Der Lasersteckenmesser (LSM) Leica DISTO A8 bietet durch seine gute Ausstattung und umfangreichen internen Funktionen viele Möglichkeiten in der Vermessung. Mit den nachfolgend beschriebenen
Halterungen eignen er sich hervorragend zur Aufnahme exzentrisch liegender Objektpunkte bei GNSSMessungen und bei der Polaraufnahme mit dem Tachymeter.
Der DISTO wird auf der Halterung KiLas® durch einfaches Drehen eines Klemmhebels (Bild) blitzschnell
sicher fixiert. Das Eindrehen einer Schraube in das rückseitige Fotogewinde entfällt, so dass der DISTO
praktisch ohne Zeitverlust sofort wieder für Messungen aus der Hand zur Verfügung steht.
Der Kippmechanismus des KiLas® erlaubt das sichere Ausrichten des Laserstrahls auf jeden sichtbaren,
auch höhenmäßig versetzten, Objektpunkt. Die einwandfreie Funktion des im DISTO A8 integrierten
ø 32 mm wird zur Schonung des Rohrmaterials die Verwendung der Order-No. 2380.D5F empfohlen (Bild).
KiLas® für DISTO A8, für Stäbe ø 18 – 32 mm
Order-No. 2380.A8
130,- €
KiLas® für DISTO A8, für Stäbe ø 32 mm
Order-No. 2380.A8F
137,- €
KiLas® für DISTO A8, für Stäbe ø 30 – 45 mm
Order-No. 2380.A8G
137,- €
2014/11.8
2014/XX.X
Page 1 (of 1)
S u r v e y i n g
E q u i p m e n t .
110
KiLas® für Laserstreckenmesser
Nedo Laser mEssfix
zum Exzentrum.
Der Laserstreckenmesser (LSM) Nedo Laser mEssfix ist für viele vermessungstechnische Anwendungen
geeignet, z.B. zur Bestimmung der horizontalen Strecke vom Zentrum zum Exzentrum bei der GNSSMessung.
Um auch seine integrierte Pythagorasfunktion praxisgerecht anwenden zu können, ist die Kippfähigkeit
der Halterung notwendig.
KiLas-® LC
Mit der Halterung KiLas-® LC lassen sich Schräg- und Horizontalstrecken bestimmen und mit Hilfe der im
Nedo Laser mEssfix integrierten Pythagorasfunktion auch Höhendifferenzen. Dabei erlaubt der komfortable Kippmechanismus des KiLas-® LC das sichere Ausrichten des Laserstrahls auf jeden sichtbaren, auch
höhenmäßig versetzten, Objektpunkt. Die Achse der Kippvorrichtung verläuft durch die Laserstrahlachse,
Der LSM Nedo Laser mEssfix wird nicht wie bei der klassischen KiLas-Bauweise mit einem Klemmhebel,
sondern durch ein hochwertiges Gummiband befestigt. Dieses wird unterhalb des Displays über das DLMGehäuse geführt und in einem Längsschlitz sicher arretiert (Bild). Ein zeitaufwändiges Einschrauben einer
Gewinde dient lediglich zur präzisen Positionierung des LSM auf der Halterung.
So kann auch beim KiLas-® LC praktisch ohne Zeitverlust zwischen Freihand-Messung und KiLas®-Messung
gewechselt werden.
Schonung des Rohrmaterials die Verwendung der Order-No. 2520.F empfohlen (Bild).
KiLas®- LC für Nedo Laser mEssfix, für Stäbe ø 18 – 32 mm
Order-No. 2520
KiLas®- LC für Nedo Laser mEssfix, für Stäbe ø 32 mm
Order-No. 2520.F
102,- €
KiLas®- LC für Nedo Laser mEssfix, für Stäbe ø 30 – 45 mm
Order-No. 2520.G
102,- €
95,- €
Alternativ zur Klemmschrauben für unterschiedliche Stabdurchmesser ist die Halterung KiLas- LC auch mit
KiLas®- LC für Nedo Laser mEssfix, für Stäbe bis ø 35 mm
Order-No. 2720
KiLas®- LC für Nedo Laser mEssfix, für Stäbe ø 35 - 50 mm und Latten Order-No. 2720.G
2014/11.9
2014/XX.X
95,- €
112,- €
Page 1 (of 1)
S u r v e y i n g
E q u i p m e n t .
111
Precise distance measurement between 2 ground
points with laser distance meters (LSM)
The advantages of distance measurement with a LSM compared to the classical measurement with the
measuring tape are obvious:
Pole A
Pole B
•
•
•
•
•
No danger to traffic and yourself, e.g. when measuring across a busy street.
Measurement result is not dependent on traction and temperature.
Measurement can be performed by just one person.
Saves time, as it eliminates winding and unwinding of the measuring tape.
High theoretical accuracy of the measurement of around 1-3 mm (dependent on device), not dependent
of the distance of measurement
Nevertheless, in practice it has since been problematic to achieve such accuracies even close, when
measuring between 2 ground points with a LSM.
With our holders NiLas / KiLas® and the new target plate ZA4 this is possible as follows (s. picture):
Point 2
Point 1
- perpendicular pole A with LSM and holder NiLas / KiLas® to ground point 1
- perpendicular pole B with target plate ZA4 to ground point 2
- align laser beam of the LSM to the center of the target plate and start measurement
Two available types:
Target plate centric towards pole B:
- The target plate is located exactly in front of the pole axis. A measurement to the center line of the target plate must not be corrected anymore. This also applies for a horizontal distance that is determined
using a Kilas ® from an inclined distance and inclination angle.
- For measurement with a NiLas: To bridge the height difference between point 1 and 2 the LSM on pole
A can be moved or on point 2 (target plate) a pole with telescopic extension can be used.
For all poles with 5/8“ male thread:
target plate ZA4, size A4, white, 5/8“ female thread
Order-No. 6062.W
48,- €
target plate ZA4, size A4, beige, 5/8“ female thread
Order-No. 6062.B
48,- €
For this purpose, matching telescopic pole for use with NiLas/KiLas® LC with integrated aligning device:
telescopic pole, red/white, 1,2-2,0 m, without circular level, 5/8“ male thread Order-No. 6082 22,- €
For all poles with Leica vertical bolt, ø 12 mm:
The fixation of the target plate is performed with a horizontal knurled screw
target plate ZA4, size A4, white, Leica vertical bolt connection
Order-No. 6064.W
53,- €
target plate ZA4, size A4, beige, Leica vertical bolt connection
Order-No. 6064.B
53,- €
For this purpose, matching telescopic pole for use with NiLas/KiLas® LC with integrated aligning device:
telescopic pole, red/white, 1,2-2,0 m, without circular level, 5/8“ vertical bolt Order-No. 6084 32,- €
2014/11.10
2014/XX.X
S u r v e y i n g
E q u i p m e n t .
112
Target plate in front of pole B:
Stab A
Stab B
Pkt. 2
- The Target plate can be moved and fixed to any height with a pole-clamp. The advantage here is that
errors by possibly not exactly vertically standing poles A and B are minimized when the aimings are
near the ground. Also local obstacles can be avoided even more variable.
- The pole-clamp is designed, when used on any cylindrical poles (ø 18 to 45 mm), always an addition of
distance (Offset) of +34 mm has to be added to the measured horizontal distance.
- In "higher quality" equipped LSMs, this offset can be set. It is then added to each measurement programmatically.
- Note: This only applies for horizontal measurements. At an inclined distance measurement, which is
reduced with the help of the angle of inclination, the absolute value of 34mm must be added only
to the reduced horizontal distance (an offset set on the LSM will always be attached to the inclined
distance).
Pkt. 1
For poles with ø 18 to 32 mm:
target plate ZA4, size A4, white, pole clamp 18 to 32 mm
Order-No. 6090.1W
58,- €
target plate ZA4, size A4, beige, pole clamp 18 to 32 mm
Order-No. 6090.1B
58,- €
For this purpose matching telescopic pole for use with Nilas / Kilas ® LC with integrated aligning device:
telescopic pole, red/white 1,2 to 2,0 m, without circular bevel
Order-No. 6080
17,- €
target plate ZA4, size A4, white, pole clamp 30 to 45 mm
Order-No. 6090.3W
65,- €
target plate ZA4, size A4, beige, pole clamp 30 to 45 mm
Order-No. 6090.3B
65,- €
For poles with ø 30 to 45 mm: (without picture)
2014/11.10
2014/XX.X
Page 2 (of 2)
S u r v e y i n g
E q u i p m e n t .
113
System 168: Tripod holder for field computers
Ø 168 mm
Ø 163 mm
Tripods for field computer holder
3 mm
head diameter 168 mm. The ring of the holder is placed on a small ledge.
• no plate in between necessary, which could influence the power transmission tripod-tribrach.
• the tribrach remains fully movable.
• the tripod holder can also be removed or attached with centered tribrach.
Regular tripods (heavy design)
with a ledge already screwed on the tripod head.
Manufacturer
Material
Clamping
Order-No.
NEDO
NEDO
NEDO
NEDO
aluminium
wood
wood
wood
eccentric
eccentric
screws
eccentric + screws
200524 Plus
200513 Plus
200533 Plus
200532 Plus
164,- €
164,- €
171,- €
207,- €
Adapter Rings - System 168
Ø 168 mm
Already existing tripods with a smaller head diameter can be easily refitted with adapter rings made of
synthetic material.
The adapter rings made of black shock-proof synthetic material can be attached with 3 screws.
To do this, you only have to drill three holes with Ø 4,0 mm on the side of the tripod head.
The rings have an uniform external diameter of 168 mm. The internal diameter is adapted to the tripod
type (also suitable for triangular tripod plates, for example Leica (WILD).
The following rings are available:
Adapter rings for other tripod types on request!
tripod type
head Ø
CST 60-WDF20, 60-ALQR20
Leica (triangular tripod plates)
Glunz G3, G3M
Nedo 200100, 200200
Nedo 200512, 200523
ca.
ca.
ca.
ca.
ca.
153
156
158
139
157
adapter ring Order-No.
1960
1962
1965
1968
1969
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
30,30,30,30,30,-
€
€
€
€
€
Rotatable tripod holder Uni 168
The holder can be used together with above mentioned tripods.
• Lateral cylinder Ø of 31 mm, to attach clamping systems, as they are used for tripod legs or
GPS and prism poles.
• Suitable for all SECO-clamps. (s. catalogue 2014/12.3).
• Suitable for field computers up to 1 kg weight.
• The counter weight grants an even loading of all tripod legs when turning the holder.
Uni 168, incl. counter weight
2014/XX.X
2014/12.2
Order-No. 1900
Page 1 (of 1)
135,- €
S u r v e y i n g
E q u i p m e n t .
114
SECO UNIVERSAL-HALTERUNGEN F. FELDRECHNER
KnopfdruckSchnellverschluss
viele Rasten
Mit Hilfe der SECO Universalklammern können
Sie viele beliebte Feldrechner über eine individuell angepasste Halterung an Prismen-/
Antennenstäben und Stativen mit einem (Bein-)
Durchmesser von 19 - 32 mm befestigen.
in verschiedene Positionen. Ein Rastbolzen
im Rechnerhalter fixiert zuverlässig die
vorgewählte Einstellung.
Der Rechner/Controller kann mitsamt dem
Halter mit einem Knopfdruck vom PrismenJe nach Bedarf sind die Klemmen in verschiebzw. Antennenstab abgenommen werden.
denen Ausführungen (z. B. mit Libelle und/oder Die Universalklammer verbleibt am Stab.
mit Kompass) lieferbar. Die bewährte Konstruktion erlaubt ein Schwenken des Feldrechners
1
108-5198-052
1
SECO UNIVERSAL-KLEMMEN SERIE 5198
Die SECO Universal-Klemmen der 5198er-Serie
passen zu allen Prismen-/Antennenstäben sowie
Stativbeinen mit einem Durchmesser von 19 bis
32 mm, das größere Modell 108-5198-152 auch
zu Stäben bis 38 mm Durchmesser.
108-5198-152
Die seitlich offene Klemmung ermöglicht eine
schnelle und bequeme Montage am Stab.
108-5198-054
Die Stabklemmen der 5198er-Serie lassen sich
mit den unten aufgeführten Rechnerhaltern der
5198-Serie oder den Haltern der 5200er-Serie
(siehe nächste Seite) kombinieren.
Aluminium, mattschwarz eloxiert mit griffiger
und rostfreier Klemmschraube.
Artikelbeschreibung
€/St. Best.-Nr.
Universal-Klemme, Standardmodell, 0,13 kg
Universal-Klemme, wie oben, jedoch für Stäbe bis Ø 38 mm
Universal-Klemme mit 40’-Dosenlibelle, 0,18 kg
Universal-Klemme mit Kompass, 0,18 kg
Universal-Klemme mit 40’-Dosenlibelle und Kompass, 0,22 kg
Universal-Klemme mit Zubehörschlitz für ext. Batterie, 0,18 kg
108-5198-055
108-5198-056
2
60,50
79,00
66,00
72,00
75,00
93,50
108-5198-052
108-5198-152
108-5198-054
108-5198-055
108-5198-056
108-5198-059
SECO HALTERUNGEN FÜR FELDRECHNER - SERIE 5198
Wir liefern für die meisten handelsüblichen
Feldrechner eine zu unseren Universalklemmen
passende Halterung, mit der Sie den Rechner
sicher an Ihrem Prismen- bzw. Antennenstab
oder am Stativ befestigen können.
und Rechner können mit einem Knopfdruck
abgenommen werden. Wir bevorraten nur die
gängigsten Artikel, weitere Halter der 5198erSerie liefern wir auf Anfrage.
Der Rechner kann in 30°-Schritten geschwenkt
und mit einem Rastbolzen sicher fixiert werden.
Die Befestigung des Halters an der Klemme
erfolgt über ein Schnellspann-System, Halter
Material: Aluminium, mattschwarz eloxiert mit
Edelstahl-Rastbolzen.
108-5198-059
2
Artikelbeschreibung
108-5198-082
€/St. Best.-Nr.
LEICATSCe,
TR500Ranger
mit GHT
27, RS1220
Halter für TSCE,
Q100
Halter für LEICA TR500 mit GHT 27, RS1220
Halter für Recon
66,00 108-5198-082
108-5198-086
61,00
66,00 108-5198-086
57,00 108-5198-092
108-5198-086
2014/12.3
2014/XX.X
Page 1 (of 2)
S u r v e y i n g
E q u i p m e n t .
115
1
SECO HALTERUNGEN FÜR FELDRECHNER...
... „CLAW-SYSTEM“
Die Feldrechnerhalter mit dem SECO „CLAWSystem“ ermöglichen eine besonders sichere
und gleichzeitig materialschonende Klemmung. Im Vergleich zum „alten“ 5198-System
– bei dem nur punktförmig mit einer
Klemmschraube gespannt wurde –, erfolgt
die Klemmung hier über linienförmige und
deshalb größere Anlageflächen.
Mit dem durchdachten Gelenk in der Mitte
von Klammer und Rechnerhalter werden
deutlich höhere Spannkräfte erzielt. Außerdem werden Stab bzw. Stativ und der teure
Rechner wirksam vor ärgerlichen Kratzern
und Druckstellen geschützt.
Die Aufnahme der Rechnerhalter und Universalklemmen ist kompatibel mit den entsprechenden Vorgängern der Serie 108-5198-xxx.
Die Universalklemmen des „CLAW-Systems“
108-5200-152/
108-5200-050
wurden für die stark verbreiteten Prismenund Antennenstäbe mit einem Außendurchmesser von 32 mm konstruiert.
Für dünnere Stäbe mit 25 mm Außendurchmesser (z. B. LEICA GLS11/12/13
und kompatible Stäbe) sind passende
Reduzierhülsen lieferbar.
Die wesentlichen Merkmale des SECOKlauensystems in Stichworten:
Optimierter Klauen-Spannmechanismus
für sicheres und materialschonendes
Spannen
Rechnerhalter sind in 30°-Schritten
schwenkbar
Passend für alle Stäbe mit Ø 32 mm
Alle Teile aus harteloxiertem Aluminum
oder rostfreiem Stahl
Griffige, gummibeschichtete Spannschraube
108-5200-150
108-5200-152
108-5200-155
1
SECO „CLAW“ UNIVERSAL-KLEMMEN FÜR STÄBE Ø 32 MM
SECO Universal-Klemmen passen zu allen Prismenund Antennenstäben mit einem Außendurchmesser von 32 mm. Für Stäbe mit 25 mm Durchmesser liefern wir passende Adapterringe.
Der Halter für den Feldrechner bzw. Controller
wird über einen Schnappverschluss mit
Druckknopf an die Klemmen adaptiert und kann
in 30°-Schritten gedreht und arretiert werden.
Die seitlich offene Klammer ermöglicht die
schnelle Befestigung am Stab, das Gelenk in der
Klammermitte und die griffige Klemmschraube
ermöglichen eine absolut zuverlässige und
materialschonende Klemmung.
Passend zu diesen Klemmen liefern wir diverse
Halterungen für die gängigsten Feldrechner
und Datenerfassungsgeräte (s. u.). Die Klemmen
sind aus schwarz hartverchromten Aluminium
und rostfreiem Stahl gefertigt.
Artikelbeschreibung
2
108-5200-050
108-5200-056
€/St. Best.-Nr.
CLAW-Universal-Klemme für Stäbe Ø 32 mm, Standardmodell
CLAW-Universal-Klemme für Stäbe Ø 32 mm, mit 20‘-Dosenlibelle
CLAW-Universal-Klemme für Stäbe Ø 32 mm, mit Kompass (o. Abb.)
CLAW-Universal-Klemme für Stäbe Ø 32 mm, m. Kompass u. 40‘-Libelle
Reduzierring für Stäbe mit 25 mm Außendurchmesser
2
108-D11145
66,00
80,50
80,00
75,00
16,00
108-5200-150
108-5200-152
108-5200-154
108-5200-155
108-D11145
108-5200-057
SECO RECHNERHALTER „CLAW-SYSTEM“
Passend zu den Universalklemmen der Serien
108-5198-xxx (s. vorherige Seite) und 108-5200xxx (s. o.). Der durchdachte Spannmechanismus
mit dem mittig angeordneten Gelenk garantiert
108-5200-059
ein sicheres und vor allem materialschonendes
Spannen des Feldrechners. Material: Aluminium, harteloxiert/rostfreier Edelstahl.
Artikelbeschreibung
€/St. Best.-Nr.
CLAW-Rechnerhalter für TSC2, Ranger 300X, Ranger 500X
CLAW-Rechnerhalter für Allegro MX und CX, Jett CE, Explorer,
Tracker (o. Abb.)
CLAW-Rechnerhalter für Recon (o. Abb.)
CLAW-Rechnerhalter für GMS-2, GMS-2 Pro
CLAW-Rechnerhalter für Archer, LEICA DX10, Carlson Mini, Javad Victor
CLAW-Rechnerhalter für FC120, FC200, QR (o. Abb.)
CLAW-Rechnerhalter für Nomad 800-Serie
CLAW-Rechnerhalter für Carlson Surveyor, Surveyor + (o. Abb.)
CLAW-Rechnerhalter für GEO6000 (o. Abb.)
CLAW-Rechnerhalter für TSC3, Ranger 3
CLAW-Rechnerhalter für Mobile Mapper 10
CLAW-Rechnerhalter für Juno 3 Serie (o. Abb.)
CLAW-Rechnerhalter für FC-236 / Nautiz X7
CLAW-Komplettset (Stab- und Rechnerhalter) für LEICA VIVA CS10/CS15
108-5200-065
108-5200-065
72,00 108-5200-050
72,00 108-5200-052
72,00
72,00
79,50
79,50
72,00
72,00
72,50
72,00
86,00
73,00
72,00
108-5200-053
108-5200-056
108-5200-057
108-5200-058
108-5200-059
108-5200-062
108-5200-064
108-5200-065
108-5200-066
108-5200-067
108-5200-069
108-5200-066
108-5200-066
108-5200-069
108-5200-15
208,00 108-5200-15
2014/12.3
2014/XX.X
Page 2 (of 2)
S u r v e y i n g
E q u i p m e n t .
116
Rechner-Halterung für DRS ARMOR X10, X10gx
Zur Verwendung als elektronisches Feldbuch
Ausstattung:
• Schwarz lackierte Leichtmetall-Konstruktion.
• Sicherer Halt des Rechners in der Halterung.
• Transport des Rechners in der Halterung auch kopfüber möglich.
• Sekundenschnelles Einlegen und Abnehmen des Rechners durch praktischen Schiebeverschluss.
• Im Schwerpunkt angebrachte Innengewinde zum Anschluss an Stative, GPS- und Prismenstäbe:
1/4” (Foto), M8, 5/8”, 2x M5
• Replikatorfähig durch freien Zugang zum Port an der Unterpage des Rechners.
• Gewicht: ca. 650 g.
Die Fixierung des Rechners in der Halterung erfolgt mit einem praktischen Schiebeverschluss.
In der Halterung ist ein zusätzlicher Haken integriert. Er erlaubt das einfache Einhängen an den
Haltelaschen des Instrumenten-Stativs.
Die Verwendungsmöglichkeiten auf einem externen Stativ oder am GPS- und Prismenstab werden durch
den Haken nicht beeinträchtigt.
Halterung für DRS ARMOR X10
Order-No. 5255
205,- €
Halterung für DRS ARMOR X10gx
Order-No. 5251
205,- €
Komplett-Set zur Befestigung an Stativbeinen sowie GNSS- und Prismenstäben
Mit dem Komplett-Set ist der Rechner sofort einsatzbereit
Es setzt sich zusammen aus:
Halterung für ARMOR X10 / X10gx + Stabklemme + Langloch-Traverse + Kugelkopf mit LanglochFeststellschraube
Mit dem stabilen Kugelkopf lässt sich der Rechner sekundenschnell optimal einstellen. Er kann gedreht
und gekippt und über das Langloch mit optimalem Abstand zum Stativbein oder Reflektorstab verwendet
werden. So ist z.B. sowohl die Verwendung vor als auch seitlich des GNSS-Stabes möglich.
Die Stabklemmen sind für unterschiedliche Stabdurchmesser erhältlich.
Bei ausschließlicher Verwendung an Stäben mit ø 32 mm (1 1/4“) empfehlen wir zur Schonung des
Rohrmaterials die Verwendung der speziell auf diesen Durchmesser abgestimmten Klemmen mit der OrderNo. 5254.F und 5258.F.
für Stäbe ø 18-32 mm:
Komplett-Set für X10 mit Langloch-Traverse, ø 18-32 mm
Order-No. 5258.1
328,- €
Komplett-Set für X10gx mit Langloch-Traverse, ø 18-32 mm
Order-No. 5254.1
328,- €
Komplett-Set für X10 mit Langloch-Traverse, ø 32 mm
Order-No. 5258.F
335,- €
Komplett-Set für X10gx mit Langloch-Traverse, ø 32 mm
Order-No. 5254.F
335,- €
Komplett-Set für X10 mit Langloch-Traverse, ø 30 – 45 mm
Order-No. 5258.2
335,- €
Komplett-Set für X10gx mit Langloch-Traverse, ø 30 – 45 mm
Order-No. 5254.2
335,- €
für Stäbe ø 32 mm:
für Stäbe ø 30-45 mm (ohne Abb.):
2014/XX.X
2014/12.4
Page 1 (of 3)
S u r v e y i n g
E q u i p m e n t .
117
Befestigung am Stab mit SECO-System:
Eine Langloch-Traverse mit seitlich angebrachtem 12 mm-Bolzen ermöglicht die Verwendung des X10 /
X10gx mit dem Befestigungssystem der Firma SECO. Vorteil dieses Systems ist die schnelle Abkoppelung
des Rechners samt Halterung vom Stab. Die Klemme verbleibt hierbei am Stab.
Es können auch alle SECO-Klemmen (s. Catalogue 2014/12.3 Page 1 + 2) verwendet werden.
Das Langloch in der Traverse erlaubt eine optimierte Anbringung des Rechners mit geringstem Abstand
zum Stab.
Die Verwendung eines Kugelkopfes ist nicht notwendig, da beim SECO-System die Neigung mit dem
Raststift in 30°-Schritten verstellt werden kann. Nicht zum Gebrauch an Stativbeinen geeignet !
Klemmen von SECO
für Stäbe bis Ø 32 mm
Klemme von SECO, für Stäbe bis Ø 32 mm
Order-No. 1890
60,50 €
für Stäbe mit Ø 32 mm
Claw-Klemme von SECO, für Stäbe mit Ø 32 mm
Order-No. 1890.1
66,- €
Order-No. 5236
58,- €
Langloch-Traverse
mit 12 mm-Bolzen und Raststift zum Anschluss an SECO-Klemme,
M8-Sterngriffschraube zum Einschrauben in Rechnerhalterung
Langloch-Traverse, 12 mm-Bolzen, für SECO-System
Anmerkung:
Bei Befestigung des Rechners direkt am Instrumentenstativ oder am klassischen GNSS-Stab ist aufgrund
seines hohen Gewichts bei der Messung mit Problemen bezüglich Handling und Genauigkeit zu rechnen.
Wir empfehlen bei der Verwendung mit Tachymetern ein externes Stativ (z. B. unser Leichtstativ "easy
going" – s. Catalogue 2014/13.1) oder einen Tragegurt (s. Catalogue 2014/14.1) und im GNSS-Bereich
unseren Stab "Frame", bei dem der Schwerpunkt optimal in der Achse des Stabes liegt (s. Catalogue
2014/7.4)
Anwendungsbeispiele Kugelkopf + Kugelgelenk nächste Page:
s.
g
alterun
Trageh Easy"
y
"Carr
4/14.1
ue 201
Catalog
tab
GNSS-Se"
"Fram 014/7.4
logue 2
s. Cata
2014/12.4
2014/XX.X
tativ
Leichts oing
easy g 2014/13.1
logue
s. Cata
Page 2 (of 3)
S u r v e y i n g
E q u i p m e n t .
118
DRS ARMOR X10/X10gx auf Instrumenten-Stativen,
Leicht-Stativen und GNSS-Stab "Frame"
Kugelkopf M8
In die obige Halterungen Nr. 5251 und 5255 wird ein Kugelkopf M8 geschraubt. Dieser ermöglicht die
sekundenschnelle optimale Einstellung des Rechners bezüglich Ergonomie und Sonnenlichteinstrahlung.
• einfache und stabile Klemmung der gewählten Position
• M8-Innengewinde im Unterteil des Kugelkopfes zum Aufschrauben auf:
- Stäbe mit M8-Außengewinden
- Adapterzapfen ø 25 mm (s. unten)
- Stativplatte (s. unten)
- Leichtstativ "easy going", s. Catalogue 2014/13.1
M8
- GNSS-Stab "Frame", s. Catalogue 2014/7.4
• Tragkraft: 15 kg
• Gewicht: 140 g
Kugelkopf M8 (15 kg)
M8
Order-No. 5081
48,- €
Kugelgelenk M8 „free move“
M8
Das Kugelgelenk "free move" unterscheidet sich wie folgt vom oben beschriebenen Kugelkopf:
Eine starke Feder erzeugt einen stetigen Druck auf die Kugel des Gelenks. Der Rechner kann ohne Lösen
und Anziehen einer Feststellschraube in Position gebracht und bedient werden.
Dies ist die schnellste Möglichkeit den Rechner durch Drehen und Kippen für die optimale Bedienung und
Ablesbarkeit des Displays auszurichten.
Durch die zylindrische Form des Gehäuses (Ø 32 mm) kann das "free move" auch auf Stativen mit zylindrischer Aufnahme verwendet werden (Funktion s. unter Adapterzapfen Nr. 383 und Catalogue 2014/13.1 S.2).
Mit dem M8-Außengewinde wird das Gelenk in die Rechner-Halterung geschraubt. Der Adapter unten am
„free move“ ist mit einem M8-Innengewinde aus Edelstahl ausgestattet, womit das Kugelgelenk M8 die
gleichen Anwendungsmöglichkeiten bietet wie der obige Kugelkopf M8.
Kugelgelenk M8 „free move“ mit Adapter M8
Order-No. 6210.M8
77,- €
M8
Adapterzapfen
Der Adapterzapfen wird mit dem M8-Außengewinde in das Unterteil des Kugelkopfes geschraubt.
M8
• Der Adapterzapfen besitzt unten ein M8-Innengewinde zur Verwendung auf Stäben mit
5/8"Außengewinde (z. B. Prismenstab oder Einbeinstativ zum Eintreten in Naturboden).
• Der Zapfen mit Außen-ø 25 mm kann auf Fluchtstab-, Prismen- oder Kreuzscheibenstative
mit zylindrischer Aufnahme eingesetzt und festgeklemmt werden.
Adapterzapfen ø 25 mm, M8-Außengewinde
5/8”
Order-No. 383
24,50 €
Stativplatte
Die Stativplatte wird mit dem M8-Außengewinde in das Unterteil des Kugelkopfes oder des Kugelgelenks
"free move" geschraubt.
M8
Die Stativplatte besitzt
• unten ein 5/8"-Innengewinde zur Verwendung auf allen Instrumentenstativen mit planem Stativkopf und
5/8"-Anzugsschraube.
• oben M8-Außengewinde aus Edelstahl.
Stativplatte 5/8”, M8-Außengewinde
Order-No. 3035.1
42,- €
5/8”
2014/XX.X
2014/12.4
Page 3 (of 3)
S u r v e y i n g
E q u i p m e n t .
119
Halterung für Mettenmeier colibri X5 / X6/ X7
Zur universellen Verwendung als elektronisches Feldbuch
•
•
•
•
•
Schwarz lackierte Leichtmetall-Konstruktion.
Sicherer Halt des colibri in der Halterung. Achtung: X5 nur mit Schutzhülle verwendbar!
Transport des Rechners in der Halterung auch kopfüber möglich.
Sekundenschnelles Einlegen und Abnehmen des Rechners durch Schnellverriegelung.
Im Schwerpunkt angebrachte Innengewinde zum Anschluss an Stative, GPS- und Prismenstäbe:
- 1/4“ – Fotogewinde
- M8-Gewinde
• Gewicht: ca. 600 g.
Halterung für Mettenmeier colibri X5
Order-No. 5370.1
158,- €
Order-No. 5375.1
118,- €
Order-No. 5385.1
148,- €
Die Halterungen sind auch mit integriertem Haken erhältlich. Mit ihm kann der colibri an den Haltelaschen
am Kopf des Instrumentenstativs eingehängt werden.
Gewicht: ca. 650 g.
Halterung für Mettenmeier colibri X5 mit Haken
Order-No. 5370.1H
183,- €
Order-No. 5375.1H
143,- €
Order-No. 5385.1H
173,- €
Traverse mit Kugelkopf
Zur Befestigung der Halterung an allen zylindrischen Stäben, z.B. GNSS- und Prismenstäbe.
• Schraubklemme mit Sterngriff zum seitlichen Einführen und Befestigen am Stab.
• Robuste Profil-Traverse aus Alu 30 x 30 mm.
• Kugelkopf M8 zur sekundenschnellen, optimalen Einstellung des Rechners bezüglich Ergonomie und
Sonnenlichteinstrahlung. Der Abstand des Kugelkopfes zum Stab ist veränderbar.
• Gewicht (Halterung, Traverse, Kugelkopf, Schraubklemme): ca. 1170 g.
Die Halterungen sind für unterschiedliche Stabdurchmesser erhältlich.
Bei ausschließlicher Verwendung an Stäben mit ø32 mm (11/4“) wird zur Schonung des Rohrmaterials die
Verwendung der speziell hierfür gefertigten Klemme empfohlen.
Profil-Traverse, Kugelkopf und Klemme
Rechnertyp
für Stäbe von ø 18 – 32 mm
Order-No.
für Stäbe mit ø 32 mm
Order-No.
für Stäbe von ø 30 – 45 mm
Order-No.
Colibri X5
5374.1
282,– €
5374.F
289,– €
5374.2
Colibri X6
5377.1
242,– €
5377.F
249,– €
5377.2
249,– €
Colibri X7
5387.1
272,– €
5387.F
279,– €
5387.2
279,– €
289,– €
Anmerkung:
2014/7.4)
2014/XX.X
2014/12.5
Page 1 (of 2)
S u r v e y i n g
E q u i p m e n t .
120
Colibri auf Instrumenten-Stativen,
Kugelkopf M8
In die obige Halterungen wird ein Kugelkopf M8 geschraubt und mit einer Sechskantmutter (SW13)
gesichert. Der Kugelkopf ermöglicht die sekundenschnelle optimale Einstellung des Rechners bezüglich
Ergonomie und Sonnenlichteinstrahlung.
• Gewicht: 250 g
Order-No. 5082
65,- €
Adapterzapfen
M8
5/8”
• Der Adapterzapfen besitzt unten ein 5/8”-Innengewinde zur Verwendung auf Stäben mit
5/8”-Außengewinde (z. B. Prismenstab oder Einbeinstativ zum Eintreten in Naturboden).
Order-No. 383
24,50 €
Stativplatte
Die Stativplatte wird mit dem M8-Außengewinde in das Unterteil des Kugelkopfes geschraubt (Sie kann
aber auch direkt mit der Halterung, ohne dazwischengeschraubten Kugelkopf M8, verwendet werden).
M8
• Die Stativplatte besitzt unten ein 5/8”-Innengewinde zur Verwendung auf allen Instrumentenstativen mit
planem Stativkopf und 5/8”-Anzugsschraube.
• M8-Außengewinde aus Edelstahl.
Order-No. 3035.1
42,- €
5/8”
Anwendungsbeispiele:
tab
GNSS-Se"
"Fram 014/7.4
logue 2
s. Cata
2014/12.5
2014/XX.X
g
alterun
Trageh Easy"
y
rr
a
C
"
014/14.1
logue 2
s. Cata
tativ
Leichts oing
g
y
s
ea
014/13.1
logue 2
ta
a
C
.
s
Page 2 (of 2)
S u r v e y i n g
E q u i p m e n t .
121
Halterung für Panasonic Toughbook CF-18/19
Zur universellen Verwendung der Rechner im Feld
• Schwarz pulverbeschichtete Leichtmetall-Schale
• Verschiedene, im Schwerpunkt angebrachte Innengewinde zum Anschluss an Stativen, GPS- und
Prismenstäben usw.:
- 1/4“- Fotogewinde
- M8 (3/8“ auf Wunsch)
- 2x M5-Gewinde für Gelenk-Kugel ø25 mm
• Sekundenschnelles Einlegen und Abnehmen der Rechner aus der Halterung durch Schnellverriegelung
mit Drehhebel-Verschluss
• Transport der Rechner in der Halterung auch kopfüber möglich (sowohl in Laptop- als auch in Tablet-PCFunktion)
• Ohne weiteres Zubehör kann die Halterung verwendet werden:
- mit handelsüblichen Fotostativen mit 1/4“-Gewinde
- mit unserem Leichtstativ (s. Catalogue 2014/13.1 S. 1-3)
• Gewicht: 490 g
Halterung für Panasonic CF-18/19
Order-No. 5170
170,– €
Komplett-Set zur Befestigung an Stativbeinen
sowie GNSS- und Prismenstäben
Halterung für Pansonic Toughbook CF-18 / CF-19 + Stabklemme + Langloch-Traverse + Kugelkopf mit
Langloch-Feststellschraube
Bei ausschließlicher Verwendung an Stäben mit ø 32 mm (1¼“) empfehlen wir zur Schonung des
Rohrmaterials die Verwendung der speziell auf diesen Durchmesser abgestimmten Klemme mit der OrderNo. 5171.F.
für Stäbe ø 18-32 mm:
Komplett-Set für CF-18/19 mit Langloch-Traverse, ø 18-32 mm
Order-No. 5171.1
293,- €
Order-No. 5171.F
300,- €
Order-No. 5171.2
300,- €
für Stäbe ø 32 mm:
Komplett-Set für CF-18/19 mit Langloch-Traverse, ø 32 mm
für Stäbe ø 30-45 mm (ohne Abb.):
Komplett-Set für CF-18/19 mit Langloch-Traverse, ø 30 – 45 mm
Page
drucken
Schritt
zurück vor
Exit
2014/XX.X
2014/12.6
Page 1 (of 3)
S u r v e y i n g
E q u i p m e n t .
122
Eine Langloch-Traverse mit seitlich angebrachtem 12 mm-Bolzen ermöglicht die Verwendung des X10 /
X10gx mit dem Befestigungssystem der Firma SECO. Vorteil dieses Systems ist die schnelle Abkoppelung
des Rechners samt Halterung vom Stab. Die Klemme verbleibt hierbei am Stab.
Es können auch alle SECO-Klemmen (s. Catalogue 2014/12.3 Page 1 + 2) verwendet werden.
zum Stab.
Klemmen von SECO
Order-No. 1890
60,50 €
Order-No. 1890.1
66,- €
Order-No. 5236
58,- €
Langloch-Traverse
Anmerkung:
2014/7.4)
s.
g
alterun
Trageh Easy"
y
"Carr
4/14.1
ue 201
Catalog
tab
GNSS-Se"
"Fram 014/7.4
logue 2
s. Cata
2014/12.6
2014/XX.X
tativ
Leichts oing"
"easy ge 2014/13.1
logu
s. Cata
Page 2 (of 3)
Bohnensting l SS pp ee cz i i a a l l vS eu rr m
v ee ys i s nu g n gE sq zu ui pb me he nö tr ..
123
123
Toughbook CF-19 auf Instrumenten-Stativen,
Kugelkopf M8
In die obige Halterung Nr. 5170 wird ein Kugelkopf M8 geschraubt und mit einer Sechskantmutter (SW13)
M8
• Gewicht: 140 g
Order-No. 5081
48,- €
M8
M8
Durch die zylindrische Form des Gehäuses (Ø 32 mm) kann das "free move" auch auf Stativen mit zylindrischer Aufnahme verwendet werden (Funktion s. unter Adapterzapfen Nr. 383 und s. Catalogue 2014/13.1 S.2).
Oben besitzt das Gelenk ein M8-Außengewinde. Hierauf wird die Rechner-Halterung geschraubt und mit
einer Kontermutter gesichert.
Der Adapter unten am „free move“ ist mit einem M8-Innengewinde aus Edelstahl ausgestattet, womit das
Kugelgelenk M8 die gleichen Anwendungsmöglichkeiten bietet wie der obige Kugelkopf M8.
M8
Order-No. 6210.M8
77,- €
Adapterzapfen
M8
5/8”
Order-No. 383
24,50 €
Stativplatte
M8
• unten ein 5/8”-Innengewinde zur Verwendung auf allen Instrumentenstativen mit planem Stativkopf und
5/8”-Anzugsschraube.
Order-No. 3035.1
42,- €
5/8”
2014/XX.X
2014/12.6
Page 3 (of 3)
nsting l S p e z i a l v e r m e s s u n g s z u b e h ö r .
124
en für das Panasonic Toughbook CF-U1
ndung im Feld
anasonic
book CF-U1
x H x T):
57 x 151 mm
cht: 1,06 kg
Halterung für CF-U1
Best.-Nr. 5010
125,- €
Drehhalter S 168
h für alle Stative
rchm. 168 mm und
rehtem Absatz
Drehhalter S 168
für alle Stative
rchm. 168 mm und
rehtem Absatz
roduktsicht
Bohnens
Seite 1 von 5
Spezialvermessun
Der CF-U1 wird in die Halterung eingelegt und mit einem Drehhebel sekundenschnell
stabil fixiert. Sämtliche Schnittstellen bleiben zugänglich, die Trageschlaufen müssen
nicht abgenommen werden.
Durch die vorhandenen Anschlussgewinde 2xM5, M8, 1/4" und 3/8"
kann der CF-U1 wie folgt verwendet werden:
Näheres zu
angedrehtem
Adapterr
Nach
sie
Katalog
Drehhalter S 168 Langloch,
komplett mit Gegengewicht, Kugelkopf und
Halter für CF-U1
Drehhalter S 168 mit
Gegengewicht
und Langloch-Traverse
Kugelkopf M8
mit M8-Sterngriffschraube
und Kontermutter
Best.-Nr. 1903.U1
Best.-Nr. 1903
Best.-Nr. 5081.3
Best.-Nr. 5010
313,- €
135,- €
53,- €
125,- €
Näheres zu
angedrehtem
Adapterr
Nach
sie
Katalog
Drehhalter Front,
komplett mit Gegengewicht, Front-Träger
und Halter CF-U1
Drehhalter mit
Gegengewicht
und Front-Träger
Best.-Nr. 1901.U1
Best.-Nr. 1901
Best.-Nr. 5010
260,- €
135,- €
125,- €
alle Preise zz
Schritt
zurück vor
Exit
2014/12.7
Page 1 (of 5)
Alle Preise z
S t r a ß e 2 0 / 1 · D - 7 4 3 6 6 K i r c h h e i m / N . · Te l . + 4 9 ( 0 ) 7 1 4 3 / 8 9 1 0 0 3 · F a x 9 4 0 3 2 · E - M a i l : f i r m a @ b o h n e n s t i n g l . d e · w w w
125
ndung im Feld
mit Drehhalter
für alle Stative
rchm. 168 mm und
rehtem Absatz
mit Drehhalter
für alle Stative
rchm. 168 mm und
rehtem Absatz
mit Drehhalter
für alle Stative
durchm. 168 mm
edrehtem Absatz
roduktsicht
Bohnens
Seite 2 von 5
Spezialvermessun
Näheres zu
angedreht
Adapterr
Nachrü
Drehhalte
sie
Katalog
Drehhalter Uni 168,
komplett mit Gegengewicht,
Langloch-Traverse, Kugelkopf
und Halter für CF-U1
Drehhalter Uni 168
mit Gegengewicht
und seitl. Zylinder
Langloch-Traverse mit
Klemme für Stäbe
bis Durchmesser 32 mm
Kugelkopf M8
und Kontermutter
Best.-Nr. 1900.1U1
Best.-Nr. 1900.1
Best.-Nr. 5014.18
Best.-Nr. 5081.3
Best.-Nr. 5010
383,- €
135,- €
70,- €
53,- €
125,- €
Drehhalter Uni 168,
Doppelgelenk und
Halter CF-U1
Drehhalter Uni 168
mit Gegengewicht
und seitl. Zylinder
mit Doppelgelenk
und zylindr. Klemme
bis Durchm. 32 mm
Best.-Nr. 1900.2U1
Best.-Nr. 1900.1
Best.-Nr. 5011.1
345,- €
135,- €
210,- €
Näheres zu
angedreht
Adapterr
Nachrü
Drehhalte
sie
Katalog
Drehhalter Uni 168
Klemme von Seco
(bis 32 mm), Bolzen-Traverse
und Halter für CF-U1
Drehhalter Uni 168
mit Gegengewicht
und seitl. Zylinder
Claw-Klemme von Seco,
für Stäbe (Zylinder)
bis 32 mm
Best.-Nr. 1900.U1
Best.-Nr. 1900
Best.-Nr. 1890.1
Best.-Nr. 5012
346,- €
135,- €
66,- €
145,- €
Halterung für CF-U1 mit 12
mm Bolzen-Traverse für
Claw-Klemme
Näheres zu
angedreht
Adapterr
Nachrü
Drehhalte
sie
Katalog
alle Preise zz
Schritt
zurück vor
Exit
2014/12.7
Page 2 (of 5)
Alle Preise z
126
ndung im Feld
am Stativbein
Prismen- bzw.
NSS-Stab
am Stativbein
erung CF-U1
rismen- bzw.
NSS-Stab
roduktsicht
Bohnens
Seite 3 von 5
Spezialvermessun
Halterung CF-U1,
komplett mit LanglochTraverse, Kugelkopf und
Klemme (bis 32 mm)
Klemme für Stäbe
bis Durchmesser 32 mm
Kugelkopf M8
und Kontermutter
Best.-Nr. 5014.1
Best.-Nr. 5014.18
Best.-Nr. 5081.3
Best.-Nr. 5010
248,- €
70,- €
53,- €
125,- €
mit Doppelgelenk
und zylindr. Klemme
bis Durchm. 32 mm
Halterung CF-U1
am Prismen- bzw.
GNSS-Stab
Best.-Nr. 5011.1
210,- €
Halterung CF-U1,
komplett mit Klemme
von Seco (bis 32 mm)
und Bolzen-Traverse.
Claw-Klemme von Seco,
für Stäbe (Zylinder)
bis 32 mm
Best.-Nr. 5012.1
Best.-Nr. 1890.1
Best.-Nr. 5012
211,- €
66,- €
145,- €
Halterung für CF-U1 mit 12
mm Bolzen-Traverse für
Claw-Klemme
alle Preise zz
Schritt
zurück vor
Exit
2014/12.7
Page 3 (of 5)
Alle Preise z
127
Bohnens
ndung im Feld
Spezialvermessun
erung CF-U1
üblichem Fotostativ
der 3/8"-Gewinde
Best.-Nr. 5010
125,- €
erung CF-U1
üblichem Stabstativ
ndr. Aufnahme
Adapterzapfen,
Durchm. 25 mm
mit M8-Außengewinde
aus Edelstahl
Kugelkopf M8
und Kontermutter
Best.-Nr. 383
Best.-Nr. 5081
Best.-Nr. 5010
24,50 €
48,- €
125,- €
Halterung CF-U1,
komplett mit Leichtstativ "Easy
going"
und Kugelkopf
Leichtstativ "easy
mit M8-Gewinde
roduktsicht
Seite 4 von 5
Leichtstativ "Easy going"
Kugelkopf M8
und Kontermutter
Best.-Nr. 5351.1
Best.-Nr. 5081
Best.-Nr. 5010
220,- €
48,- €
125,- €
Anstelle des M8Kugelkopfs kann auch das
neue Kugelgelenk M8
"free move" verwendet
werden. Schnelle Verstellmöglichkeit ohne Lösen
bzw. Anziehen einer
Schraube !
Katalog 2014/13.1
Näheres zum
"Easy
sie
Katalog
alle Preise zz
Schritt
zurück vor
Exit
2014/12.7
Page 4 (of 5)
Alle Preise z
128
Bohnen
endung im Feld
Kugelkopf M8
und Kontermutter
GNSS-Stab "Frame"
uf handelsüblichem
mentenstativ mit
Anzugschraube
roduktsicht
Spezialvermessu
Näh
GNSS-S
s
Katalo
GNSS-Stab "Frame"
ltrung CF-U1
Tragehalterung
Carry Easy"
Seite 5 von 5
Best.-Nr. 5480
Best.-Nr. 5081
Best.-Nr. 5010
390,- €
48,- €
125,- €
Stativplatte 5/8",
mit M8-Außengewinde aus
Edelstahl
Kugelkopf M8
und Kontermutter
Anstelle des M8Kugelkopfs kann auch das
neue Kugelgelenk M8
"free move" verwendet
werden. Schnelle Verstellmöglichkeit ohne Lösen
bzw. Anziehen einer
Schraube !
Katalog 2014/13.1
Best.-Nr. 3035.1
Best.-Nr. 5081
Best.-Nr. 5010
42,- €
48,- €
125,- €
Näh
Trage
"Car
s
Katalo
Kugelkopf M8
und Kontermutter
Tragehalterung "Carry Easy"
komplett mit Kugelkopf und
Halter für CF-U1
Tragehalterung
"Carry Easy", Typ S
Best.-Nr. 5715.U1
Best.-Nr. 5715
Best.-Nr. 5081.3
Best.-Nr. 5010
363,- €
185,- €
53,- €
125,- €
alle Preise z
Schritt
zurück vor
Exit
2014/12.7
Page 5 (of 5)
Alle Preise z
S u r v e y i n g
E q u i p m e n t .
129
Bohnenstingl
Halterungen für den Trimble TSC2/TSC3
Seite 1 von 1
zur Verwendung im Feld
Spezialvermessungszubehör
1
TSC2 mit Drehhalter
Uni 168 und Seco-Halter
für alle Stative
mit Kopfdurchm. 168 mm
und angedrehtem Absatz
Drehhalter Uni 168 mit Klemme
und Rechnerhalter von Seco (Trimble)
für TSC2, komplett
Drehhalter Uni 168
mit Gegengewicht
und seitl. Zylinder
Seco (Trimble)
Claw-Klemme
für Stäbe bis 32 mm
Seco (Trimble)
Claw-Rechnerhalter
für TSC2
Best.-Nr. 1900.T2
Best.-Nr. 1900.1
Best.-Nr. 1890.1
Best.-Nr. 1894.TSC2
273,- €
135,- €
66,- €
Drehhalter Uni 168 mit Klemme
und Rechnerhalter von Seco (Trimble)
für TSC3, komplett
Drehhalter Uni 168
mit Gegengewicht
und seitl. Zylinder
Seco (Trimble)
Claw-Klemme
für Stäbe bis 32 mm
Seco (Trimble)
Claw-Rechnerhalter
für TSC3
Best.-Nr. 1900.T3
Best.-Nr. 1900.1
Best.-Nr. 1890.1
Best.-Nr. 1894.TSC3
273,- €
135,- €
66,- €
72,- €
alle Preise zzgl. Mwst.
2
TSC3 mit Drehhalter
Uni 168 und Seco-Halter
für alle Stative
mit Kopfdurchm. 168 mm
und angedrehtem Absatz
72,- €
Stative zum Drehhalter Uni 168 und Systembeschreibung s. Katalog 2014/12.2
2014/XX.X
2014/12.8
Page 1 (of 1)
S u r v e y i n g
E q u i p m e n t .
130
Hakenplatte für ITRONIX Q·200
Zum einfachen Einhängen des Handheld-Computers ans Instrumentenstativ
Hakenplatte wird an die rückseitge Gummilasche der Handschlaufe aufgesteckt und kann dort verbleiben.
Die Funktion des Q·200 und seine Verwendung mit der Handschlaufe wird nicht beeinträchtigt.
Auch der parallele Einsatz mit unser Halterung Nr. 5295 ist möglich.
• Schwarz pulverbeschichtete Aluplatte mit Haken, passend für alle handelsüblichen Instrumentenstative
mit Einhängelasche am Stativkopf.
• Halteplatte ist nach der Montage unverlierbar.
• Gewicht: 20 g
Hakenplatte für ITRONIX Q 200
Order-No. 5294
Order-No. 5294
25,- €
Montage der Hakenplatte
• Herausziehen der Handschlaufe aus oberer gummierter Befestigungslasche
Bild 1
• Einfädeln der Handschlaufe durch Hakenplatte, Wiedereinführen in obere Befestigungslasche und
Schließen des Klettverschlusses - Bild 1 -
Bild 2
• Einschieben der Nase der Hakenplatte in obere Befestigungslasche - Bild 2 -
Bild 4
• Die Hakenplatte hat einen festen Sitz und ist unverlierbar - Bild 3 und 4 Bild 3
2014/XX.X
2014/12.9
Page 1 (of 1)
S u r v e y i n g
E q u i p m e n t .
131
Halterung für OPC Datenfunkmodem
NiceCom 800
Zur Datenübertragung per Funk muss ein Modem an den Tachymeter und ein weiteres an den externen
Feldrechner (Laptop, Tablet-PC, Handheld usw.) angeschlossen werden.
Bild 1
Für das Modem NiceCom 800 haben wir für diese Anwendung der Geometer eine spezielle Halterung entwickelt:
Bild 2
Bild 3
• Sekundenschnelles Einlegen und Abnehmen des Modems aus der Halterung:
- durch Schnellverriegelung über Drehverschluss
- durch Klettbandsicherung
• Lasche zum Einhängen am Instrumentenstativ (Bild 1)
• Das Modem ist gegen Herausfallen gesichert und kann auch kopfüber transportiert werden (z.B. am
GPS- oder Prismenstab)
Die Halterung ist in 2 weiteren Ausstattungsvarianten zur Befestigung an zylindrischen Stäben erhältlich:
• mit Alu-Klammer und Schraubklemmung
• mit Federstahlklemme und Klettbandsicherung
Bild 5
Bild 4
In diesen beiden Varianten bietet die Halterung insgesamt folgende Befestigungsmöglichkeiten:
• am Instrumentenstativ:
- durch Einhängen an Lasche am Stativkopf (Bild 1)
- durch Anklemmen an einer Stativbein-Strebe mit Federstahlklemme (Bild 2) oder Alu-Klammer mit
Schraubklemmung (Bild 3)
• am GPS- oder Prismenstab:
- durch Anklemmen an den Stab mit Federstahlklemme (Bild 4) oder Alu-Klammer mit Schraubklemmung
(Bild 5)
Ausstattung:
Halterung NiceCom 800 mit
Bild 6
Bild 7
Bild 8
Gewicht
Order-No.
Lasche zum Einhängen am Stativkopf (Bild 6)
140 g
5300
83,- €
Zusätzlich mit Alu-Klammer und Schraubklemmung
für Stab-ø 18 - 32 mm (Bild 7)
250 g
5302
143,- €
Zusätzlich mit Alu-Klammer und Schraubklemmung
für Stab-ø 30 - 45 mm
270 g
5305
143,- €
Zusätzlich mit Federstahlklemme und Klettbandsicherung
für Stab-ø 20 - 35 mm (Bild 8)
160 g
5325
88,- €
Verwendung der NiceCom-Halterung mit Panasonic Toughbook CF-19 und
DRS Amor X10
Wird ein Feldrechner verwendet, muss zwischen ihm und dem NiceCom-Modem eine dauernde
Kabelverbindung vorhanden sein.
Bei oftmaligem Wechsel zwischen dem Einsatz am Leichtstativ, GPS-Stab und Prismenstab, ist es sinnvoll,
dass die Halterungen für beide Geräte eine Einheit bilden.
Deshalb ist es möglich beide Halterungen fest miteinander zu verschrauben.
Eine Trennung der Kabelverbindung ist bei einem Einsatzwechsel dann nicht mehr notwendig.
Alle Halterungen für den CF-18/19 (Order-No. 5170 – 5174, s. Catalogue 2014/12.6 S. 1) und den
DRS Amor X10 (Order-No. 5250-5254, s. Catalogue 2014/12.4 S. 1)
sind bereits entsprechend vorbereitet.
Von den obigen NiceCom-Halterungen eignen sich die Order-No. 5300, 5302 und 5305.
2014/12.10
2014/XX.X
Page 1 (of 1)
S u r v e y i n g
E q u i p m e n t .
132
Halterung für Trimble Datenfunk
„External Radio 2.4 GHz“
Zur Verwendung des Trimble Funkgeräts „External Radio 2.4 GHz“ mit unseren Schraubklemmen.
Wenn Sie einen Rechner oder Controller mit einer von unseren Schraubklemmen an Stäben, Stativbeinen
usw. befestigen und über das Trimble Funkgerät die Daten zum Tachymeter austauschen, ist keine weitere
Klemme notwendig.
Sie können die Halterung für den Datenfunk einfach zusätzlich an die Klemme des Rechnerhalters
anschrauben. Das Funkgerät ist durch die rückseitige "Nase" an der Lasche gegen Herausfallen gesichert.
Der stabile Halter aus Aluminium wird mit passenden Schrauben geliefert.
Funkgeräte-Halter für Trimble External Radio 2.4 GHz
2014/12.11
2014/XX.X
Order-No. 5005
15,- €
Page 1 (of 1)
S u r v e y i n g
E q u i p m e n t .
133
Halterung für Getac V100
Zur universellen Verwendung der Rechner im Feld
• Verschiedene, im Schwerpunkt angebrachte Innengewinde zum Anschluss an Stativen, GPS- und
Prismenstäben usw.:
- 1/4“- Fotogewinde
- M8 (3/8“ auf Wunsch)
- 2 x M5-Gewinde für Gelenk-Kugel ø25 mm
• Sekundenschnelles Einlegen und Abnehmen der Rechner aus der Halterung durch Schnellverriegelung
mit Drehhebel-Verschluss
• Transport der Rechner in der Halterung auch kopfüber möglich (sowohl in Laptop- als auch in Tablet-PCFunktion)
• Ohne weiteres Zubehör kann die Halterung verwendet werden:
- mit handelsüblichen Fotostativen mit 1/4“-Gewinde
- mit unserem Leichtstativ (s. Catalogue 2014/13.1 S. 1-3)
• Gewicht: 490 g
Halterung für Getac V100
Order-No. 5110
170,– €
Komplett-Set zur Befestigung an Stativbeinen
sowie GNSS- und Prismenstäben
Halterung für Getac V100 + Stabklemme + Langloch-Traverse + Kugelkopf mit Langloch-Feststellschraube
Bei ausschließlicher Verwendung an Stäben mit ø 32 mm (1¼“) empfehlen wir zur Schonung des
Rohrmaterials die Verwendung der speziell auf diesen Durchmesser abgestimmten Klemme mit der OrderNo. 5112.F.
für Stäbe mit ø 18-32 mm:
Komplett-Set für Getac V100 mit Langloch-Traverse, ø 18-32 mm
Order-No. 5112.1
293,- E
Order-No. 5112.F
300,- €
Order-No. 5112.2
300,- E
für Stäbe mit ø 32 mm:
Komplett-Set für Getac V100 mit Langloch-Traverse, ø 32 mm
für Stäbe mit ø 30-45 mm (ohne Abb.):
Komplett-Set für Getac V100 mit Langloch-Traverse, ø 30 – 45 mm
2014/12.12
2014/XX.X
Page 1 (of 3)
S u r v e y i n g
E q u i p m e n t .
134
Eine Langloch-Traverse mit seitlich angebrachtem 12 mm-Bolzen ermöglicht die Verwendung des V100
mit dem Befestigungssystem der Firma SECO. Vorteil dieses Systems ist die schnelle Abkoppelung des
Rechners samt Halterung vom Stab. Die Klemme verbleibt hierbei am Stab.
Es können auch alle anderen SECO-Klemmen (s. Catalogue 2014/12.3 Page 1 + 2) verwendet werden.
zum Stab.
Klemmen von SECO
Order-No. 1890
60,50 €
Order-No. 1890.1
66,- €
Order-No. 5236
58,- €
Langloch-Traverse
Anmerkung:
2014/7.4)
g
alterun
Trageh Easy"
y
rr
a
"C
014/14.1
logue 2
ta
a
C
.
s
tab
GNSS-Se"
"Fram 014/7.4
logue 2
s. Cata
2014/12.12
2014/XX.X
tativ
Leichts oing"
"easy ge 2014/13.1
logu
s. Cata
Page 2 (of 3)
S u r v e y i n g
E q u i p m e n t .
135
Getac V100 auf Instrumenten-Stativen,
Kugelkopf M8
In die obige Halterung Nr. 5110 wird ein Kugelkopf M8 geschraubt und mit einer Sechskantmutter (SW13)
M8
• Gewicht: 140 g
Order-No. 5081
48,- €
M8
M8
Durch die zylindrische Form des Gehäuses (Ø 32 mm) kann das "free move" auch auf Stativen mit zylindrischer Aufnahme verwendet werden (Funktion s. unter Adapterzapfen Nr. 383 und Catalogue 2012/13.1 S. 2).
Oben besitzt das Gelenk ein M8-Außengewinde. Hierauf wird die Rechner-Halterung geschraubt und mit
einer Kontermutter gesichert.
Der Adapter unten am „free move“ ist mit einem M8-Innengewinde aus Edelstahl ausgestattet, womit das
Kugelgelenk M8 die gleichen Anwendungsmöglichkeiten bietet wie der obige Kugelkopf M8
M8
M8
Order-No. 6210.M8
77,- €
Adapterzapfen
5/8”
Order-No. 383
24,50 €
Stativplatte
M8
• unten ein 5/8”-Innengewinde zur Verwendung auf allen Instrumentenstativen mit planem Stativkopf und
5/8”-Anzugsschraube.
Order-No. 3035.1
42,- €
5/8”
2014/12.12
2014/XX.X
Page 3 (of 3)
S u r v e y i n g
E q u i p m e n t .
136
Komplett-Set:
Halterung und Teleskopstab
für Trimble GeoXH und GeoXR
bestehend aus:
• Halterung für Trimble GeoXH/XR
• Kugelkopf M8
• Teleskopstab DUO
• Dosenlibelle mit Klettverschluss
Order-No.
Order-No.
Order-No.
Order-No.
5415
5081
5420
5425
Komplett-Set
Order-No. 5410
345,- €
Einzelne Komponenten:
Halterung für Trimble GeoXH und GeoXR
•
•
•
•
•
Aus stabilem Kunststoff gefertigt.
Sichere Fixierung des GeoHX/GeoXR auf der Halterung durch Führungssifte und Gummizug.
Transport des Rechners in der Halterung auch kopfüber möglich.
Sekundenschnelles Einlegen und Abnehmen durch Gummizug, für Rechts- und Linkshänder.
Unterhalb der Antenne angebrachte Innengewinde zum Anschluss an Kugelkopf, Stativen und Stäben:
- 1/4"-Gewinde
- M8-Gewinde
- 2 x M5 Gewinde (z.B. für RAM 1"- Kugel)
• Gewicht: 200 g
Halterung für Trimble GeoXH/GeoXR
2014/12.13
2014/XX.X
Order-No. 5415
105,- €
Page 1 (of 4)
S u r v e y i n g
E q u i p m e n t .
137
Kugelkopf M8
Der Kugelkopf wird in das M8-Innengewinde der Halterung Nr. 5415 geschraubt und mit einer
Sechskantmutter (SW13) gesichert. Er ermöglicht die sekundenschnelle optimale Einstellung des
Rechners bezüglich Ergonomie und Sonnenlichteinstrahlung.
• einfache und stabile Klemmung der gewählten Position.
• M8-Innengewinde im Unterteil zum Aufschrauben auf:
- Teleskopstab DUO (s. unten)
- sonstige Stäbe mit M8-Außengewinde
- unser Leichtstativ "easy going"
• Gewicht: 140 g
Order-No. 5081
48,- €
Teleskopstab DUO
Leichter und stabiler Teleskopstab zur genauen Stationierung des GeoXH/GeoXR über bzw. am
Objektpunkt. Seine Verwendung stellt sicher, dass die möglichen Genauigkeiten des Geräts bei der
Einzelpunkt-bestimmung auch tatsächlich erreicht werden.
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Telekopstab komplett aus GFK/CFK, dadurch sehr leicht und robust
Angenehmes Handling auch bei kühler Witterung
Länge von 1,10 bis 1,60 m in Dezimeterschritten einstellbar.
Zuverlässige Einstellung der Höhe mit Steckclip und zusätzlicher Schraubklemmung. Dadurch keine
unbeabsichtigtes "Einsinken" des Teleskops möglich.
incl. Gummikugel zum Aufsetzen auf Objektpunkt, ideal auch für glatte oder empfindliche Oberflächen.
Oben und unten mit M8-Außengewinde. Somit kann der Kugelkopf und die Gummikugel beliebig
getauscht und der Stab in beiden Lagen verwendet werden.
Außenrohr Ø: 26 mm, Innenrohr Ø: 20 mm
Gewicht: 430 g
Teleskopstab DUO (ohne Dosenlibelle)
2014/12.13
2014/XX.X
Order-No. 5420
172,- €
Page 2 (of 4)
S u r v e y i n g
E q u i p m e n t .
138
Dosenlibelle mit Klettverschluss
Dosenlibelle zum Lotrechtstellen des Teleskopstabes DUO
•
•
•
•
zum Anbringen an alle Stäbe bis Ø 35 mm mit Klettverschluss
Kunststofflibelle mit Genauigkeit 50'
wird justiert ausgeliefert (nicht justierbar)
Gewicht: 25 g
Dosenlibelle mit Klettverschluss
Order-No. 5425
20,- €
Grundträger für KiLas® LC
Lattenrichter mit Klettverschluss und Aufnahme-Möglichkeit von Trägern für Laserstreckenmessern.
Bei Objektpunkten, über die der GeoXH/GeoXR nicht direkt aufgehalten werden kann, ist i.d.R. die
Messung von Exzentrumstrecken notwendig.
Unser Grundträger für den KiLas®LC kann an alle Stäbe bis Ø 35 mm befestigt werden. Bei seiner
Verwendung ist keine Dosenlibelle (Order-No. 5425) erforderlich.
Grundträger für KiLas® LC
Order-No. 2750
45,- €
Trägerhalter sind für viele Modelle von Laserstreckenmesser erhältlich. Sie können in den Grundträger
eingeführt und gesichert werden. Über eine Stellschraube lässt sich der Kippwiderstand einstellen.
s. Catalogue 2014/11.5
Verwendung des GeoXH/GeoXR auf Stativen
Bei speziellen Messeinsätzen kann die Verwendung eines Statives gewünscht sein.
Mit den an der Halterung Nr. 5415 vorhandenen Innengewinden kann der Rechner ohne weiteres auf
handelsüblichen Stativen mit 1/4"- oder 3/8"-Fotogewinden verwendet werden.
Ideal lässt sich der GeoXH/GeoXR zusammen mit unserem sehr leichten und äußerst robusten Stativ
"easy going" verwenden.
s. Catalogue 2014/13.1
- ohne Kugelkopf Leichtstativ easy going
2014/12.13
2014/XX.X
Order-No. 5351.2
220,- €
Page 3 (of 4)
S u r v e y i n g
E q u i p m e n t .
139
Gummikugel mit Gewinde
Zum Aufsetzen auf Objektpunkt
•
•
•
•
keine Gefährdung von Mensch und Sache wie bei einer Metallspitze
ideal auch für glatte und empfindliche Oberflächen
M8-Innengewinde zur beidseitigen Verwendung am Teleskopstab DUO
Ø 25 mm
Gummikugel, M8-Innengewinde
Order-No. 5422
9,- €
Spitze mit gehärtetem Endstück
Kann anstelle der Gummikugel verwendet werden
• Sechskant-Material (SW17) als An- und Abschraubhilfe.
• M8-Innengewinde zur beidseitigen Verwendung am Teleskopstab DUO
• Länge: 25 mm.
Spitze gehärtet, M8-Innengewinde
Order-No. 5423
15,- €
Justierbare Dosenlibelle im Halter
•
•
•
•
•
•
Robuste Aluminium-Konstruktion mit Reduzierhülse aus Kunststoff
zur Befestigung am äußeren Teleskopteil (Ø 26 mm)
einfache Höhenverstellung des Halters am Stab mit Inbus-Schlüssel (5 mm)
Justierung der Libelle mit 2,5 mm-Inbusschlüssel
Genauigkeit der Libelle: 30’
Glaslibelle in Aluminium-Fassung
Halter mit Dosenlibelle 30’
2014/12.13
2014/XX.X
Order-No.3008.30R26
49,50 €
Page 4 (of 4)
S u r v e y i n g
E q u i p m e n t .
140
Halterung für Feldrechner Trimble Juno
zur Verwendung mit RAM-Mount
Zum Aufsetzen auf Objektpunkt
• schnelles Einlegen und Herausnehmen des Juno
- durch seitliches Einführen
- oder Einschieben in die Schale von oben
• sicherer und gehäuseschonender Halt des Feldrechners durch beidseitigen Moosgummi
• 2 Bohrungen zur Befestigung des RAM-Mount Adapters RAM-B-238
(Lochabstand 48,5 mm / Kugel-Ø 1")
• Ergonomisch günstiger Stand des Rechners auf dem Schreibtisch mit RAM-Adapter
• Gewicht: 60 g (ohne RAM-Adapter-B-238)
Halterung für Trimble Juno
mit Befestigungsmaterial
für Adapter RAM-B-238
Order-No. 5430
40,- €
Order-No. 5431
52,- €
• Gewicht: 100 g (mit RAM-Adapter-B-238)
Halterung für Trimble Juno
für Adapter RAM-B-238
2014/12.14
2014/XX.X
Page 1 (of 1)
S u r v e y i n g
E q u i p m e n t .
141
Bohnenstingl
Halterungen für den Panasonic CF-H2
Seite 1 von 6
1
Panasonic Toughbook
CF-H2 Field
(B x H x T)
274 x 268 x 58 mm
Gewicht: ca. 1,58 Kg
Der CF-H2 wird in die Halterung eingelegt und mit einem Drehhebel
sekundenschnell stabil fixiert und gegen Herausfallen gesichert.
Alle Schnittstellen und die beiden Batteriefächer bleiben frei zugänglich,
nur die Kontaktleiste für die Dockingstation wird abgedeckt.
An der Unterseite der Halterung befinden sich die Innengewinde
2 x M5 (ggf. für RAM-Mount), M8 und die Fotogewinde 1/4" und 3/8".
Damit kann der CF-H2 mit folgendem Zubehör universell verwendet werden.
Halterung für
Panasonic CF-H2
Best.-Nr. 5230
170,- €
CF-H2 am Stab mit Stabklemme, Langloch-Traverse und
Kugelkopf M8:
2
Die Langloch-Traverse ermöglicht eine optimierte Anbringung des
Rechners mit geringstem Abstand zum Stab.
Mit Hilfe des Kugelkopfs kann er vor dem Stab oder seitlich
montiert und das Display optimal geneigt werden.
Zur Anbringung am Stab stehen verschiedene Klammern zur
Verfügung.
Bei ausschließlicher Verwendung eines Stabs mit Ø 32 mm
empfehlen wir zur Schonung des Materials die Best.-Nr. 5232.F
CF-H2 vor
dem Prismen- oder GNSS-Stab
CF-H2 seitlich
am Prismen- oder GNSS-Stab
CF-H2 am Bein
des Instrumentenstativs
3
Klemme für Stäbe
von Ø 18 bis 32 mm
Kugelkopf M8
und Kontermutter
Halterung für
Panasonic CF-H2
Halterung für CF-H2 komplett mit LanglochTraverse, Kugelkopf und Stabklemme (Ø 18 bis 32 mm)
Best.-Nr. 5235.1
Best.-Nr. 5081.3
Best.-Nr. 5230
Set Best.-Nr. 5232.1
70,- €
53,- €
170,- €
293,- €
Klemme für Stäbe
mit Ø 32 mm
Kugelkopf M8
und Kontermutter
Halterung für
Panasonic CF-H2
Halterung für CF-H2 komplett mit LanglochTraverse, Kugelkopf und Stabklemme (Ø 32 mm)
Best.-Nr. 5235.F
Best.-Nr. 5081.3
Best.-Nr. 5230
Set Best.-Nr. 5232.F
77,- €
53,- €
170,- €
4
2014/12.15
2014/XX.X
300,- €
Page 1 (of 6)
S u r v e y i n g
E q u i p m e n t .
142
Bohnenstingl
Seite 2 von 6
5
Die Langloch-Traverse mit 12 mm-Bolzen ermöglicht die Verwendung des CF-H2 mit dem
Befestigungssystem der Firma SECO. Vorteil dieses Systems ist die schnelle Abkoppelung des
Rechners samt Halterung vom Stab.
Es können alle bereits evtl. vorhandenen SECO-Klemmen verwendet werden.
Das Langloch in der Traverse erlaubt eine optimierte Anbringung des Rechners mit geringstem
Abstand zum Stab.
Die Verwendung eines Kugelkopfes ist nicht notwendig, da beim SECO-System die Neigung mit
dem Raststift in 30°-Schritten verstellt werden kann.
CF-H2 seitlich
am Prismen- oder GNSS-Stab
6
Claw-Klemme von SECO,
Langloch-Traverse
mit 12 mm-Bolzen
und Raststift,
Halterung für
Panasonic CF-H2
Best.-Nr. 1890.1
Best.-Nr. 5236
Best.-Nr. 5230
66,- €
58,- €
170,- €
Halterung für CF-H2 komplett mit LanglochTraverse und Claw-Klemme von SECO
2014/12.15
2014/XX.X
Page 2 (of 6)
S u r v e y i n g
E q u i p m e n t .
143
Bohnenstingl
Seite 3 von 6
CF-H2 auf Leichtstativ "easy going"
mit Kugelkopf M8:
7
Die Verwendung des CF-H2 auf unserem Leichtstativ "easy
going" ermöglicht ein sehr elegantes und einfaches Handling des
CF-H2.
Ein Versetzen des Rechners mit dem Stativ ist aufgrund des sehr
geringen Gewichts einhändig möglich.
Mit Hilfe des Kugelkopfes kann der Rechner bezüglich Ergonomie
und Sonnenlichteinstrahlung sekundenschnell optimal eingestellt
werden. Hierzu muss eine Sterngriffschraube kurz gelöst und wieder angezogen werden.
CF-H2 auf
Leichtstativ "easy going"
Näheres zum Leichtstativ
"easy going"
siehe
Katalog 2014/13.1
8
Kugelkopf M8
mit Kontermutter M8
Halterung für
Panasonic CF-H2
Best.-Nr. 5351.2
Best.-Nr. 5081
Best.-Nr. 5230
220,- €
48,- €
170,- €
Halterung für CF-H2
mit Kugelkopf M8
auf Leichtstativ "easy going"
mit Kugelgelenk "free move":
9
Das Kugelgelenk "free move" unterscheidet sich vom oben
beschriebenen Kugelkopf:
Eine starke Feder erzeugt einen stetigen Druck auf die Kugel des
Gelenks. Der Rechner kann ohne Lösen und Anziehen einer
Feststellschraube in Position gebracht und bedient werden.
Dies ist die schnellste Möglichkeit den Rechner durch Drehen und
Kippen für die optimale Bedienung und Ablesbarkeit des Displays
auszurichten.
Durch die zylindrische Form des Gehäuses (Ø 32 mm) kann das
"free move" auch auf Stativen mit zylindrischer Aufnahme
verwendet werden (s. Nr. 15).
CF-H2 auf
Näheres zum Leichtstativ
"easy going"
und
Kugelgelenk "free move"
siehe
Katalog 2014/13.1
10
Kugelgelenk M8 "free move"
mit Kontermutter M8 und
Adapter mit M8-Innengew.
Halterung für
Panasonic CF-H2
Best.-Nr. 5351.2
Best.-Nr. 6210.M8
Best.-Nr. 5230
220,- €
77,- €
170,- €
mit Kugelgelenk "free move"
auf Leichtstativ "easy going"
2014/12.15
2014/XX.X
Page 3 (of 6)
S u r v e y i n g
E q u i p m e n t .
144
Bohnenstingl
Seite 4 von 6
CF-H2 mit Spezialstab "Frame":
11
Die Lage des Rechners zentrisch in der Stabachse erlaubt ein
angenehmeres Arbeiten als bei seitlich am Stab angebrachten
Rechnern.
Auch das Tragen über längere Strecken fällt einfacher als bei
exzentrisch am Stab montierten Rechnern.
Zudem ist der CF-H2 durch den Rahmen geschützt.
Der Kugelkopf ermöglicht die optimale Stellung bezüglich
Näheres zum
GNSS-Stab "Frame"
siehe
Katalog 2014/7.4
12
GNSS-Stab "Frame"
Best.-Nr. 5480
390,- €
13
Kugelkopf M8
mit Kontermutter M8
Halterung für
Panasonic CF-H2
Best.-Nr. 5081
Best.-Nr. 5230
48,- €
170,- €
mit KugelKopf M8
auf Spezialstab "Frame"
Die Halterung Nr. 5230 kann über das
1/4"- oder 3/8"-Fotogewinde direkt an ein
handelsübliches Fotostativ angeschlossen
werden.
Halterung für
Panasonic CF-H2
Best.-Nr. 5230
mit Kugelkopf M8
auf Fotostativ
170,- €
2014/12.15
2014/XX.X
Page 4 (of 6)
S u r v e y i n g
E q u i p m e n t .
145
Bohnenstingl
Seite 5 von 6
14
CF-H2 auf handelsüblichem
Stabstativ mit zylindr. Aufnahme
Adapterzapfen M8,
Durchm. 25 mm
Kugelkopf M8
mit Kontermutter M8
Halterung für
Panasonic CF-H2
Best.-Nr. 383
Best.-Nr. 5081
Best.-Nr. 5230
24,50 €
48,- €
170,- €
Ø 32 mm, Kontermutter M8
Halterung für
Panasonic CF-H2
Best.-Nr. 6215
Best.-Nr. 5230
48,- €
170,- €
Stativplatte 5/8",
Edelstahl
Kugelkopf M8
mit Kontermutter M8
Halterung für
Panasonic CF-H2
Best.-Nr. 3035.1
Best.-Nr. 5081
Best.-Nr. 5230
42,- €
48,- €
170,- €
Stativplatte 5/8",
Edelstahl
Halterung für
Panasonic CF-H2
Best.-Nr. 3035.1
Best.-Nr. 6210.M8
Best.-Nr. 5230
42,- €
77,- €
170,- €
Das Gehäuse des
Kugelgelenks "free move"
ist zylindrisch ausgeführt
(Ø 32 mm) und kann ohne
zusätzlichen Adapter in die
Aufnahme des Stabstativs
eingesetzt werden
(s. auch Nr. 9 + 10).
15
Stabstativ mit zylindr. Aufnahme
mit Adapterzapfen M8 und
Kugelkopf M8
auf Stabstativ
mit Kugelgelenk "free move"
auf Stabstativ
16
Instrumentenstativ
Halterung für CF-H2 mit
Stativplatte u. Kugelkopf M8
auf Instrumentenstativ
17
Instrumentenstativ
2014/12.15
2014/XX.X
mit Stativplatte und
Page 5 (of 6)
S u r v e y i n g
E q u i p m e n t .
146
Bohnenstingl
Seite 6 von 6
Halterung CF-H2 mit Tragegurt
18
Die Halterung Nr. 5230 für den CF-H2 kann auf einfache Weise mit einem 2-Punkt-Gurt oder einem Kreuzgurt verwendet werden.
Hierzu wird an der Halterung ein Schiebe-Adapter montiert. An diesem wiederum lassen sich 2 Haltebügel und der Tragegurt befestigen.
Aufgrund der Geometrie der Haltebügel hängt die Halterung mit dem Rechner waagrecht. Das Display ist komplett einsehbar und eine
Stiftbedienung ohne Behinderung durch den Gurt möglich.
Bei einer Verwendung der Halterung am Stab oder auf einem Stativ können die Bügel samt Tragegurt sekundenschnell abgeschraubt werden.
Der Schiebe-Adapter kann eingefahren werden und somit nicht störend an der Halterung verbleiben.
Bei Tragegurten, die direkt am Rechnergehäuse befestigt werden, ist es zeitaufwändig die Tragegurte zu entfernen.
Bei unserem System ist der CF-H2 mit dem Herausnehmen aus der Halterung vollständig vom Tragegurt abgekoppelt
19
CF-H2 mit
2-Punkt-Gurt
CF-H2 mit Kreuzgurt
Anstelle des Neoprengurts
kann ein bereits
vorhandener 2-Punkt-Gurt
verwendet werden (z.B.
von Kamera, Notebook
usw.)
20
Schiebe-Adapter mit
2 Haltebügel
Halterung CF-H2
mit Schiebe-Adapter und
2 Haltebügel
Neoprengurt mit 2 KunststoffKarabiner
Best.-Nr. 5238
Best.-Nr. 5231
Best.-Nr. 5780
85,- €
255,- €
28,- €
21,
Schiebe-Adapter mit
2 Haltebügel
Halterung CF-H2
mit Schiebe-Adapter und
2 Haltebügel
Kreuzgurt mit 2 Metall-Karabiner
Best.-Nr. 5238
Best.-Nr. 5231
Best.-Nr. 5790
85,- €
255,- €
45,- €
Wenn der Rechner über
eine längere Zeit getragen
werden muss, empfiehlt
sich die Verwendung des
Kreuzgurts. Das Gewicht
des Rechners wird
gleichmäßig auf den
Schulterbereich verteilt.
2014/12.15
2014/XX.X
Page 6 (of 6)
147
Bohne
ngen für ARMOR X7
wendung im Feld
ARMOR X7
(B x H x T):
225 x 150 x 54 mm
Gewicht:1,3 kg
Halterung für ARMOR X7
Best.-Nr. 4950
Spezialverme
Der ARMOR X7 wird in die Halterung eingelegt und mit einem Drehhebel sekundenschnell stabil fixiert und gegen Herausfallen ges
Durch die vorhandenen Anschlussgewinde 2 x M5 (RAM-Mount), M8 und die Fotogewinde 1/4" und 3/8"
kann der ARMOR X7 universell verwendet werden.
An der Halterung integriert sind die Bohrungen zum Anschrauben der Verbindungsstege für die Bügel des Tragegurts.
135,- €
ARMOR X7
Prismen- bzw. GNSS-Stab
dem Stab (Ø 18 - 32 mm) -
ARMOR X7
Prismen- bzw. GNSS-Stab
or dem Stab (Ø 32 mm) -
roduktsicht
Seite 1 von 5
Schritt
zurück vor
ARMOR X7
am Prismen- bzw. GNSS-Stab
- seitlich am Stab (Ø 18 - 32 mm) -
ARMOR X7
am Prismen- bzw. GNSS-Stab
- seitlich am Stab (Ø 32 mm) -
Exit
Halterung ARMOR X7,
Klemme (18 bis 32 mm)
Klemme für Stäbe
von Ø 18 bis 32 mm
Kugelkopf M8
und Kontermutter
Best.-Nr. 4951.1
Best.-Nr. 5014.18
Best.-Nr. 5081.3
Best.-Nr. 495
258,- €
70,- €
53,- €
135,- €
Halterung ARMOR X7,
Klemme (32 mm)
Klemme für Stäbe
von Ø 32 mm
Kugelkopf M8
und Kontermutter
Best.-Nr. 4951.F
Best.-Nr. 5014.F
Best.-Nr. 5081.3
265,- €
70,- €
53,- €
2014/12.16
Page 1 (of 4)
Halterung für ARMO
Halterung für ARMO
Best.-Nr. 495
135,- €
alle Preise zzgl. Mwst
Alle Preise z
148
Bohne
ngen für ARMOR X7
wendung im Feld
Seite 2 von 5
Spezialverme
Näheres zum Leich
"Easy going"
siehe
Katalog 2014/1
Halterung ARMOR X7,
komplett mit Leichtstativ "Easy
going" und Kugelkopf M8
ARMOR X7
403,- €
mit M8-Gew. und Gummikugeln
Kugelkopf M8
und Kontermutter
Best.-Nr. 5351.2
Best.-Nr. 5081
Best.-Nr. 4950
220,- €
48,- €
135,- €
Näheres zum
Leichtstativ "Easy g
und
Kugelgelenk "free m
siehe
Katalog 2014/1
Halterung ARMOR X7,
komplett mit
Leichtstativ "Easy going" und
ARMOR X7
432,- €
Best.-Nr. 5351.2
Best.-Nr. 6210.M8
Best.-Nr. 4950
220,- €
77,- €
135,- €
Näheres zum
GNSS-Stab "Fra
siehe
Katalog 2014/7
Kugelkopf M8
und Kontermutter
GNSS-Stab "Frame"
ARMOR X7
m GNSS-Stab "Frame"
roduktsicht
mit M8-Gew. und Gummikugeln
Best.-Nr. 5480
Best.-Nr. 5081
Best.-Nr. 4950
390,- €
48,- €
135,- €
Schritt
zurück vor
Exit
2014/12.16
Page 2 (of 4)
Alle Preise z
149
Bohne
ngen für ARMOR X7
wendung im Feld
Stativplatte 5/8",
Edelstahl
OR X7 auf handelsüblichem
Instrumentenstativ mit
5/8"-Anzugschraube
roduktsicht
Seite 3 von 5
Kugelkopf M8
und Kontermutter
Spezialverme
Best.-Nr. 3035.1
Best.-Nr. 5081
Best.-Nr. 4950
42,- €
48,- €
135,- €
Näheres zum
Kugelgelenk "free m
siehe
Katalog 2014/1
Best.-Nr. 3035.1
Best.-Nr. 6210.M8
Best.-Nr. 4950
42,- €
48,- €
135,- €
Stativplatte 5/8",
Edelstahl
Schritt
zurück vor
Exit
2014/12.16
Page 3 (of 4)
Alle Preise z
150
Bohne
ngen für ARMOR X7
wendung im Feld
Seite 4 von 5
Halterung ARMOR X7 mit Tragegurt
Die Halterung Nr. 4950 für den ARMOR X7 kann auf einfache Weise mit einem 2-Punkt-Gurt oder einem Kreuzgurt verwendet werden.
Hierzu werden an der Halterung 2 Verbindungsstege montiert. An diesen wiederum lassen sich 2 Haltebügel und der Tragegurt befestige
Aufgrund der Geometrie der Haltebügel hängt die Halterung mit dem Rechner waagrecht. Das Display ist komplett einsehbar und eine
Stiftbedienung ohne Behinderung durch den Gurt möglich.
Bei einer Verwendung der Halterung am Stab oder auf einem Stativ
können die Bügel samt Tragegurt sekundenschnell abgeschraubt werden.
Die Verbindungsstege können eingeklappt werden und somit nicht störend
an der Halterung verbleiben.
Bei Tragegurten, die direkt am Rechnergehäuse befestigt werden,
ist es zeitaufwändig die Tragegurte zu entfernen.
Bei unserem System ist der ARMOR X7 mit dem Herausnehmen
aus der Halterung vollständig vom Tragegurt abgekoppelt
Halterung ARMOR X7
t Tragegurt "Carry Easy"
roduktsicht
Spezialverme
Schritt
zurück vor
Exit
Neoprengurt mit 2 KunststoffKarabiner
mit 2 Verbindungsstegen
und 2 Haltebügeln
2 Verbindungsstege
+ 2 Haltebügel
Best.-Nr. 5780
Best.-Nr. 4953
Best.-Nr. 4954
Best.-Nr. 495
28,- €
190,- €
55,- €
135,- €
Kreuzgurt mit 2 Metall-Karabiner
mit 2 Verbindungsstegen
und 2 Haltebügeln
2 Verbindungsstege
+ 2 Haltebügel
Best.-Nr. 5790
Best.-Nr. 4953
Best.-Nr. 4954
Best.-Nr. 495
45,- €
190,- €
55,- €
135,- €
2014/12.16
Page 4 (of 4)
Halterung für ARMO
Halterung für ARMO
Alle Preise z
S u r v e y i n g
E q u i p m e n t .
151
Holder for Panasonic FZ-G1
For mobile use as an electronic field book
2014/12.17
Page 1 (of 26)
S u r v e y i n g
E q u i p m e n t .
152
Holder for Panasonic Thoughpad FZ-G1
Note: Different types of batteries
p. 3
For the universal use as electronic field book
p. 4
On camera tripod
p. 4
For the use with GNSS pole, reflector pole, surveying instrument tripod
rotating holder System Uni 168
With pole clamp and slot traverse
• ball joint
• with RAM 1"-ball
• with Trimble USB radio 2.4 GHz
p. 5
p. 6
p. 7
With pole clamp and RAM double joint
p. 8
For lateral mounting at a pole o. rotating holder with SECO clamps
p. 9
With SECO clamps and RAM double joint
p. 10
With special pole "Frame"
• with ball joint
• with RAM 1"-ball joint
p. 11
p. 11
With lightweight tripod "easy going"
• with ball joint
• with ball joint "free move"
• with Trimble USB radio 2.4 GHz
p.
p.
p.
p.
On camera tripod
• with ball joint
p. 16
p. 17
p. 18
On surveying instrument tripod
• with ball joint
• with RAM 1" ball joint
p. 19
p. 19
p. 20
On ranging pole
• with ball joint
• with RAM 1" ball joint
p. 21
p. 21
p. 22
For the mobile use with carrying strap
p. 23
More accessories
• Rotating tripod holder 168
• Hook for surveying instrument tripod
• Pen holder
p. 24
p. 25
p. 26
2014/12.17
12
13
14
15
Page 2 (of 26)
S u r v e y i n g
E q u i p m e n t .
153
Note - Different types of batteries
Two battery types - Two holders
Panasonic offers two battery types for the FZ-G1 with different capacities.
With the standard design of the holder, only the standard flat battery FZ-VZSU84U can be used. It is
helpful for users who value or require a construction as low as possible and want to use the computer
only with the standard battery, e.g. attached to a power supply in a car or excavator.
The more powerful battery FZ-VZSU88U is heavier and has a greater height. The XL design of the holder
for this battery is accordingly manufactured - also with larger corner guards. The Standard battery can
also be used without problems.
standard design
XL design
This holder can only be used with the flat
standard battery FZ-VZSU84U!
Order-No. 5845
This holder can be used with the flat
standard battery FZ-VZSU84U and the
bigger 9-cell battery FZ-VZSU88U!
XL - Order-No. 5846
XL design with FZ-G1 and
standard- battery FZ-VZSU84U
XL design with FZ-G1 and
9-cell battery FZ-VZSU88U
side view
2014/12.17
Page 3 (of 26)
S u r v e y i n g
E q u i p m e n t .
154
Holder for Panasonic Toughpad FZ-G1
For the universal use as an electronic field book
The FZ-G1 is inserted into the holder and fixed within seconds with a rotary lever and that way
secured against falling out. Transportation upside down is possible.
All interfaces remain freely accessible, only the contact strip for the docking station is covered.
Panasonic Toughpad
FZ-G1
(W x H x D)
270 x 188 x 19 mm
weight: ca. 1,1 kg
incl. standard battery
Without additional accessories, the holder can be used:
- with common camera tripods with 1/4" or 3/8"-thread
- with our light-weight tripod (s. catalogue 2014/13.1 p. 1-3)
back view
• black powder coated, light metal shell
• various female threads (mounted in the center of gravity) for
connection to tripods, ball joints, GNSS- and prism poles etc.:
- camera tripod threads 1/4" or 3/8"
- M8
• weight: 450 g
Holder for
Panasonic FZ-G1
This holder can be used only with the flat
Standard-battery FZ-VZSU84U!
Order-No. 5845
170,- €
• black powder coated, light metal shell
• various female threads (mounted in the center of gravity) for
connection to tripods, ball joints, GNSS- and prism poles etc.:
- camera tripod threads 1/4" or 3/8"
- M8
• weight: 475 g
XL-Holder for
Panasonic FZ-G1
This holder can be used with the flat battery FZ-VZSU84U
and the 9-celled battery FZ-VZSU88U!
XL - Order-No. 5846
175,- €
For the use with a camera tripod
The holder No. 5230 can be mounted with a 1/4"- or 3/8" camera thread directly onto a common
camera tripod.
A tilt adjustment is only possible if the tripod features a corresponding device.
Hama camera tripod
with quick changing
system and 1/4" thread
Holder for
Panasonic FZ-G1
Order-No. 6100.10
Order-No. 5845
170,- €
39,- €
XL - Order-No. 5846
175,- €
2014/12.17
Page 4 (of 26)
S u r v e y i n g
E q u i p m e n t .
155
To use with a GNSS-pole, reflector pole, surveying tripod
and rotating holder System 168
With pole clamp, Slot-Traverse and ball head M8
• The slot-Traverse enables an optimized application of the computer with the least distance
to the pole, both laterally and in front of it.
• With the ball head, the display can be ergonomically and regarding to the sunlight
tilted and rotated optimally.
• With the stable screw clamping the holder can be attached to poles with Ø 18 to 32 mm.
XL-Set Order-No. 5846.1: 298,- €
Set Order-No. 5845.1: 293,- €
Slot-Traverse with
clamp for poles with
Ø 18 to 32 mm
Ball head M8
with M8 star knob screw
and locknut
Holder for
Panasonic FZ-G1
Order-No. 5020.18
Order-No. 5081.3
Order-No. 5845
170,- €
70,- €
53,- €
XL - Order-No. 5846
175,- €
Information about the holder variations of standard and XL: see 12.17 page 3
For exclusive use of poles with a diameter of 32 mm, we recommend to protect the
pole material with a specially to this diameter adapted clamp.
Set Order-No. 5845.F: 300,- €
XL-Set Order-No. 5846.F: 305,- €
Slot-Traverse with
Ø 32 mm
Ball head M8
with M8 star knob screw
and locknut
Order-No. 5020.F
Order-No. 5081.3
53,- €
77,- €
Holder for
Panasonic FZ-G1
Order-No. 5845
170,- €
XL - Order-No. 5846
175,- €
Rotating holder System 168 s. catalogue 2014/12.2 page 1
2014/12.17
Page 5 (of 26)
S u r v e y i n g
E q u i p m e n t .
156
With pole clamp, Slot-Traverse and RAM- 1"- ball
• The slot traverse enables an optimized mounting of the computer with the smallest distance to the pole,
both laterally and in front.
• The RAM 1 "ball (rubber) is screwed in the center on the bottom of the holder. Other connections
(threads) are not available.
• A large thumbscrew on the ball mount allows the rotation of the holder and setting of the desired tension of the ball joint. The holder (including the ball) of the ball thread can also be separated by a simple
manner by full opening of the closure.
• With a ball joint, the display can be ergonomically and regarding to the sunlight tilted
and rotated optimally.
• With the support of the stable screw clamp the holder can be attached on poles with a diameter
from 18 to 32 mm.
rear view
slot traverse with
clamp for poles
from Ø 18 up to 32 mm
RAM-1"-ballthread with
M8 star handle screw
Holder for
Panasonic FZ-G1
with RAM-1" ball
Order-No. 5020.18
Order-No. 4800.M8S
Order-No. 5845.R
70,- €
55,- €
170,- €
XL - Order-No. 5846.R 175,- €
slot traverse with
clamp for poles
with Ø 32 mm
RAM-1"-ballthread with
Order-No. 5020.F
Order-No. 4800.M8S
70,- €
55,- €
Holder for
Panasonic FZ-G1
with RAM-1" ball
Order-No. 5845.R
170,- €
XL - Order-No. 5846.R 175,- €
2014/12.17
Page 6 (of 26)
S u r v e y i n g
E q u i p m e n t .
157
With pole clamp, slot-traverse and Trimble USB Radio 2.4 GHz
• The holder No. 5845.T is prepared to easily screw on the (by standard) available Trimble USB radio 2.4
GHz for Tablet PC. Complete mounting material included.
• The built-in radio rubberized RAM 1“- ball is located in the center of gravity. With this ball, the holder
with the 1" joint socket is connected to the slot-Traverse. Other connections (threads) are not available.
• The USB cable connection is made with the upper interface of the FZ-G1. For protection against the
weather, it is advisable to turn the computer so the USB port sits at the bottom and thus the
diametrically mounted radio antenna optimally facing upwards (see picture).
• A large thumb screw attached to the ball thread enables this rotation of the holder and the setting of
the desired tension of the ball joint. The holder (including the ball) also easily can be isolated from the
slot traverse by opening the closure completely.
• With the ball head, the display can ergonomically and regarding to the sunlight be
rear view
slot-traverse with
clamp for poles
Ø 18 to 32 mm
RAM-1" ball
thread with
Order-No. 5020.18
70,- €
Order-No. 4800.M8S
55,- €
Trimble
USB Radio
for Tablet-PC
Holder for
Panasonic FZ-G1
with fastening material
for Trimble USB radio
Order-No. 5845.T
170,- €
XL - Order-No. 5846.T
175,- €
Slot-Traverse with
Ø 32 mm
RAM-1"-ballconnection with
Order-No. 5020.F
Order-No. 4800.M8S
70,- €
55,- €
Trimble
USB radio
for Tablet-PC
Holder for
Panasonic FZ-G1
Order-No. 5845.T
170,- €
XL - Order-No. 5846.T 175,- €
2014/12.17
Page 7 (of 26)
S u r v e y i n g
E q u i p m e n t .
158
Holder FZ-G1 with pole clamp and RAM double joint
• Universal mounting option of the computer in front of the pole. Mounting on the side of the pole is not
possible due to the short length of the double joint.
• Because of the double joint, the holder can be freely turned and tilted. The desired position is fixed by
a central screw.
• Easy separation of the pole by releasing the central screw and taking of the holder.
• With the stable screw clamping the holder can be mounted to poles with Ø 18 to 32 mm.
pole clamp
Ø 18 - 32 mm
with RAM 1"- ball
RAM double joint
for 1"-ball
L = 80 mm
Holder for
Panasonic FZ-G1
with RAM-1" ball
Order-No. 4810.1
70,- €
Order-No. 4805.08
25,- €
Order-No. 5845.R
rear view
170,- €
XL - Order-No. 5846.R 175,- €
pole clamp
Ø 32 mm
with RAM 1"-ball
RAM double joint
for 1"-ball
L = 80 mm
Order-No. 4810.F
77,- €
Order-No. 4805.08
25,- €
Holder for
Panasonic FZ-G1
with RAM-1"-ball
Order-No. 5845.R
170,- €
XL - Order-No. 5846.R 175,- €
2014/12.17
Page 8 (of 26)
S u r v e y i n g
E q u i p m e n t .
159
Holder FZ-G1 for lateral mounting at the pole or on
the rotating holder with SECO clamps
The slot traverse with 12 mm bolts allows the use of the FZ-G1 with the mounting system from SECO.
Advantage of this system, is the quick decoupling of the pole of the computer together with the holder.
• It can be used with all already possibly existing SECO clamps (s. also catalogue 2014/12.3).
• The slot in the traverse allows an optimized installation of the computer with the smallest distance
to the pole.
• Because of the system it is possible to use the computer only on the side of the pole, not in
front of it.
• Using a ball joint is not necessary, since the inclination of the SECO system can be moved in 30 °
steps, with a latching pin.
Claw-Clamp from SECO
for poles with Ø 32 mm
slot traverse with
12 mm-bolt and latching pin,
with M8-star handle screw
Order-No. 1890.1
66,- €
Order-No. 5236
58,- €
Holder for
Panasonic FZ-G1
Order-No. 5845
170,- €
XL - Order-No. 5846
175,- €
More SECO-Universal-Clamps s. catalogue 2014/12.3 page 1
2014/12.17
Page 9 (of 26)
S u r v e y i n g
E q u i p m e n t .
160
Holder FZ-G1 with SECO-clamp and RAM double joint
• Universal mounting option of the computer in front of the pole. A lateral mounting is not possible due
to the short length of the double joint.
• With the double joint the holder can be tilted and rotated like desired. The desired position is fixed by
a central screw.
• Two ways to easily separate the holder from the pole:
- By releasing the double-joint central screw: holder is dimounted together with the RAM-1“ ball
and the double joint. The second RAM-1“ ball (with the SECO clamp) remains on the pole (image 1).
- With the push-button of the SECO-connection: the holder is dismounted with both of the RAM-1“balls and the double joint, only the SECO-Clamp remains on the pole (image 2)
image 1
image 2
back view
Claw-clamp from SECO
for poles with Ø 32 mm
Adapter SECO-Clamp
- RAM-1" ball
RAM-double joint
for 1" ball
L = 80 mm
Order-No. 1890.1
66,- €
Order-No. 4808
45,- €
Order-No. 4805.08
25,- €
Holder for
Panasonic FZ-G1
with RAM-1" ball
Order-No. 5845.R
170,- €
XL - Order-No. 5846.R
175,- €
All standard SECO-clamps (screw clamps and CLAW-clamps)
can be used s. catalogue 2014/12.3 page 1
2014/12.17
Page 10 (of 26)
S u r v e y i n g
E q u i p m e n t .
161
Holder FZ-G1 with special pole „Frame“
• The position of the computer centrally in the pole axis, allows working more comfortably than with a
computer which is mounted lateral to the pole.
• Also carrying over long distances is easier than with eccentric mounted computers. Also the FZ-G1 is
portected by the frame.
• The ball head / the ball joint makes an optimal position regarding ergonomy and exposure to
sunlight possible.
The connection from the computer holder to the pole can be made with a ball head M8 or a RAM 1"
ball joint.
e"
m
ra
"F
le .4
o
p /7
SS 14
GN e 20
e
u
h
t t og
ou tal
ab . ca
e
s
r
mo
GNSS pole
„Frame“
ball head M8-15
with locknut M8
Order-No. 5480
390,- €
Order-No. 5081
48,- €
Holder for
Panasonic FZ-G1
Order-No. 5845
170,- €
XL - Order-No. 5846
175,- €
"
me
ra
"F
le .4
o
p /7
SS 14
GN 20
e ue
h
t t og
ou tal
ab ca
e s.
r
o
m
RAM-1"ballconnection with
M8 stainless steel insert
GNSS pole
„Frame“
Order-No. 5480
390,- €
Order-No. 4800.M8i
50,- €
Holder for
Panasonic FZ-G1
with RAM-1" ball
back view
Order-No. 5845.R
170,- €
175,- €
2014/12.17
Page 11 (of 26)
S u r v e y i n g
E q u i p m e n t .
162
Holder FZ-G1 on lightweight tripod „easy going“
Using our light weight tripod "easy going" makes a very elegant and simple handling of the
computer possible.
A displacement of the computer with one hand is possible due to the very low weight of the tripod.
With ball joint M8
• With the help of the ball joint the computer can be optimally adjusted in terms of ergonomics and
sunlight exposure. For this, the star grip screw must be solved shortly.
• Weight of the ball joint M8: 160 g
g"
oin
yg
as 1
e
t " 13.
ou 4/
ab 201
n
tio gue
ma lo
or ta
inf s. ca
e
or
m
light weight tripod
„easy going“
with M8 male thread
ball joint M8-15
with locknut M8
Holder for
Panasonic FZ-G1
Order-No. 5351.2
220,- €
Order-No. 5081
48,- €
Order-No. 5845
170,- €
XL - Order-No. 5846
175,- €
With ball joint 3/8"
• The ball joint 3/8" has a 3/8"- female thread below and a 3/8"-stainless stell male thread above with a
length of 7,5 mm. Thus, also quick-change systems can be used, which are known from the
photo industry
• High holding force
• Weight of the ball joint 3/8": 250 g
g"
oin
yg
as 1
e
.
t " 13
ou 4/
ab 201
n
e
o
ti gu
ma lo
or ta
inf s. ca
e
or
m
light weight tripod
„easy going“
with M8 male thread
ball joint 3/8"
Order-No. 5351.2
220,- €
Order-No. 5084
65,- €
Holder for
Panasonic FZ-G1
Order-No. 5845
170,- €
XL - Order-No. 5846
175,- €
2014/12.17
Page 12 (of 26)
S u r v e y i n g
E q u i p m e n t .
163
Holder FZ-G1 on light weight tripod „easy going“ with ball joint "free move"
The ball joint „free move“ differs from the above-mentioned ball joint M8:
• A strong spring generates steady pressure on the ball of the joint. The computer can be placed and
operated without loosening and tightening a screw. This is the fastest way to align the computer by
turning and tilting for optimal use and readability of the display.
• For connecting the light weight tripod, the ball joint is available with an M8 or 3/8 female thread.
The connection with the holder No. 5845/5846 is realized with a M8 thread and locknut.
g"
in
go
sy
a
e 1
t " 13.
ou 4/
ab 201
n
tio gue
ma lo
or cata
f
n
i s.
e
or
m
light weight tripod
„easy going“
with M8 male thread
ball joint M8 „free move“
with locknut M8 and adapter
with M8- female thread
Holder for
Panasonic FZ-G1
Order-No. 5351.2
220,- €
Order-No. 6210.M8
77,- €
Order-No. 5845
170,- €
XL - Order-No. 5846
175,- €
g"
oin
yg
as 1
e
t " 13.
ou 4/
ab 201
n
tio gue
ma lo
or ta
inf s. ca
e
or
m
light weight tripod
„easy going“
with M8 male thread
with 3/8" female thread
Holder for
Panasonic FZ-G1
Order-No. 5352.2
220,- €
Order-No. 6210.38
77,- €
Order-No. 5845
170,- €
XL - Order-No. 5846
175,- €
Due to the cylindrical shape of the housing (Ø 32 mm), the "free move" also can
be used on tripods with cylindrical support.
2014/12.17
Page 13 (of 26)
S u r v e y i n g
E q u i p m e n t .
164
Holder FZ-G1 on light weight tripod „easy going“ with RAM 1" ball joint
• The RAM 1 "ball (rubber) is screwed on in the center on the bottom of the holder. Other connections
• A large thumbscrew on the ball mount allows the rotation of the holder and to set the desired tension
of the ball joint. So the holder (including ball) can also be separated simply from the tripod by opening
the closure completely.
• The ball joint allows the display to be optimally turned and tilted ergonomically regarding the sunlight.
• The ball socket joint, to screw onto the camera tripod, is available with M8 or 3/8 "female thread.
"
ing
o
yg
as
"e 3.1
t
1
ou 4/
ab 201
ion gue
t
ma lo
or ta
inf s. ca
e
r
o
m
light weight tripod
„easy going“
with M8 male thread
RAM-1"-ball thread
with
Order-No. 5351.2
220,- €
Order-No. 4800.M8i
50,- €
Holder for
Panasonic FZ-G1
with RAM-1" ball
Order-No. 5845.R
170,- €
175,- €
g"
in
go
sy
a
e 1
t " 13.
ou 4/
ab 201
n
tio gue
ma lo
or cata
f
n
i s.
e
or
rear view
m
light weight tripod
„easy going“
with 3/8" male thread
RAM-1"-ball thread
with 3/8" connection
Order-No. 5352.2
220,- €
Order-No. 4800.38i
50,- €
Holder for
Panasonic FZ-G1
with RAM-1"-ball
Order-No. 5845.R
170,- €
175,- €
2014/12.17
Page 14 (of 26)
S u r v e y i n g
E q u i p m e n t .
165
Holder FZ-G1 on light weight tripod „easy going“ with Trimble USB radio 2.4 GHz
• The holder No. 5845.T is prepared to easily screw on the (by standard) available Trimble USB radio 2.4
GHz for Tablet PC. Complete mounting material included.
• The built-in radio rubberized RAM 1“- ball is located in the center of gravity. With this ball, the holder
with the 1" joint socket is connected to the slot-Traverse. Other connections (threads) are not available.
• The USB cable connection is made with the upper interface of the FZ-G1. For protection against the
weather, it is advisable to turn the computer so the USB port sits at the bottom and thus the
diametrically mounted radio antenna optimally faces upwards (see picture).
• A large thumb screw attached to the ball thread enables this rotation of the holder and the setting of
the desired tension of the ball joint. The holder (including the ball) also easily can be isolated from the
slot traverse by opening the closure completely.
• With the ball head, the display can ergonomically and regarding to the sunlight be
rear view
g"
in
go
sy
a
e 1
t " 13.
ou 4/
ab 201
n
tio gue
ma lo
or ta
inf s. ca
e
or
m
light weight tripod
„easy going“
with M8 male thread
RAM-1"-ball thread
with
Order-No. 5351.2
220,- €
Order-No. 4800.M8i
50,- €
Trimble
USB Radio
for Tablet-PC
Holder for
Panasonic FZ-G1
Order-No. 5845.T
170,- €
175,- €
g"
oin
yg
as 1
e
.
t " 13
ou 4/
ab 201
n
e
o
ti gu
ma lo
or ta
inf s. ca
e
or
m
light weight tripod
„easy going“
with 3/8" male thread
RAM-1"-ball thread
with 3/8" connection
Order-No. 5352.2
220,- €
Order-No. 4800.38i
50,- €
Trimble
USB Radio
for Tablet-PC
Holder for
Panasonic FZ-G1
Order-No. 5845.T
170,- €
175,- €
2014/12.17
Page 15 (of 26)
S u r v e y i n g
E q u i p m e n t .
166
Holder Fz-G1 on camera tripod with ball joint
If no value is placed on absolute robustness (like it is the case with our tripod "easy going") you can
also use a modified camera tripod with M8 or 3/8" male thread as an inexpensive alternative instead.
The use of a solid ball head / ball joint is recommended in all cases.
With ball head M8
• With the help of the ball joint the computer can be optimally adjusted in terms of ergonomics and
sunlight exposure. For this, the star grip screw must be solved shortly.
• Weight of the ball joint M8: 160 g
Hama camera tripod with
M8 male thread
(without ball joint)
Ball joint M8-15
with locknut M8
Holder for
Panasonic FZ-G1
Order-No. 6100.M8
45,- €
Order-No. 5081
48,- €
Order-No. 5845
170,- €
XL - Order-No. 5846
175,- €
With ball head 3/8"
• The ball joint 3/8" has a 3/8"- female thread below and a 3/8"-stainless steel male thread on top
with a length of 7,5 mm. Thus, quick-change systems can be used, which are known from
the photo industry
• High holding force
• Weight of the ball joint 3/8": 250 g
Hama camera tripod 3/8"male thread
ball joint 3/8"
Order-No. 6100.38
45,- €
Order-No. 5084
65,- €
Holder for
Panasonic FZ-G1
Order-No. 5845
170,- €
XL - Order-No. 5846
175,- €
2014/12.17
Page 16 (of 26)
S u r v e y i n g
E q u i p m e n t .
167
Holder Fz-G1 on camera tripod with ball joint "free move"
The ball joint „free move“ differs from the ball joint M8 mentioned above:
• A strong spring generates steady pressure on the ball of the joint. The computer can be placed and
operated without loosening and tightening a screw. This is the fastest way to align the computer by
turning and tilting for optimal use and readability of the display.
• For connecting to the camera tripod, the ball joint is available with an M8 or 3/8 female thread. The
connection with the holder No. 5845/5846 is realized with a M8 thread and locknut.
M8 male thread
with M8- female thread
Holder for
Panasonic FZ-G1
Order-No. 6100.M8
45,- €
Order-No. 6210.M8
77,- €
Order-No. 5845
170,- €
XL - Order-No. 5846
175,- €
3/8" male thread
Order-No. 6100.38
45,- €
Order-No. 6210.38
77,- €
Holder for
Panasonic FZ-G1
Order-No. 5845
170,- €
XL - Order-No. 5846
175,- €
Due to the cylindrical shape of the housing (Ø 32 mm), the "free move" also can
be used on tripods with cylindrical support.
2014/12.17
Page 17 (of 26)
S u r v e y i n g
E q u i p m e n t .
168
Holder FZ-G1 on camera tripod with RAM 1" ball joint
• The RAM 1 "ball (rubber) is screwed on in the center on the underside of the holder. Other connectors
• A large thumbscrew on the ball mount allows the rotation of the holder and set the desired tension of
the ball joint. So the holder (including ball) can also be separated simply from the tripod by opening
the closure completely.
• The ball joint allows the display to be optimally turned and tilted ergonomically regarding the sunlight
• The ball socket joint to screw onto the camera tripod is available with M8 or 3/8 "female thread
M8 male thread
RAM-1"-ballthread
with
Holder for
Panasonic FZ-G1
with RAM-1" ball
Order-No. 6100.M8
45,- €
Order-No. 4800.M8i
50,- €
Order-No. 5845.R
170,- €
175,- €
rear view
3/8" male thread
RAM-1"-ball thread
Holder for
Panasonic FZ-G1
with RAM-1" ball
Order-No. 6100.38
45,- €
Order-No. 4800.38i
50,- €
Order-No. 5845.R
170,- €
175,- €
2014/12.17
Page 18 (of 26)
S u r v e y i n g
E q u i p m e n t .
169
Holder Fz-G1 on surveying instrument tripods
• Holder stands extremely stable, especially during prolonged stationary use.
• Use of already existing tripods with 5/8 "screw-tightening possible.
With ball head
M8
Lightweight instrument
tripod LIPF
5/8" thread
tripod plate 5/8",
with M8-male thread,
stainless steel
ball joint M8-15
with locknut M8
Weight: 160 g
Holder for
Panasonic FZ-G1
Order-No. 1972
55,- €
Order-No. 3035.1
42,- €
Order-No. 5081
48,- €
Order-No. 5845
170,- €
XL - Order-No. 5846
175,- €
tripod LIPF
5/8" thread
tripod plate 5/8",
with 3/8" male therad,
stainless steel
ball joint 3/8"
Weight: 250 g
Holder for
Panasonic FZ-G1
Order-No. 1972
55,- €
Order-No. 3035.3
42,- €
Order-No. 5084
65,- €
Order-No. 5845
170,- €
XL - Order-No. 5846
175,- €
3/8"
With ball joint "free move" (describtion see 12.17 page 13)
M8
tripod LIPF
5/8" thread
tripod plate 5/8",
with M8-male thread,
stainless steel
with M8 female thread
Order-No. 1972
55,- €
Order-No. 3035.1
42,- €
Order-No. 6210.M8
77,- €
tripod LIPF
5/8" thread
tripod plate 5/8",
stainless steel
Order-No. 1972
55,- €
Order-No. 3035.3
42,- €
Order-No. 6210.38
77,- €
Holder for
Panasonic FZ-G1
Order-No. 5845
170,- €
XL - Order-No. 5846
175,- €
3/8"
Holder for
Panasonic FZ-G1
Order-No. 5845
170,- €
XL - Order-No. 5846
175,- €
2014/12.17
Page 19 (of 26)
S u r v e y i n g
E q u i p m e n t .
170
rear view
With RAM 1" ball joint
M8
tripod LIPF
5/8" thread
tripod plate 5/8",
with M8-male therad,
stainless steel
RAM-1"-ballthread
with
Holder for
Panasonic FZ-G1
with RAM-1" ball
Order-No. 1972
55,- €
Order-No. 3035.1
42,- €
Order-No. 4800.M8i
50,- €
Order-No. 5845.R
170,- €
175,- €
3/8"
tripod LIPF
5/8" thread
tripod plate 5/8",
stainless steel
RAM-1"-ball thread
3/8"
Order-No. 1972
55,- €
Order-No. 3035.3
42,- €
Order-No. 4800.38i
50,- €
Holder for
Panasonic FZ-G1
with RAM-1" ball
Order-No. 5845.R
170,- €
175,- €
2014/12.17
Page 20 (of 26)
S u r v e y i n g
E q u i p m e n t .
171
171
Holder Fz-G1 on pole tripods
Use of already existing pole tripods with cylindrical support possible.
With ball head
M8
Holder for
Panasonic FZ-G1
pin adapter M8,
Ø 25 mm
ball head M8-15
with locknut M8
weight: 160 g
Order-No. 383
24,50 €
Order-No. 5081
48,- €
pin adapter M8,
Ø 25 mm
ball head 3/8"
Holder for
Panasonic FZ-G1
Order-No. 382
24,50 €
Order-No. 5084
65,- €
Order-No. 5845
170,- €
XL - Order-No. 5846
175,- €
Order-No. 5845
170,- €
XL - Order-No. 5846
175,- €
3/8"
With ball joint "free move", without additional adapter
M8
ball joint "free move"
Ø 32 mm
locknut M8
Order-No. 6215
48,- €
Holder for
Panasonic FZ-G1
Order-No. 5845
170,- €
XL - Order-No. 5846
175,- €
2014/12.17
Page 21 (of 26)
S u r v e y i n g
E q u i p m e n t .
172
Mit RAM 1" ball thread
M8
pin adapter M8,
Ø 25 mm
RAM-1"-ball thread
with
Holder for
Panasonic FZ-G1
with RAM-1" ball
Order-No. 383
24,50 €
Order-No. 4800.M8i
50,- €
Order-No. 5845.R
170,- €
175,- €
3/8"
rear view
pin adapter M8,
Ø 25 mm
RAM-1"-ballthread
3/8"
Holder for
Panasonic FZ-G1
mit RAM-1"ball
Order-No. 382
24,50 €
Order-No. 4800.38i
50,- €
Order-No. 5845.R
170,- €
175,- €
2014/12.17
Page 22 (of 26)
S u r v e y i n g
E q u i p m e n t .
173
For mobile use with carrying strap
The FZ-G1 can be used easily mobile with a 2-point-strap or a cross strap.
For this purpose, a strap adapter with a pair of brackets is mounted to the holder. On these the strap
can be hooked to.
Because of the geometry the holder hangs horizontally with the computer. The display is fully visible,
no belt hinders the operation of the touch screen.
With varying use of the holder at a pole or on a tripod it's not necessary to have the entire belt adapter
removed. The two brackets can be removed from the base plate in seconds while the adapter remains
on the holder.
Carrying straps which are usually attached directly to the computer casing, are often very time
consuming to remove.
When using our system, the FZ-G1 is dismounted from the carrying straps entirely by taking it
out of the holder.
Instead of the neoprene strap, an already existing 2-point-strap can be used (for example
camera, notebook, etc.)
strap adapter with
two mounting handels
neoprene strap with
2 plastic carabiners
Order-No. 5238
85,- €
Order-No. 5780
28,- €
Holder for
Panasonic FZ-G1
Order-No. 5845
170,- €
XL - Order-No. 5846
175,- €
If the computer has to be carried for a long time, the use of the cross shoulder stap is recommended.
The weight of the computer and holder is distributed evenly on the shoulder area.
strap adapter with
two mounting handels
cross strap with
2 metal carabiners
Order-No. 5238
85,- €
Order-No. 5790
45,- €
Holder for
Panasonic FZ-G1
Order-No. 5845
170,- €€
XL - Order-No. 5846
175,- €
2014/12.17
Page 23 (of 26)
S u r v e y i n g
E q u i p m e n t .
174
More accessories
Holder FZ-G1: Use with rotating tripod mount Uni 168
• Side Cylinder Ø 32 mm for screwing on the pole clamp (may be installed facing up or down).
• The counter weight of 2000 g ensures uniform loading of all tripod legs while rotating the holder.
• With fall protection (when removing the field computer).
For tripod heads diameter 168 mm, with machined terrace
or adapter ring (s. catalogue 2014/12.2)
•
•
•
•
Counterweight 2000 g, removable
Lateral. cylinder Ø 32 mm, can be mounted facing up or down
Suitable for clamps with Ø 18 - 32 mm and Ø 32 mm
Weight (without counterweight): 235 g
Rotating mount
System 168
Order-No. 1900.2
150,- €
For tripod heads diameter 168 mm, without machined terrace
•
•
•
•
Rotating mount
System 168
Counterweight 2000 g, removable
5 contact points made of plastic
Lateral. cylinder Ø 32 mm, can be mounted facing up or down
Suitable for clams with Ø 18 - 32 mm and Ø 32 mm
Rotating mount
• Weight (without counterweight): 240 g
Order-No. 1900.2P5
170,- € €
With central attachment of the tribrach, the tripod mount University 168 can be rotated
360 ° on the tripod head!
top view
2014/12.17
Page 24 (of 26)
S u r v e y i n g
E q u i p m e n t .
175
Holder FZ-G1 to hang on the surveying instrument tripod
With the retrofit hook, the holder can be hooked into the tabs at the top of the instrument tripod.
The additional support joint allows the optimal tilt adjustment of the display regarding its
exposure to sunlight.
On a desk, the computer can be set up optimal with the support joint also.
Hooks and support joint can remain screwed onto the holder when using a tripod.
Hook
• Fastening at the top of the holder with 2 knurled nuts
• Weight: 35 g
Hook for
retrofitting
Order-No. 5382
30,- €
Support joint
•
•
•
•
Support joint
for retrofitting
Tilt angle adjustable with wing screw
Padding of the support: rubber coating
Attaching to the back of the holder with 1 knurled nut
Weight: 100 g
Order-No. 5381
65,- €
Set Order-No. 5382.Set - 95,- €
Hook for
retrofitting
Support joint
for retrofitting
Order-No. 5382
30,- €
Order-No. 5381
65,- €
2014/12.17
Page 25 (of 26)
S u r v e y i n g
E q u i p m e n t .
176
Pen holder for retrofitting
The FZ-G1 allows it to store the Digitizer-pen at the left bottom side of the device. For a right-handed
user, who has to put the pen to the side a lot, this placement is not optimal.
With our retrofit pen holder the pen can be easily put to the side of the holder.
For this, the pen is inserted into a plastic ring and stands there erect and ready to use.
The pen holder is fixed by a single locking nut. All ports of the FZ-G1 are still accessible.
The pen holder can be mounted on the right or left side of the holder. It is accordingly prepared.
pen holder
pen holder for
computer holders
• Attachment to the side by a knurled nut
• Suitable for all pens with a Ø up to 9 mm
• Weight: 27 g
Order-No. 5840
20,- €
2014/12.17
Page 26 (of 26)
S u r v e y i n g
E q u i p m e n t .
177
Light tripod "easy going" for
field computers / notebooks
The ideal use of a field computer (not integrated in the total station/EDM) so far was the rotatable holder
directly mounted on the instrument tripod (our system 168, s. catalogue 2014/15.1 p.1).
Large amounts of data, which have to be available in the field today, as well as the desire to do the
complete data processing already in the field, have made it necessary to use a notebook with a strong
processor, high memory capacity and a large display. This is not possible directly on the instrument tripod because of its high weight. Our investigations during use have shown, that more measuring errors
are produced with a weight of more than 1 kg. Also the holder, together with the necessary counter
weight, is heavy and uncomfortable to use.
1/4“, M8, 3/8“
Another reason for separating the notebook from the instrument tripod is the modern way of measuring
– in the one-man-operation or with the robotic measuring the total station/EDM will be operated from a
control unit or with the notebook. The data transmission by cable will then be replaced by a Bluetooth or
radio connection without cable. The solution with radio, covers large distances (1 km) also.
However, when using a notebook (laptop, tablet-PC), which will be hold with a carrier system around the
neck, the relatively high weight of the machine is uncomfortable during longer use.
The use of the computer on a light tripod does resolve this problem too. Together with a data transmission without cable, the notebook can be placed anywhere near the total station/EDM. When measuring in
the robotic mode, the simple taking and placing of the computer directly at the object point is possible.
There is no disturbing heavy tools around the neck; the operator can do something else during
measuring.
The new computer tripod "easy going" was developed especially for this area of application. It is characterized by the following details of construction:
• very simple use and extremely robust
• very light (weight: 850 g)
• legs and middle strut made of very durable compound material: blend of carbon/fibre glass
• comfortable carrying of the tripod also during cold weather
• secure clamping of the middle strut with a high quality synthetic clamp and an eccentric clamp lever
• red coloured for better visibility in the traffic, on the construction sites etc.
• dimensions: 0,75 m (retracted) till 1,2 m (extended)
• many connections for different computer holders
• alternatively available with changeable pins of stainless steel or elastic balls
• 1 telescopic leg: The middle strut can be mounted lateral when working in tilted terrain.
So the tripod is also useable in extreme terrain.
2014/XX.X
2014/13.1
Page 1 (of 3)
S u r v e y i n g
E q u i p m e n t .
178
Light tripod easy going, 1 telescopic leg
tripod legs - end piece:
Connection
Computers/Notebooks/Holders
pins of stainless steel
Order-No.
5350.1
5351.1
5352.1
5353.1
1/4“ male thread
M8 male thread
3/8“ male thread
connection for joint ball ø 25 mm
220,– €
220,– €
220,– €
240,– €
elastic balls
Order-No.
5350.2
5351.2
5352.2
5353.2
220,– €
220,– €
220,– €
240,– €
Additional/retrofitting equipment
Changeable tripod legs:
pins of stainles steel with M6 female thread, 3 pieces
Order-No. 5355
20,– €
elastic balls with M6 female thread, 3 pieces
Order-No. 5356
20,– €
Tripod upper parts for connection of the computer or holders
Ball joint for tripod easy going
1/4"
A ball joint is screwed onto the tripod. On top of that, the computer holder.
• Easy and stable clamping of the ball joint with a star handle on the side
• Assures in a few seconds the optimum positioning of the computer regarding ergonomics and sun light.
• Maximum load: 10 kg / 15 kg / 35 kg
• Weight: 80 g / 140 g / 250 g
for light tripod with 1/4" thread (Order-No. 5350):
1/4"
ball joint 1/4"
Order-No. 5080
45,– €
ball joint M8 (15 kg)
Order-No. 5081
48,– €
ball joint M8 (35 kg) - without picture -
Order-No. 5082
65,– €
M8
for light tripod with M8 thread (Order-No. 5351):
M8
Ball joint „free move“ with adapter:
The ball joint + adapter is screwed on the lightweight tripod. The computer holder on top of that.
In contrast to the normal ball joint (see above), the computer may be brought into position and operated
without loosening and tightening a set screw with the "free move" ball joint. A strong spring generates a
steady pressure on the ball of the joint, whereby the machine remains in the chosen position.
This is the fastest way to align the computer by turning and tilting for optimal use and readability
of the display.
M8
• because of the cylindrical shape of the casing (Ø 32 mm), the "free move" also may be used on tripod
stands with cylindrical support (see picture)
• bottom: M8 female thread stainless steel insert
• for computers up to max. 3 kg
• weight: 170 g
for lightweight tripod with M8 thread (Order-No. 5351):
ball joint M8 „free move“ with adapter M8
Order-No. 6210.M8
77,– €
Order-No. 6210.38
77,– €
for lightweight tripod with 3/8" thread ( Order-No. 5352):
ball joint M8 „free move“ with adapter 3/8“
M8
3/8"
2014/XX.X
2014/13.1
Page 2 (of 3)
S u r v e y i n g
E q u i p m e n t .
179
Ball joint RAM Ø 1" (25,4 mm) for tripod easy going (Order-No. 5353)
The ball joint (System RAM) is screwed to any computer holder (2 x M5 thread).
• Easy insertion of the ball joint with the computer holder, in to the ball thread of the light tripod.
• Clamping of the ball joint with a turning lever
• Assures in a few seconds the optimum positioning of the computer for the measuring
• Suitable for the light tripods for computers up to 4 kg
• Weight: 40 g.
ball joint RAM Ø 1" (25,4 mm), with 2 M5 screws
Order-No. 5175
12,– €
Examples of application:
2014/XX.X
2014/13.1
Page 3 (of 3)
S u r v e y i n g
E q u i p m e n t .
180
Mini tripod with pole clamp
for easy and stable installation of short prism poles
• Quality materials and workmanship
• Tripod legs are foldable separately and remain in the chosen position. Rotational resistance adjustable
• Removable stainless steel balls as stand feet for safe operations and low sinking on soft grounds
• Spring clamp with straight legs for poles up to Ø 38 mm, clamping length 80 mm
• Height of the pole clamp with folded tripod legs: 28 cm
•
Weight 750 g
mini tripod with pole clamp
2014/XX.X
2014/13.2
Order-No. 6270
68,- €
Page 1 (of 1)
S u r v e y i n g
E q u i p m e n t .
181
Joint stand with pole clamp
for universal installation of prisms on short poles close to the object point
The prism with the joint stand + pole clamp can be placed very universal and fixed for the measurement.
Depending on the surface, various tripod feet are available, in which the joint stand is screwed on a M8
thread.
Joint stand:
• A central star knob screw clamps all moving parts of the joint stand
• Articulated arms made of anodized aluminum
• Action radius: 270 mm
Pole clamp:
• tilt- and turnable ball joint
• spring clamp with straight sides for poles up to Ø 38 mm, clamping length 80 mm
•
complete weight: 350 g
joint stand with pole clamp for poles up to Ø 38 mm
Order-No. 6280
150,- €
Tripod base
Depending on the application, the joint stand can be screwed on a M8 thread on various bases:
Steel ring
For the classic installation of the joint stand: The ring is placed in the object area on the ground and the
center point of the mini-vector on the recorded point, using the central clamp on the joint stand. The
object point can in this case be located anywhere in the action radius of the tripod joint (see images)
•
•
•
•
galvanized steel ring with M8 internal thread to screw in the tripod joint
3 rubber feet for stability of the ring
diameter: 155 mm
weight: 750 g
steel ring for the joint stand
Order-No. 5932
35,- €
Magnetic base
To use the Mini-vector in steel construction and engineering: The magnetic base is placed near the to be
measured point so it's within the range of the joint stand. Due to the arbitrary position of the mini-vector
it is also suitable for those points that could not be detected with other methods so far, or only with
inadequate safety / accuracy.
•
•
•
•
On/Off switch
Holding force: 600 N
M8 female thread to screw on the joint tripod
weight: 970 g
magnetic base for joint stand
Order-No. 5930
35,- €
2014/XX.X
2014/13.3
S u r v e y i n g
E q u i p m e n t .
182
Tension clamp
For the universal attachment of the joint stand on objects up to a span of 250 mm: If the clamp is screwed within the action radius of the joint stand, any object point can be measured with the Mini-vector.
•
•
•
•
•
•
Levers in magnesium die-casting, clamping mechanism of high-quality glass fiber reinforced plastic
Force build-up to 1200 N, easy with 2 fingers
easy to dose, for protective clamping
tighten securely, loosen quickly
various M8 female threads to screw in the joint stand
Weight: 425 g
tension clamp for joint stand
Order-No. 5934
60,- €
Suction holder
To use the Mini-vector on all surfaces with gas-tight surface such as glass, plastic, metal, coated wood
and marble.
•
•
•
•
•
casing material: Aluminium
suction plate: Ø 120 mm
holding force of the suction holder: 15 kg
M8 female thread to screw in the joint stand
The suction is done by switching the lever. The suction holder must be pressed with relaxed rubber
washer firmly onto the surface. When pressing the switch the resistance produced by the vacuum must
be felt clearly.
• Weight: 320 g
suction holder for joint stand, without vacuum display
Order-No. 5936
46,- €
Also available with vacuum display
The vacuum is continuously checked. If the warning-rocker sinks in the rocker arm (see picture 1), the
required holding force has been reached and the holder is loadable. If the rocker departs and the red
edge is visible, the vacuum is loosing force. If the edge is clearly visible (see Figure 2), the Suction
Holder must be removed from the ground and sucked again.
image 1
image 2
• Weight: 340 g
suction holder for joint stand, with vacuum display
2014/XX.X
2014/13.3
Order-No. 5938
76,- €
Page 2 (of 2)
S u r v e y i n g
E q u i p m e n t .
183
Ranging pole tripod
Standard design, 3-legged, with holding clamp (opening > 45 mm) on ball joint, height around 95 cm,
Legs PVC coated. Fluorescent Color.
ranging pole tripod FS 45, around 1,5 kg
Order-No. 2090
19,- €
ranging pole tripod FSG 45, around 2,8 kg
Order-No. 2090.G
28,- €
2014/XX.X
2014/13.4
Page 1 (of 1)
S u r v e y i n g
E q u i p m e n t .
184
Mobile pole clamp
for use with two-and three leg tripods that have a holder for cylindrical rods
• cylindrical pin with Ø 32 mm
• tilt- and turnable ball joint
• transport position of the spring clamp
• The clamping of the poles are available in 2 designs:
- spring clamp with straight sides for poles up to Ø 38 mm, clamping length 80 mm
- spring clamp with profiled legs for poles from Ø 32 to 50 mm
The mobile pole clamp is available with various sub-parts with internal threads. Thereby you can use
it other than only with the cylinder pin Ø 32 mm, but if required additionally on tripods or poles with
threaded connections:
additional
connections
spring clamp with
straight legs,
for poles up to Ø 38 mm
Order-No. 6250
70,- €
Order-No. 2095.MV
95,- €
M8
Order-No. 6250.M8
99,- €
Order-No. 6260.M8
124,- €
¼“ and 3/8“
Order-No. 6250.38
99,- €
Order-No. 6260.38
124,- €
5/8“
Order-No. 6250.58
99,- €
Order-No. 6260.58
124,- €
Leica vertical bolt
Order-No. 6250.L
Order-No. 6260.L
124,- €
none
32 mm
32 mm
M8
spring clamp with
profiled legs,
for poles from Ø 32 to 50 mm
1/4"
5/8"
99,- €
Leica St 12 x 27/40 mm
3/8"
application examples:
2014/XX.X
2014/13.5
Page 1 (of 1 )
S u r v e y i n g
E q u i p m e n t .
185
Carrying support „Carry Easy“ for field books
For heavy devices starting at 1000 g
When measuring in the field a variety of field computers (Laptops, Tablet PC, etc.) is used. Type, size
and weight vary widely. The methods of use are just as versatile: This allows computers to be placed on
external tripods, screwed to reflector and GPS poles with according holders or just held in the hand.
Computers that don't need a cable connection to the tachymeter or to the GPS antenna can easily be
used mobile with our carrying holder "carry easy". Big and heavy computers can be carried and operated
pleasantly over a long period of time that way.
The carrying holder consists of a carrying strap, a Y-handle, a hip support a pole piece and a rail for the
mounting of the holders for the computers.
• Carrying strap: black fabric tape processed as cross strap, with a good fit and easy length adjustment.
Stable quick release connections for the the mounting of the Y-handle.
• Y-handle: The stainless steel handle is axially rotatable and can be locked, so the field computer is
balanced to the center of gravity and comfortable to carry.
• Pole piece: The pole piece made of composite material has a diameter of 32 mm and connects the
Y-handle with the rail for the computer holder.
• Hip support: The wide ergonomically adapted support of powder coated aluminum provides a pleasant
distribution of the supporting force to the abdominal and hip area.
• Rail for computer holders: Via the slot the holders of the computer can be positioned for
optimum operation.
• Weight: 820 g
carrying holder “Carry Easy“, Type S
Order-No. 5715
185,- €
Possible uses:
Mobile use of the computer with carrying holder
For this purpose the computer holder is connected by a ball joint with the rail of the carrying holder. The
holder can be tilted over the ball head, so the screen of the computer is visible optimally.
In addition, the ball head is slidably mounted on the rail to get the ergonomically favorable distance of
the computer to the body for the operation. The position is fixed with a big star screw.
There are two different ball joints available which are used depening on the weight of the computer.
The following table shows which computer holders are for sale at the moment. Also the recommended
ball joint as well as the catalogue page, where you can find information about the holder.
colibri X6/X7
computer type
CF-18/19
DRS AMOR X10/X10gx
holder
Order-No.
describtion in the
catalogue
recomm. ball
joint Order-No.
describtion in
catalogue
Mettenmeier colibri X6
5375.1
118,– €
2014/12.5 p. 1
5082
65,– €
2014/12.5 p. 2
5385.1
148,– €
2014/12.5 p. 1
5082
65,– €
2014/12.5 p. 2
Panasonic CF-18
5170
170,– €
2014/12.6 p. 1
5081.3
53,– €
2014/12.6 p. 2
Panasonic CF-19
5140
170,– €
2014/12.6 p. 1
5081.3
53,– €
2014/12.6 p. 2
DRS AMOR X10
5255
205,– €
2014/12.4 p.1
5081.3
53,– €
2014/12.4 p. 2
DRS AMOR X10gx
5251
205,– €
2014/12.4 p.1
5081.3
53,– €
2014/12.4 p. 2
If the computer you are using isn't listed here, feel free to contact us!
2014/XX.X
2014/14.1
Page 1 (of 1)
S u r v e y i n g
E q u i p m e n t .
186
Variable use of the computer: Exchange between the caryying holder and GPS-/prism pole
For this case, the combination computer holder/ball, head/traverse is ideal. Within seconds, the computer can be
taken from the carrying holder – and the other way around. Therefore only the screw clamp on the pole is to be
loosend or tightened.
For this solution various computer holders are available as well. Already existing computer holders can be
used as well.
computer type
computer holder incl. the following
connection to the pole
Order-No.
describtion in
catalogue
Profile-Traverse, ball joint and screw clamp
5377.1 242,– €
2014/12.5 p.1
5387.1 272,– €
2014/12.5 p.1
Panasonic CF-18
5173.1 294,– €
Panasonic CF-19
5142.1 294,– €
DRS AMOR X10
5257.1 329,– €
DRS AMOR X10gx
5253.1 329,– €
For light computers up to 1000 g
Variable use of Handhelds etc.: Exchange from carrying holder and GPS -/ prism pole
When using light computers it is beneficial when the pole piece is clamped to the holder and can be
shifted on the rail with the slot. So it is possible to dismount the computer from the GPS - or prism pole
and to screw it to the carrying holder in unchanged position. An even faster change with optimal operating comfort is the result.
More describtion s. Type S above.
For the use of all light computers, with holders which are attachable to a pole with ø 32 mm.
carrying holder “Carry Easy“, Type L
Order-No. 5725
195,– €
Useable clamps and computer holders:
all designs of the SECO-System
14/12.3
gue 20 2
lo
ta
a
c
.
s
d
p. 1 an
2014/XX.X
2014/14.2
Page 1 (of 1)
S u r v e y i n g
E q u i p m e n t .
187
Brand tripods (heavy design)
with an added terrace on the tripod head.
manufacturer
material
clamping
Order-No.
NEDO
NEDO
NEDO
NEDO
Alu
Wood
Wood
Wood
eccentric
eccentric
Screws
eccentric + Screws
200524 Plus
200513 Plus
200533 Plus
200532 Plus
164,- €
164,- €
171,- €
207,- €
Tripod-star for inside measurements
The tripod star was developed specifically for the measurement on slippery surfaces or indoors. There it
is also suitable for the use of motorized total stations and laser scanners, if no special tripod should be
purchased.
Features and advantages:
• Boring (1x in each leg) to hold tripod feet
• Securing the tripod feet with rubber bands. This can be adjusted in length so that all conventional
tripod types can be used.
• The single tripod foot lies optimally between two hard rubber buffers. This guarantees a
wobble-free positioning of the tripod and prevents slipping on smooth floors.
• Can be folded for transport.
• Leg length: 51 cm, thus the diameter of the installed circle: 102 cm.
• Rubber band also in black.
• Weight: 900 g.
tripod star, with 3 rubber bands and 6 hard rubber buffers
2014/XX.X
2014/15.1
Page 1 (of 1)
Order-No. 1975
68,- €
S u r v e y i n g
E q u i p m e n t .
188
Tribrachs with forced centering
Tribrach with claw system (Leica, Nikon, Pentax, Topcon, Trimble)
Without optical plummet
tribrach, clutching system, black
Order-No. 3366.S
140,- €
tribrach, clutching system, green
Order-No. 3366.G
140,- €
Order-No. 3365.S
238 ,- €
With optical plummet
magnification:
image position:
focusing range:
accuracy of installation
2x
upright
0,35 to
± 0,5 mm/1,5 m
tribrach, clutching system, opt. plummet, black
Precision design (without image)
• Even higher torsional stiffness
• Even more precise centering of the instrument by spring loaded shutter
(for optimum repeatability)
• Very high vertical load capacity (max 12 kg)
• Central tightening nut for the spring plate
• Dirt-and water-proof foundation bolts, double ball bearings
high-precision tribrach, clutching system
without opt. plummet, black
Order-No. 3366.SP
199,- €
without opt. plummet, green
Order-No. 3366.GP
199,- €
with opt. Nadir plummet, black
with opt. Nadir plummet, green
2014/XX.X
2014/16.1
Page 1 (of 2)
Order-No. 3365.SP
Order-No. 3365.GP
278,- €
278,- €
S u r v e y i n g
E q u i p m e n t .
189
Optical plummets (make Geodesy)
When using tribrachs without built-in optical plummets, to center the tribrach, a centering with optical
plummet above the measurement point (which is inserted in the fitting centering system) can be used.
All optical plummets shown here are turnable to its axis freely (can be fixed with a locking screw
though). So for leveling a tubular level is enough. It is adjustable and has a accuracy of 45 "/ 2 mm.
Optical Data: See tripods with built-in optical plummet.
Colors: black, green, gray, yellow (when ordering please specify).
Centering with clutching system (Leica/WILD-centering)
Available with 2 different connections for prism holders or target signs:
1. with Leica prism connection (vertical bolt Ø 12 x 40 mm),
structural height matched to Leica (WILD)-Tachymeter with tilting axis height 196 mm:
optical plummet, clutching system, Leica, green
Order-No. 3481.2 G
275,- €
Order-No. 3484.2
275,- €
2. with 5/8“ thread pin, effective structural height 70 mm :
optical plummet, clutching system, 5/8’’
For prisms with 5/8’’ thread:
KA
tilting axis height tachymeter
Regarding 2.: extensions OL:
If the center of the prism should be the same height as the tilting axis of your total station, an extension
is required:
extension OL, 5/8’’-5/8’’
Order-No. 300.OL
26,50 €
For prisms with Leica vertical bolt connectionØ 12 x 27 mm:
extension OL, 5/8’’-Leica
Order-No. 367.OL
32,- €
Please specify prism type and tachymeter type when ordering!
2014/XX.X
2014/16.1
Page 2 (of 2)
S u r v e y i n g
E q u i p m e n t .
190
Tribrach inserts
After leveling the tripod with the total station or with an optical perpendicular in the forced centering,
inexpensive inserts can be used.
For measurements with height reference prisms and target signs should be on the horizontal tilting axis
height KA of the total station.
10 mm
Inserts for tribrachs with DIN-plug pin ø 34 mm
top with 5/8" thread pin:
DIN plug pin, 5/8" thread, with extension 10 mm
Order-No. 340
26,50 €
To adjust the prism height to the tilting axis height of instruments with
older design
Tilting axis height KA = 158 mm
for prisms with the structural height of 50 mm to center of the prism
Order-No. 305.108
31,50 €
extension
for prisms with the structural height of 100 mm to center of the prism (for example Zeiss KTR 1)
Order-No. 305.58
30,50 €
Order-No. 305.125
32,- €
Order-No. 305.75
30,50 €
Extensions DE with 5/8" thread, with DIN plug pin
KA
L
For screwing onto the DIN plug pin No. 340. If an existing plug-in pin is used if necessary a different
bandwidth must be considered.
To determine the length L please specify prism type, tachymeter type and height of the plug pin flange
when ordering.
For prisms with 5/8" female thread:
extension DE, 5/8’’-5/8’’, without plug pin
Order-No. 300.L
26,50 €
Order-No. 367.L
32,- €
Order-No. 366.L
34,- €
extension DE, 5/8"-Leica, 12 x 27 mm, without plug pin
KA
L
L
For prisms with Leica vertical bolt connection Ø 12 x 27 mm:
For prisms with Leica vertical bolt connection Ø 12 x 40 mm:
extension DE, 5/8"-Leica, 12 x 40 mm, without plug pin
Can also be used for prisms with vertical bolt connection Ø 12 x 27 mm.
Extensions with other threads on request!
2014/XX.X
2014/16.2
Page 1 (of 3)
S u r v e y i n g
E q u i p m e n t .
191
Inserts for tribrachs with claw system
tilting axis (tachymeter)
Leica- and Trimble tachymeters of newer generations have a uniform tilting axis height of
KA = 196 mm. When using prisms with "standardized" Leica vertical bolt connection
Ø 12 mm (Original-Leica-Prisms, our pirms of the series ONRT, HIP and TOP) with the tribrach
insert No. 3463.S the correct height of 196 mm results.
32 mm
32 mm
22,5 mm
KA = 196 mm
136 mm
40 mm
Ø 12
tribrach insert, clutching system, Leica Ø 12 x 40 mm, black
Order-No. 3463.S
83,- €
tribrach insert, clutching system, Leica Ø 12 x 40 mm, green
Order-No. 3463.G
83,- €
For tachymeters with other tilting axis heights and prisms or target signs with other connections (for
example M8-, M10-, ¼‘‘-, 5/8“ thread) we can deliver fitting adapters for the following inserts on request:
tribrach insert, clutching system, 5/8“ thread,
not turnable, H = 22,5 mm
Order-No. 3452
45,- €
turnable with friction, H = 32,0 mm
Order-No. 3456
85,50 €
turnable, locking screw, H = 32,0 mm
Order-No. 3455
96,50 €
More threads on request!
2014/XX.X
2014/16.2
Page 2 (of 3)
S u r v e y i n g
E q u i p m e n t .
192
Extensions DE for claw inserts
KA
L
To determine the length L please specify prism type, tachymeter type and the height of the claw insert
when ordering!
For prisms with 5/8" thread:
extension DE, 5/8"-5/8", without claw insert
Order-No. 300.L
26,50 €
Order-No. 367.L
32,- €
Order-No. 366.L
34,- €
L
L
KA
For prisms with Leica vertical bolt connection Ø 12 x 27 mm
extension DE, 5/8'-Leica 12 x 27 mm, without claw insert
For prisms with Leica vertical bolt connection Ø 12 x 40 mm
extension DE, 5/8'-Leica 12 x 40 mm, without claw insert
Can also be used for prism thread 12 x 27 mm.
Please request for extensions with other threads!
Adapter
To convert a Zeiss-Tribrach (DIN-plug pin) to a Leica/Wild-compatible tribrach.
tribrach insert for DIN plug pin Ø 34 mm
Order-No. 3451
243,- €
To convert a Leica/Wild tribrach to a Zeiss compatible tribrach (DIN plug pin).
tribrach insert for clutching system
2014/XX.X
2014/16.2
Order-No. 3450
95,- €
Page 3 (of 3)
S u r v e y i n g
E q u i p m e n t .
193
Holder for fixation of tribrachs on tabletops
For safe installation of measuring equipment on tables, work benches, etc.
•
•
•
•
•
Cylindrical plate made of anodized aluminum.
Ø 160 mm, height: 12 mm.
5/8“ male thread made of stainless steel to screw the tribrach on.
Brand screw clamp for plates up to 100 mm thickness.
Side length of the screw clam: 50 mm.
Weight: 850 g
Cylindrical holding plate with 5/8“ male thread and screw clamp
2014/XX.X
2014/16.3
Order-No. 3350
75,- €
Page 1 (of 1)
S u r v e y i n g
E q u i p m e n t .
194
Kugel-Zielzeichen für terrestrisches Laserscanning
1
Kugeln können von allen terrestrischen Lasern-Scannern (Impulslaufzeitverfahren und Phasenvergleichsverfahren)
als Passpunkt-, Kontroll- oder Verknüpfungspunkt verwendet werden.
Mit nachfolgenden Befestigungsmöglichkeiten lassen sich die Kugeln i.d.R. optimal im Messbereich platzieren.
Anwendung
Komplett-Set
Einzel-Produkt
Einzel-Produkt
Beschreibung
Die Kugel (bzw. das Prisma) ist
mit dem Einschrauben in den
M8-Bolzen zwangszentriert.
2
Kugel Ø 145 mm
mit M8-Adapter
Kugel Ø 145 mm und Prisma,
jeweils mit Zentrum-Abstand
100 mm von Wandbolzen M8
Anwendung
Adapter M8 - M8,
wirks. Länge = 27,5 mm.
Alu Sechskant mit
VA-Außengewinden
Kugel Ø 145 mm
mit M8-Innengewinde
Best.-Nr. 6010
Best.-Nr. 6005
Best.-Nr. 6000
110,- €
15,- €
95,- €
Komplett-Set
Einzel-Produkt
Einzel-Produkt
3
Kugel Ø 145 mm mit
Saughalter, befestigt an einem
Fenster
Anwendung
Kugel Ø 145 mm
mit Saughalter und Adapter
Saughalter mit
Adapter M8
Kugel Ø 145 mm
mit M8-Innengewinde
Best.-Nr. 6020
Best.-Nr. 6015
Best.-Nr. 6000
179,- €
84,- €
95,- €
Komplett-Set
Einzel-Produkt
Einzel-Produkt
Das Zentrum liegt immer
100 mm vor der Vorderseite des
Wandbolzens in der Achse des
M8-Gewindes (AdV-Version).
siehe Katalog 2014/6.1
Beschreibung
Saughalter Ø 120 mm,
Tragkraft 15 kg,
geeignet für alle Materialien mit
gasdichter Oberfläche wie Glas,
Kunststoff, Metall, beschichtetes
Holz und Marmor.
Die Saugwirkung erfolgt durch
Umlegung des Hebels.
Abstand des Kugelzentrums von
Oberfläche: ca. 20 cm.
Der Saughalter sitzt so stabil,
dass ohne Lageveränderung die
Kugel gegen ein Prisma
ausgewechselt werden kann.
Beschreibung
Standzylinder Ø 64 mm,
Gewicht: 1,5 kg,
gummierte Standfläche;
M8-Innengewinde
4
Kugel Ø 145 mm
mit Standzylinder
für stabile Untergründe
Kugel Ø 145 mm
mit Standzylinder
und Adapter M8
Standzylinder
mit Adapter M8 - M8
Standzylinder
mit M8-Innengewinde,
Best.-Nr. 6030
Best.-Nr. 6025
Best.-Nr. 6022
140,- €
45,- €
30,- €
2014/XX.X
2014/17.1
Page 1 (of 2)
Stabiler und sicherer Stand auf
allen nicht zu schrägen
Untergründen.
Bohnensting l SS pp ee cz i i a a l l vS eu rr m
v ee ys i s nu g n gE sq zu ui pb me he nö tr ..
195
Anwendung
Komplett-Set
Einzel-Produkt
Einzel-Produkt
Beschreibung
Standzylinder Ø 64 mm,
Gewicht: 1,5 kg,
gummierte Standfläche;
M8-Innengewinde
5
Kugel Ø 145 mm
mit Standzylinder
für stabile Untergründe
Anwendung
Kugel Ø 145 mm
mit Standzylinder
und M8-Gewinde
Standzylinder
mit Edelstahlgewinde M8
Standzylinder
mit M8-Innengewinde,
Best.-Nr. 6040
Best.-Nr. 6035
Best.-Nr. 6022
130,- €
35,- €
30,- €
Komplett-Set
Einzel-Produkt
Einzel-Produkt
Stabiler und sicherer Stand auf
allen nicht zu schrägen
Untergründen.
Beschreibung
Zwangszentrierung (Dreifuß mit
Klaueneinsatz) und
abgestimmter Zielhöhe.
Die Kugel kann gegen ein
Prisma oder Tachymeter
ausgetauscht werden.
6
Kugel Ø 145 mm,
mit Dreifuß und Adapter M8
Dreifuß (Klaueneinsatz) mit
Adapter 5/8"- M8
Kugel Ø 145 mm
mit M8-Innengewinde
Best.-Nr. 6050
Best.-Nr. 6045
Best.-Nr. 6000
164,50 €
69,50 €
95,- €
Kugel Ø 145 mm
mit Dreifuß und Adapter M8
Anwendung
Das Zentrum der Kugel bzw. des
Prismas liegt in Steh- und
Kippachse des Tachymeters
(Leica, Timble, usw.).
Beschreibung
Komplett-Set
Referenzkugel-Set, 6 Kugeln Ø 145 mm mit M8-Innengewinde,
in stabilem Kunststoffkoffer (575 x 470 x 250 mm),
ohne weiteres Zubehör
6
Koffer incl. 6 Kugeln
Ø 145 mm
Best.-Nr. 6053
599,- €
ll P i
Page
drucken
Schritt
zurück vor
Exit
2014/XX.X
2014/17.1
Page 2 (of 2)
l M
t
S u r v e y i n g
E q u i p m e n t .
196
Target plates for terrestial laser scanners
For registration and georeferencing
Target plates with chessboard patterns can be spotted by many terrestrial laser scanners. They can therefore be used depending on the application as a pass, control or connection point.
The newly developed target plates TALASCA are of high quality and are characterized as follows:
•
•
•
•
•
•
Torsion-resistant aluminum composite panels with light weight
absolutely flat surface
weatherproof
different connection options for use on a variety of carriers
Error free rotation of the target plate for alignment to various laser scanner positions
Possibility of geo-referencing of the target plates by forcing centered exchange for reflectors / prism (to
determine with tachymeter) or GNSS receiver
• Target sign level lies exactly in the axis of the connecting thread or the Leica bolt connection
• Checkerboard pattern in white / black, mat
• Optional circular level for vertical use of the blackboard
Objects can be recorded with the laser scanner from different points of view and the individual scans are
linked mathematically. Particularly for shots from strongly different angles it may be necessary to align
the linked target plates on the respective instruments standpoint. Here, in order to ensure the locationidentity with each shot, we recommend a perpendicular use with the help of the circular level. The center
of the plate remains unchanged in position and height when rotated about its central axis!
The target plates are available in 2 versions:
• with already in the plates holding foot integrated circular level (14 mm, plastic, 50’, not adjustable)
-s. Bild• without circular level (can be retrofitted with circular level DLZ, s. page 2)
Size: 297 x 210 mm
Depending on the application of the scanner the target plate TALASCA is available in various sizes
(range) and with various connections. Especially the use of the Leica bolt connection allows easy assembly and disassembly of plates. The fixing of the plates onto the bolt is done with a horizontal knurled
screw.
size of plate /
weight
297 x 210 mm
(A4) / 290 g
1/4, M8, 5/8"
size of a black
square
100 x 100 mm
Leica ø 12-27 mm
450 x 420 mm /
790 g
205 x 205 mm
connection
without circular level
in the foot
Order-No.
with circular level
in the foot
Order-No.
1/4“ camera female
thread
6070.W04
65,– €
6070.WL04
77,– €
M8 female thread
6070.W08
65,– €
6070.WL08
77,– €
5/8” female thread
6072.W
65,– €
6072.WL
77,– €
Leica vertical bolt
connection
ø 12 x 27 mm
6074.W
70,– €
6074.WL
82,– €
1/4“ female thread
6090.W04
107,– €
6090.WL04
119,– €
M8 female thread
6090.W08
107,– €
6090.WL08
119,– €
5/8” female thread
6092.W
107,– €
6092.WL
119,– €
Leica vertical bolt
connection
ø 12 x 27 m
6094.W
112,– €
6094.WL
124,– €
NOTE: On request, we provide target plates for test measurements. Please ask!
Size: 450 x 420 mm
2014/XX.X
2014/17.2
Page 1 (of 4)
S u r v e y i n g
E q u i p m e n t .
197
Accessories
Circular level DLZ
For perpendicular alignment of the target plate.
Plastic bubble level in aluminium casing. Accuarcy: 50’, not adjustable.
Can be screwed on both sides of the target plate (M6 thread).
Comes with a screw + 4 mm Allen key.
circular level DLZ (incl. allen key 4 mm)
Order-No. 6098
23,- €
Transportation bag for target plates
For storage and transport of up to 10 large target plates (450 x 420 mm)
•
•
•
•
•
Black, solid, water-resistant synthetic fabric
Padded, with zipper and handle
Outer dimensions: ca. 500 x 500 x 150 mm
Supports up to 3,5 kg
Weight: 1,8 kg
transportation bag for target plates
2014/XX.X
2014/17.2
Order-No. 6095
Page 2 (of 4)
100,- €
S u r v e y i n g
E q u i p m e n t .
198
Target plate holder
Suction holder with ball joint
Suction holder Ø 120 mm, holding force: 15 kg.
Suitable for all materials with gas-tight surface such as glass, plastic, metal, coated wood and marble.
The suction is done by tilting the lever.
The suction holder sits stable enough, so the ball can be replaced with a prism without change
in position.
Ball joint with M8 thread. Holding force: 35 kg.
The ball joint enables the perpendicular alignment and rotation about its axis (= target sign in the middle) with the circular level on the target plate. The location of the (logic) point remains unchanged.
suction holder with ball joint, M8 male thread
Order-No. 6067.8
94,- €
suction holder with ball joint Leica vertical bolt ø 12 x 27 mm
Order-No. 6067.L
104,- €
Camera tripod
For free positioning of the target plates in the scan area.
With the help of the ball head, the target plate can be quickly identified and aligned.
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
ball joint
telescopic: height pushed together: 64 cm, fully extended: 160 cm.
with crank for continuously variable height adjustment of center column
with rubber feet
supports up to 3,5 kg
weight: 1500 g
to increase the stability of the tripod, for example, when using large target plates and stronger winds,
there is the possibility of mounting a weight on the center column.
camera tripod with ball joint, 1/4“ camera male thread
Order-No. 6100.4
80,- €
camera tripod with ball joint, M8 male thread
Order-No. 6100.8
83,- €
camera tripod with ball joint, Leica vertical bolt ø 12 x 27 mm
Order-No. 6100.L
93,- €
2014/XX.X
2014/17.2
Page 3 (of 4)
S u r v e y i n g
E q u i p m e n t .
199
Instrument tripods
see catalogue 2014/15.1
Tribrachs
see catalogue 2014/16.1
Claw insert for tribrach on instrument tripod
The target plate on an instrument tripod is a very stable version of the mobile target plate positioning. With the
tripod and a corresponding insert you can align the board perpendicular very accurate to the laser scanner.
For georeferencing of the point the target plate can be exchanged: With a reflector for determining with a total
station or with a GNSS receiver for direct coordination. Here, the position of the tribrach will not change. If a full
3D coordination, and thus no height correction should be performed, in addition, the height of the reflector or
the GNSS receiver center must be adjusted to the height of the target plate center. Suitable adapters are available on request.
turnable claw insert for tribrach with 5/8“ male thread,
with locking screw
Order-No. 3455
claw insert for tribrach (not turnable) with
Leica vertical bolt ø 12 x 40 mm
Order-No. 3463.S
96,50 €
83,- €
Tripod plate on instrument tripod
By screwing a plate on the tripod head of the instrument tripod the target plate can be quickly aligned and
placed vertically by the ball head.
The plate with 5/8 " internal thread is made of aluminum, the inserts are made of stainless steel.
1/4" version (without image)
tripod plate 5/8“ with ball joint, 1/4“ male thread, holding force: 10 kg
Order-No. 6068.4
74,- €
Order-No. 6068.8
77,- €
Order-No. 6068.L
87,- €
M8 version
tripod plate 5/8“ with ball joint, M8 male thread, holding force: 15 kg
Version with Leica vertical bolt
tripod plate 5/8“ with ball joint, Leica vertical bolt ø 12 x 27 mm,
2014/XX.X
2014/17.2
Page 4 (of 4)
S u r v e y i n g
E q u i p m e n t .
200
Stub axis, Adapters, Extensions
DIN stub axis Ø 34 mm
For forced centering in the tribrach system Zeiss, with different female and male threads as well as Leica
vertical bolt Ø 12 x 27 mm.
1/4"
M8
3/8"
bottom
top
female thread
M8 (steel insert)
female thread
5/8"
Male thread
M8 (Stainless steel)
Male thread
3/8" (Stainless steel)
Order-No. 330.S 26,50 €
Order-No. 348.S 26,50 €
Male thread
Male thread
5/8"
Order-No. 312.S 26,50 €
Order-No. 310.S 26,50 €
Leica vertical bolt
St ø 12x27 mm
Leica vertical bolt
St ø 12x40 mm
Order-No. 363.S 32,00 E
Order-No. 363.S40 34,00 E
Male thread
M8 (Stainless steel)
Male thread
Order-No. 360 26,50 €
Order-No. 347 26,50 €
Male thread
Male thread
5/8"
Order-No. 345 26,50 €
Order-No. 305 26,50 €
Leica vertical bolt
St ø 12x27 mm
Leica vertical bolt
St ø 12x40 mm
Order-No. 367 32,00 E
Order-No. 367.40 34,00 E
DIN stub axis Ø 34 mm with integrated extension
To adjust the prism height to the tilting axis height of instruments with an older design.
for prisms with structural height of 50 mm up to prism center
DIN vertical bolt, 5/8" thread, with extension 108 mm
Order-No. 305.108
31,50 €
for prisms with structural height of 100 mm up to prism center (for example Zeiss KTR 1)
Order-No. 305.58
30,50 €
extension
for prisms with structural height 50 mm up to prism center
Order-No. 305.125
32,- €
for prisms with structural height 100 mm up to prism center
2014/XX.X
2014/18.1
Page 1 (of 3)
Order-No. 305.75
30,50 €
S u r v e y i n g
E q u i p m e n t .
201
Adapters
To connect reflectors or reflector holders to prism poles, perpendicular poles, pendulum holder, etc.
stainless steel, cross knurled
bottom
top
female thread
M8
Order-No. 385 15,00 E
male thread 5/8“
stainless steel
bottom
female thread
M8
top
Leica vertical bolt
St ø 12x27 mm
Leica vertical bolt
St ø 12x40 mm
Order-No. 373.27 15,00 E
Order-No. 373.40 19,00 E
anodized aluminium, ø 25 x 40 mm
1/4"
M8
3/8"
bottom
top
female thread
5/8"
male thread
M8 (stainless steel)
male thread
3/8" (stainless steel)
Order-No. 383 24,50 €
Order-No. 382 24,50 €
male thread
1/4“ (stainless steel)
male thread
5/8“
Order-No. 390 24,50 €
Order-No. 300 24,50 €
stainless steel (s. catalogue 2014/2.5 page 2)
bottom
female thread
5/8"
male thread
5/8"
top
Leica vertical bolt
St ø 12x27 mm
Leica vertical bolt
St ø 12x40 mm
Order-No. 377.27 24,50 €
Order-No. 377.40 30,50 €
Leica vertical bolt
St ø 12x27 mm
Leica vertical bolt
St ø 12x40 mm
Order-No. 378.27 24,50 €
Order-No. 378.40 30,50 €
Made of anodized aluminum with push button for one-handed operation (s. catalogue 2014/2.5 page 2).
When using prisms with a distance of 50 mm from the supporting foot to the center of the prism, you
get the same result as with the tilting axis height of the Leica reflector GPH1.
1/4"
M8
3/8"
bottom
top
Leica vertical bolt
connection
Au ø12x27 mm
male thread
M8 (stainless steel)
male thread
3/8" (stainless steel)
Order-No. 680 45,50 €
Order-No. 693 45,50 €
male thread
1/4“ (stainless steel)
male thread
5/8“
Order-No. 692 45,50 €
Order-No. 690 45,50 €
Made of anodized aluminum with push button for one-handed operation (s. catalogue 2014/2.5 page 2).
When using prisms with a distance of 60 mm from the supporting foot to the center of the prism, you
get the same result as with the tilting axis height of the Leica reflector GPH1.
bottom
top
Leica vertical bolt
connection
Au ø12x27 mm
male thread
5/8“
Order-No. 695 45,50 €
2014/XX.X
2014/18.1
Page 2 (of 3)
S u r v e y i n g
E q u i p m e n t .
202
Made of anodized aluminum with horizontal locking screw (s. catalogue 2014/2.5 page 2).
When using prisms with a distance of 50 mm from the supporting foot to the center of the prism, the
same results as with the tilting axis height of the Leica reflector GPH1.
The Order-No. 302.27 can be used with all Leica vertical bolts with ø12 mm. If you order Order-No.
302.40 the bolt has to be at least 40 mm long.
below
top
Leica vertical bolt
connection
Au ø 12x27 mm
male thread
5/8“
Order-No. 302.27 26,50 €
male thread
5/8“
Leica vertical bolt
connection
Au ø12x40 mm
Order-No. 302.40 27,50 €
Extensions 5/8"-Leica
Up to 20 cm length:
• made of aluminium, Leica bolt made of stainless steel
• for example to extend perpendicular and prism poles to desired lengths
Please note length L in mm with your order
top
5/8" female thread
5/8" male thread
Order-No.
Order-No.
Leica vertical bolt
ø 12 x 40 mm
Order-No.
5/8" female thread
295.L 26,50 €
300.L 26,50 €
377.L 34,- €
5/8" male thread
–
297.L 26,50 €
376.L 34,- €
Leica vertical boltconnection
Au ø 12x27 mm
290.L 32,- €
0291.L 32,- €
304.L 39,50 €
below
Starting at 20 cm length up to max. 60 cm length:
• made of fibre glass (GFK) with metal inserts, Leica-bolts made of stainless steel
• for example for extension of prism poles
Please note length L in mm with your order
Bei Bestellung bitte die Länge L in mm angeben.
5/8" female thread
below
top
Order-No.
Order-No.
Leica vertical bolt
ø 12 x 40 mm
Order-No.
5/8" female thread
295.GL 38,- €
300.GL 38,- €
377.GL 45,50 €
5/8" male thread
–
297.GL 38,- €
376.GL 45,50 €
Leica vertical boltconnection
Au ø 12x27 mm
290.GL 43,50 €
0291.GL 43,50 €
304.GL 51,- €
2014/XX.X
2014/18.1
5/8" male thread
Page 3 (of 3)
S u r v e y i n g
E q u i p m e n t .
203
Leica 360°- Miniprisma in Verbindung mit
Spezialzubehör von Bohnenstingl
Das Leica 360°- Miniprisma eignet sich besonders für Messungen mit automatischer Zielverfolgung im
Nahbereich. Die Reichweite der Streckenmessung beträgt hierbei geräte- und witterungsabhängig bis zu
500 m. Aufgrund seiner kompakten Bauweise und geringen Größe ist es prädestiniert für Einsatzgebiete
mit beengten Platzverhältnissen, z.B. auf dem Schnurgerüst.
Mit den hier vorgestellten neu entwickelten Adaptern kann das Prisma sowohl mit Standardzubehör
(z.B. herstellereigenen Prismenstäben) oder mit unserem Spezialzubehör eingesetzt werden.
Bild 1
Adapter für Leica 360°- Miniprisma
Zur Verwendung auf Leica-Stehbolzen Ø 12 mm.
Ausstattung:
Unten: Leica-Stehbolzenaufnahme für alle Leica-Stehbolzen mit Ø 12 mm.
Oben: 1/4“-Außengewinde aus Edelstahl zum Aufschrauben des Leica 360°-Miniprismas.
Der Adapter besitzt eine seitliche Schraube mit Sterngriff zur Sicherung des Prismas auf dem Stehbolzen.
Durch die sehr geringe Bauhöhe des Adapters eignet sich das Miniprismas besonders zum Einsatz auf
dem Schnurgerüst mit unserem Spezialzubehör.
Beispiele:
Bild 1: Mit Pendelhalter (s. Catalogue S. 2014/5.3 S.1)
Bild 2: Mit Pendelkopf und Ansetzdosenlibelle (s. Catalogue S. 2014/5.3 S.2)
Adapter für Leica 360°-MP, Leica St27 – 1/4“
Bild 2
Order-No. 5682
25,50 €
Verlängerung für Adapter Nr. 5682
Wenn das Leica 360°- Miniprisma dort eingesetzt werden soll, wo es auf den richtigen Abstand von
Stehbolzen und Prismenmitte ankommt, kann zwischen obigem Adapter und dem Prisma ein Zwischenstück eingesetzt werden. Somit ist die Originalhöhe der Leica-Prismen gegeben. Das Miniprisma kann
dann z.B. auf einem Leica-Prismenstab mit Skalierung verwendet werden.
86 mm
(= Leica GPH1)
Verlängerung für Adapter Leica 360°- Miniprisma (Nr. 5682)
Order-No. 5684
15,- €
Adapter + Verlängerung
Kombination von Adapter für Leica 360°- Miniprisma und Verlängerung.
Besitzt Originalhöhe der Standard-Prismen von Leica.
Adapter Nr. 5682 + Verlängerung Nr. 5684
Order-No. 5680
34,50 €
Justierbare Dosenlibelle 1/4"
•
•
•
•
Dosenlibelle kann mit Inbus-Schlüssel (2,5 mm) justiert werden.
Maße: Ø 30 mm, Höhe (ohne Gewinde): 43 mm
1/4"-Außengewinde
Wird mit Inbus-Schlüssel ausgeliefert
Dosenlibelle, justierbar, Schliffgenauigkeit 30’
Order-No. 1588.30
40,50 €
Dosenlibelle, justierbar, Schliffgenauigkeit 10’
Order-No. 1588.10
43,50 €
Absteckspitzen Leica
L
L
Bei Verwendung des Miniprismas mit Adapter + Verlängerung (= Kippachsenhöhe Leica GPH 1) ergeben
sich folgende Abstände b von Prismenmitte bis Absteckspitze: (s. Catalogue S. 2014/2.5 S.3)
Page
drucken
Schritt
zurück vor
Länge L
Abstand b bei Kippachsenhöhe = GPH 1
Order-No.
40 mm
140 mm
190 mm
100 mm
200 mm
250 mm
1857.2
1858.140
1858.190
Exit
2014/XX.X
2014/19.1
Page 1 (of 1)
20,– €
38,– €
40,50 €
S u r v e y i n g
E q u i p m e n t .
204
Verwendung der Trimble Target-ID mit
Prismen von Bohnenstingl
Die Target-ID des neuen Tachymeters S6 von Trimble ist ohne Einschränkungen mit unseren Prismen der
Serie HIP und dem Rundum-Prisma 6x60° einsetzbar.
Vor allem für Präzisionsmessungen kommen die bekannten Vorteile unserer Prismen mit ihrer Aufhängung
im sichtbaren Prismenzentrum (zentralsymmetrischer Punkt) zum Tragen. Zudem ermöglicht ihre schlanke
Bauweise die Verwendung unter schwierigen und beengten Verhältnissen.
Adapter:
Spezielle Adapter erlauben den Einsatz der Target-ID mit unserer Prismen-Serie HIP auf den verschiedensten Prismenstäben und einem Großteil unseres Spezialzubehörs.
L
Unsere Prismen-Serie HIP in Verwendung mit:
• Original Trimble-Prismenstab (5/8“- Außengewinde, Abstand zur Prismenmitte: 135 mm):
Adapter 5/8“, 2-teilig, für Target ID, L= 85 mm
Order-No. 5512.85
40,50 €
• Prismenstäben mit 5/8“- Innengewinde und Abstand zur Prismenmitte von 150 mm
(z.B. unser Prismenstab S_04.
Adapter 5/8“, 2-teilig, für Target ID, L= 100 mm
Order-No. 5512.100
40,50 €
Bitte fragen Sie die Adapter für Ihren Prismenstab bei uns an!
Beispiele zur Anwendung des Trimble Target-ID mit Prismen der Serie HIP und Rundum 6x60° auf dem
Schnurgerüst.
2014/XX.X
2014/19.2
Page 1 (of 1)
S u r v e y i n g
E q u i p m e n t .
205
Magnet-/Saughalter für GNNS-Antennen
und Prismen
Zur Verwendung auf mobilen Fahrzeugen sowie magnetische bzw. glatten Oberflächen
•
•
•
•
•
dreieckige stabile Alu-Grundplatte
3 beweglich gelagerte Standfüße zur Anpassung an leicht gewölbte Oberflächen
nachstellbare M8-Gewinde zur Adaption der Aufsatzelemente (Magnet, Saughalter)
Abstand der Standfußachsen: 135 mm
mit 5/8“-Außengewinde oder Leica-Zapfen Ø12 x 40 mm
Halter mit 3 Magneten
für alle magnetischen Oberflächen, z.B. Autodächer, Züge usw.:
bei kratzempfindlichen Oberflächen wird empfohlen unter die Magnete eine Kunststofffolie zu legen.
• mit 3 Rundmagnete Ø 40 mm
Magnet-Halter, 5/8“-Außengew., 3 Rundmagnete
Order-No. 6110
115,- €
Magnet-Halter, Leica-Zapfen Ø12 x 40 mm, 3 Rundmagnete
Order-No. 6112
115,- €
Order-No. 6116
165,- €
Magnet-Halter, Leica-Zapfen Ø12 x 40 mm, 3 schaltbare Magnete Order-No. 6118
165,- €
• mit 3 schaltbaren Magneten, Standfläche ca. 60 x 50 mm
Magnet-Halter, 5/8“-Außengew., 3 schaltbare Magnete
Halter mit 3 Kipphebel-Saugern
Für alle Oberflächen mit gasdichter Oberfläche wie Glas, Kunststoff, Metall, beschichtetes Holz
und Marmor.
•
•
•
•
Bild 1
Gehäusematerial: Aluminium
Saugscheibe: Ø 120 mm
Tragkraft eines Saughalters: 15 kg
Die Saugwirkung erfolgt durch Umlegung des Hebels. Der Sauger muss mit entspannter Gummischeibe
fest auf die anzusaugende Oberfläche gedrückt werden. Beim Umlegen des Kipphebels muss deutlich
der Widerstand der Unterdruckerzeugung spürbar sein.
Saug-Halter, 5/8“-Außengew., ohne Vakuumanzeige
Order-No. 6120
185,- €
Saug-Halter, Leica-Zapfen Ø12 x 40 mm, ohne Vakuumanzeige
Order-No. 6122
185,- €
Erhältlich auch mit Vakuumanzeige.
Das Vakuum wird kontinuierlich überprüft. Ist die Warn-Wippe im Kipphebel versenkt (s.Bild 1), wurde
die erforderliche Haltekraft erreicht und der Sauger ist voll belastbar. Fährt die Wippe aus und der rote
Rand wird sichtbar, lässt das Vakuum nach. Wenn der Rand deutlich zu sehen ist (s. Bild 2), muss der
Saughalter vom Untergrund gelöst und erneut angesaugt werden.
Saug-Halter, 5/8“-Außengew., mit Vakuumanzeige
Order-No. 6126
290,- €
Saug-Halter, Leica-Zapfen Ø12 x 40 mm, mit Vakuumanzeige
Order-No. 6128
290,- €
Bild 2
Adapter und Verlängerungen s. Catalogue S. 2014/18.1
2014/XX.X
2014/20.1
Page 1 (of 1)
S u r v e y i n g
E q u i p m e n t .
206
Verkaufs-, Liefer- und Zahlungsbedingungen
Für alle Lieferungen und Leistungen, sowie Reparaturen und
Servicearbeiten, gelten ausschließlich unseren allgemeinen
Geschäftsbedingungen. Abweichende Einkaufbedingungen des
Auftraggeber verpflichten uns nicht, auch wenn wir ihnen nicht
ausdrücklich widersprechen. Einkaufbedingungen des Kunden
werden von uns nur dann akzeptiert, wenn wir diesen schriftlich
zugestimmt haben.
Verbindlichkeit von Preisen
Alle Preise in Catalogueen, Prospekten und
Angeboten
sind grundsätzlich freibleibend. Sie werden erst mit unserer
Auftragsbestätigung verbindlich.
Alle Preise sind Netto-Preise in € (EURO) und gelten ausschließlich in Verbindung mit unseren Lieferbedingungen ab Werk
Kirchheim. Verpackungskosten werden nicht verrechnet. Falls keine
festen Preise vereinbart wurden, gelten unseren jeweils aktuellen Preislisten. Preisänderungen aufgrund erheblich gestiegener
Material- bzw. Einkaufskosten behalten wir uns ausdrücklich vor.
Zahlungsbedingungen
Soweit keine anderen Zahlungsbedingungen vereinbart wurden,
sind unsere Rechnung innerhalb 30 Tage ab Rechnungsdatum netto
ohne Abzug und innerhalb 10 Tagen mit 2% Skonto zahlbar. Nach
Überschreiten der vereinbarten Zahlungsfristen behalten wir uns
vor, Sie mit den entstehenden Kosten zu belasten (Verzugszinsen,
Inkasso-Gebühren, Gerichtskosten). An allen gelieferten Waren
behalten wir uns bis zur vollständigen Bezahlung das Eigentum
vor. Dies gilt auch für den verlängerten Eigentumsvorbehalt. Gerät
der Käufer in Zahlungsverzug, so erlischt jegliches Recht an den
gelieferten Waren. Sonderanfertigungen bzw. Dienstleistungen
sind nicht skontierfähig.
Rabattsystem
Auf alle im Catalogue geführten Artikel gewähren wir auf die
jeweils gültigen Listenpreise folgenden auftragswertabhängigen
Mengenrabatt:
Ab 1000,- € Nettowert 5 % Rabatt,
ab 1500,- € Nettowert 7,5 % Rabatt,
ab 2000,- € Nettowert 10 % Rabatt
Lieferzeiten / Auftragsbestätigungen
Die Lieferung erfolgt i.d.R. innerhalb einer Woche. Längere
Lieferfristen bestätigen wir. Teillieferungen erfolgen nach Absprache.
Eigentumsvorbehalt
Die von uns gelieferte Ware bleibt bis zur vollständigen Bezahlung
sämtlicher Forderungen Eigentum der Bohnenstingl GmbH.
Der Käufer verpflichtet sich mit seinem Auftrag, die unter
Eigentumsvorbehalt gelieferte Ware gegen übliche Risiken zu
versichern. Der Käufer ist berechtigt, die von uns gelieferte Ware
zu verarbeiten bzw. weiter zu veräußern. In beiden Fällen gilt der
verlängerte Eigentumsvorbehalt mit der Bestellung der Ware als
akzeptiert.
Die von uns angegebenen Lieferzeiten können aus betriebsbedingten Gründen angemessen überschritten werden. Verzögerungen
teilen wir Ihnen unmittelbar mit. Für Lieferverzögerungen, die
nicht von uns verursacht werden oder solche, die auf höherer
Gewalt beruhen, können wir nicht verantwortlich gemacht werden.
Rücklieferung von Waren
Rücksendungen von uns gelieferter Ware bedürfen unserer ausdrücklichen Zustimmung und erfolgt durch eine von uns veranlasste Abholung. Die Kosten für Rücksendungen tragen wir, wenn die
Rücklieferung wegen fehlerhafter Ware erfolgt. In allen anderen
Fällen sind die Kosten der Rücklieferung vom Kunden zu tragen.
Sonderanfertigungen werden nicht zurückgenommen.
Zeichnungen und Beschreibungen der Produkte
Die in unseren Catalogueen und Prospekten oder sonstigen
Unterlagen angegebenen Maße und Beschreibungen sind nur annähernd verbindlich. Änderungen und technische Verbesserungen
behalten wir uns ausdrücklich vor. Abbildungen sind zum besseren
Verständnis über den Lieferumfang vervollständigt.
Frachtkosten
Sendungen werden mit einem von uns beauftragen Paketdienst
ausgeliefert. Anderweitige Lieferung nach Absprache. Die uns
entstehenden Frachtkosten werden von uns vorgelegt und mit der
Ware berechnet. Ab 500,- uro erfolgt die Lieferung frei Haus. Das
Transportrisiko geht mit dem Verlassen unseres Werkes an den
Kunden über.
Mängelrüge
Offene Mängel sind uns unverzüglich, spätestens jedoch innerhalb von einer Woche nach Erhalt der Ware schriftlich und unter
genauer Bezeichnung der Beanstandung anzuzeigen. Der Kunde ist
verpflichtet, die Ware unmittelbar nach der Annahme vollständig
auf Mängel zu prüfen. Spätere Reklamationen können nur dann
berücksichtigt werden, wenn die Mängel bei Ankunft der Ware
nicht ersichtlich waren.
Transportschäden
Offensichtliche Transportschäden müssen dem Paketdienst sofort
angezeigt werden. Spätere Reklamationen von Transportschäden
werden von den Paketdiensten i..d.R. nicht akzeptiert.
Gerichtsstand / Erfüllungsort
Erfüllungsort ist Kirchheim, Gerichtsstand ist Besigheim bzw.
Heilbronn, es gilt allein deutsches Prozessrecht.
Stand 07.10.2014
Zahlungsverzug
Für alle Lieferungen von uns gelten ausdrücklich nur unsere
Zahlungsbedingungen. Gerät der Kunde in Zahlungsverzug, sind wir
berechtigt, neben Mahngebühren in üblicher Höhe Verzugszinsen
in Höhe von acht Prozentpunkten über dem Leitzinssatz zu berechnen. Die Forderung von weiteren, nachweislichen Verzugsschäden
ist ausdrücklich vorbehalten. Ist der Kunde mit mehr als 10 % der
bei uns offenen Gesamtforderung in Verzug, so können wir sämtliche Forderungen sofort fällig stellen.
Lieferverzug
Page
drucken
Schritt
zurück vor
Exit
2014/XX.X
2014/21
Page 1 (of 1)
Bohnensting l S p e z i a l v e r m e s s u n g s z u b e h ö r .
Bestellformular – Tel. +49 (0) 7143 / 89 10 03
Fax +49 (0) 7143 / 9 40 32
Bohnenstingl GmbH
Ernst-Ackermann-Str. 20/1
D-74366 Kirchheim/Neckar
Kunde (Rechnungsanschrift)
Abweichende Lieferanschrift:
Kunden-Nr.:
Firma:
Adresse:
Ansprechpartner:
Tel./Fax:
Email:
Bestellung
Order-No.
Bezeichnung
Stück
Einzelpreis
Summe:
Lieferung
Sofort
Termin
Bemerkung:
Bestellungen erfolgen auf Basis der AGB der Bohnenstingl GmbH
Ort
Page
drucken
Datum
Schritt
zurück vor
Unterschrift
Exit
Gesamtpreis

Special Surveying Equipment 2014

Transcription

Similar documents

Occasionsliste - Dedo Weigert Film GmbH

Big Foot

Geometrische Bestimmung der horizontalen und vertikalen

Marktübersicht TFT-Displays

Geschäftsbereich Licht

Welcome to the 11th Panzer`s German for